International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions

Fédération Internationale des Associations de Bibliothécaires et des Bibliothèques

Internationaler Verband der bibliothekarischen Vereine und Institutionen
Международная Федерация Библиотечных Ассоциаций и Учреждений
Federación Internacional de Asociaciones de Bibliotecarios y Bibliotecas
࿖䰙೒к佚णӮϢᴎᵘ㘨ড়Ӯ
ΕΎΒΘϜϤϟ΍ ΕΎδγΆϣϭ ΕΎϴόϤΠϟ ϲϟϭΪϟ΍ ΩΎΤΗϻ΍

About IFLA www.ifla.org

IFLA (The International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions) is the leading
international body representing the interests of library and information services and their users.
It is the global voice of the library and information profession.

IFLA provides information specialists throughout the world with a forum for exchanging ideas
and promoting international cooperation, research, and development in all fields of library
activity and information service. IFLA is one of the means through which libraries, information
centres, and information professionals worldwide can formulate their goals, exert their
influence as a group, protect their interests, and find solutions to global problems.

IFLA’s aims, objectives, and professional programme can only be fulfilled with the cooperation
and active involvement of its members and affiliates. Currently, approximately 1,600
associations, institutions and individuals, from widely divergent cultural backgrounds, are
working together to further the goals of the Federation and to promote librarianship on a global
level. Through its formal membership, IFLA directly or indirectly represents some 500,000
library and information professionals worldwide.

IFLA pursues its aims through a variety of channels, including the publication of a major
journal, as well as guidelines, reports and monographs on a wide range of topics. IFLA
organizes workshops and seminars around the world to enhance professional practice and
increase awareness of the growing importance of libraries in the digital age. All this is done in
collaboration with a number of other non-governmental organizations, funding bodies and
international agencies such as UNESCO and WIPO. IFLANET, the Federation’s website, is a
prime source of information about IFLA, its policies and activities: www.ifla.org

Library and information professionals gather annually at the IFLA World Library and
Information Congress, held in August each year in cities around the world.

IFLA was founded in Edinburgh, Scotland, in 1927 at an international conference of national

library directors. IFLA was registered in the Netherlands in 1971. The Koninklijke Bibliotheek
(Royal Library), the national library of the Netherlands, in The Hague, generously provides the
facilities for our headquarters. Regional offices are located in Rio de Janeiro, Brazil; Pretoria,
South Africa; and Singapore.
IFLA Series on Bibliographic Control Vol 44

ISBD
International Standard
Bibliographic Description
Consolidated Edition

Recommended by the ISBD Review Group

Approved by the Standing Committee of the

IFLA Cataloguing Section

De Gruyter Saur
IFLA Series on Bibliographic Control
edited by Sjoerd Koopman

ISBN 978-3-11-026379-4
e-ISBN 978-3-11-026380-0
ISSN 1868-8438

Bibliographic information published by the Deutsche Nationalbibliothek

The Deutsche Nationalbibliothek lists this publication in the Deutsche Nationalbibliografie;
detailed bibliographic data is available in the Internet at http://dnb.d-nb.de.
Walter de Gruyter GmbH & Co. KG, Berlin/ Boston
© 2011 by International Federation of Library Associations
and Institutions, The Hague, The Netherlands
∞ Printed on permanent paper
The paper used in this publication meets the minimum requirements of American National Standard –
Permanence of Paper for Publications and Documents in Libraries and Archives
ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (R1997)
Printing and binding: Strauss GmbH, Mörlenbach
Printed in Germany
www.degruyter.com
ISBD 2011

CONTENTS
Introduction .................................................................................................................... xi
A General Chapter............................................................................................1
A.1 Scope, purpose and use ........................................................................1
A.2 Treatment of resources ..........................................................................2
A.3 Outline of the ISBD and punctuation ....................................................10
A.4 Sources of information .........................................................................19
A.5 Language and script of the description ................................................25
A.6 Abridgements and abbreviations .........................................................26
A.7 Capitalization ........................................................................................27
A.8 Misprints ...............................................................................................28
A.9 Symbols, etc. ........................................................................................30
A.10 Imperfections ........................................................................................30
A.11 Examples..............................................................................................31

SPECIFICATION OF ELEMENTS.............................................................................. 33

0 Content form and media type area ......................................................33

0.1 Content form.........................................................................................35
0.2 Media type ............................................................................................39
1 Title and statement of responsibility area.............................................43
1.1 Title proper ...........................................................................................45
1.2 Parallel title ...........................................................................................59
1.3 Other title information ...........................................................................65
1.4 Statement of responsibility ...................................................................74
2 Edition area ..........................................................................................93
2.1 Edition statement .................................................................................95
2.2 Parallel edition statement ...................................................................101
2.3 Statement of responsibility relating to the edition ..............................103
2.4 Additional edition statement ...............................................................104
2.5 Statement of responsibility relating to an
additional edition statement ...............................................................105
3 Material or type of resource specific area ..........................................107
3.1 Mathematical data (Cartographic resources) .....................................109
3.2 Music format statement (Notated music) ........................................... 115
3.3 Numbering (Serials) ........................................................................... 117

v
 ISBD 2011

4 Publication, production, distribution, etc., area ..................................123

4.1 Place of publication, production and/or distribution ...........................127
4.2 Name of publisher, producer and/or distributor ..................................135
4.3 Date of publication, production and/or distribution .............................145
4.4 Place of printing or manufacture ........................................................153
4.5 Name of printer or manufacturer ........................................................155
4.6 Date of printing or manufacture .........................................................156
5 Material description area ....................................................................157
5.1 Extent .................................................................................................159
5.2 Other physical details .........................................................................171
5.3 Dimensions.........................................................................................177
5.4 Accompanying material statement .....................................................183
6 Series and multipart monographic resource area ..............................185
6.1 Title proper of a series or multipart
monographic resource .......................................................................188
6.2 Parallel title of a series or multipart
monographic resource .......................................................................189
6.3 Other title information of a series or multipart
monographic resource .......................................................................191
6.4 Statement of responsibility relating to a
series or multipart monographic resource ..........................................193
6.5 International standard number of a series or
multipart monographic resource ........................................................195
6.6 Numbering within a series or multipart
monographic resource .......................................................................196
7 Note area............................................................................................199
7.0 Notes on the content form and media type area
and for special types of material ........................................................201
7.1 Notes on the title and statement of
responsibility area ..............................................................................203
7.2 Notes on the edition area and the bibliographic
history of the resource........................................................................ 211
7.3 Notes on the material or type of resource
specific area .......................................................................................219
7.4 Notes on the publication, production, distribution,
etc., area ............................................................................................223
7.5 Notes on the material description area ..............................................225
7.6 Notes on the series and multipart monographic
resources area ...................................................................................227
7.7 Notes relating to the contents ............................................................229
7.8 Notes on the resource identifier and terms of
availability area ..................................................................................233
7.9 Notes on the issue, part, iteration, etc.,
that forms the basis of the description ...............................................235
vi
ISBD 2011

7.10 Other notes.........................................................................................237

7.11 Notes relating to the copy in hand .....................................................239
8 Resource identifier and terms of availability area ...............................241
8.1 Resource Identifier ..............................................................................243
8.2 Key title (Continuing resources) ..........................................................246
8.3 Terms of availability .............................................................................247

Appendices ................................................................................................................ 249

Appendix A: Multilevel description .................................................................251
Appendix B: Bi-directional records .................................................................253
Appendix C: Bibliography ...............................................................................255
Appendix D: Abbreviations .............................................................................257
Appendix E: Glossary .....................................................................................259

Index ................................................................................................................... 281

vii
 ISBD 2011

Members of the ISBD Review Group (as of December 2010)

John D. Byrum, Jr. Library of Congress, USA (retired)

(corresponding member)
Elena Escolano Rodríguez (chair) Biblioteca Nacional de España, Spain
Renate Gömpel Deutsche Nationalbibliothek, Germany
顾犇 (Ben Gu) National Library of China
Mauro Guerrini Università di Firenze, Italy
Tuula Haapamäki National Library of Finland
John Hostage Harvard Law School, USA
Lynne C. Howarth University of Toronto, Canada
Natalia Kasparova Russian State Library
Irena Kavčič National and University Library,
Slovenia
이재선 (Jaesun Lee) National Library of Korea
Françoise Leresche Bibliothèque nationale de France
Agnès Manneheut Université de Nantes, France
(corresponding member)
Dorothy McGarry University of California, Los Angeles,
USA (retired)
Glenn Patton OCLC Online Computer Library
Center, USA

viii
ISBD 2011

Liaisons with other groups

Name Institution Representation
Anders Cato National Library of Katalogiseringsregler för
Sweden svenska bibliotek
Gordon Dunsire University of Semantic Web communities
Strathclyde, Scotland
Massimo Gentili- Biblioteca Nazionale International Association of
Tedeschi Braidense, Italy Music Libraries, Archives,
and Documentation Centres
Hanne Hørl Dansk Katalogiseringsregler og
Hansen BibliotekCenter, bibliografisk standard for
Denmark danske biblioteker
Cristina Magliano ICCU, Italy Commissione RICA
François-Xavier ISSN International ISSN International Centre
Pelegrin Centre
Tom Pols Koninklijke FOBID, Netherlands
Bibliotheek, Library Forum
Netherlands
Margaret Stewart Library and Archives Joint Steering Committee
Canada for Development of RDA
Regina Varnienė- Martynas Mažvydas Kompiuterinių
Janssen National Library of bibliografinių ir
Lithuania autoritetinių įra.ų
sudarymo metodika
WATANABE Tezukayama Gakuin Japan Library Association
Takahiro University, Japan
Mirna Willer University of Zadar, Pravilnik i priručnik za
Croatia izradbu abecednih kataloga

ix
ISBD 2011

INTRODUCTION

The International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD) is intended to serve as a

principal standard to promote universal bibliographic control, that is, to make universally
and promptly available, in a form that is internationally acceptable, basic bibliographic
data for all published resources in all countries. From the beginning, the main goal of the
ISBD has been to provide consistency when sharing bibliographic information.
The ISBD is the standard that determines the data elements to be recorded or transcribed
in a specific sequence as the basis of the description of the resource being catalogued. In
addition, it employs prescribed punctuation as a means of recognizing and displaying
data elements and making them understandable independently of the language of the
description.
A new Statement of International Cataloguing Principles was published by IFLA in
2009.1 In these principles, which replace and broaden the Paris Principles2 of 1961, the
fifth section is devoted to bibliographic description where it is stated that “Descriptive
data should be based on an internationally agreed standard.”3 A footnote identifies the
ISBD as the standard for the library community, as the statement of principles is intended
not only for libraries but also for archives, museums, and other communities.
Although the development of this standard was originally motivated by the automation of
bibliographic control as well as by the economic necessity of sharing cataloguing, the
ISBD continues to be useful for and applicable to bibliographic descriptions of all kinds
of published resources in any type of catalogue, whether manual or machine based.
Those agencies using national and multinational cataloguing codes could apply this
internationally approved standard conveniently in their catalogues.
Work on the ISBD has been guided by the following objectives and principles:
 The ISBD provides consistent stipulations for description of all types of published
resources, to the extent that uniformity is possible, and specific stipulations for
specific types of resources as required to describe those resources.
 The ISBD provides the stipulations for compatible descriptive cataloguing
worldwide in order to aid the international exchange of bibliographic records
between national bibliographic agencies and throughout the international library
and information community (including producers and publishers).
 The ISBD accommodates different levels of description, including those needed
by national bibliographic agencies, national libraries, and other libraries.
 The descriptive elements needed to identify and select a resource must be
specified.
 The set of elements of information rather than the display or use of those elements
in a specific automated system provides the focus.

1 IFLA Cataloguing Principles: the Statement of International Cataloguing Principles (ICP) and
its Glossary in 20 Languages. Ed. by Barbara B. Tillett and Ana Lupe Cristán. (München:
K.G. Saur, 2009). Also available at http://www.ifla.org/en/publications/statement-of-
international-cataloguing-principles
2 International Conference on Cataloguing Principles. Report. (London: International Federation
of Library Associations, 1963), 91-96.
3 IFLA Cataloguing Principles, 5.3
xi
 ISBD 2011

 Cost-effective practices must be considered in developing the stipulations.

The organization of provisions in the present text is to give first the general stipulations
that apply to all types of resources, then the specific stipulations that add information
required for that specific type of resource or are exceptions to a general rule.
In the terminology of the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records (FRBR),4
the ISBD is applied to describe manifestations, by means of description of the item in
hand as an exemplar of the entire manifestation. In this way, the ISBD applies the
Statement of International Cataloguing Principles, which establishes that “A
bibliographic description typically should be based on the item as representative of the
manifestation”.5
In the ISBD, national bibliographic agencies are called upon to prepare definitive
descriptions that “contain all the mandatory elements set out in the ISBD insofar as the
information is applicable to the resource being described” (see A.1.3). This practice is
also recommended for application by libraries that share bibliographic data with each
other. Inclusion of a data element is considered mandatory in all cases for certain
elements, and in other cases is considered mandatory if it is necessary for identification
of the resource being described or otherwise considered important to users of a
bibliography or a catalogue. The stipulations of the ISBD can be complemented by the
IFLA Guidelines for the Application of the ISBDs to the Description of Component
Parts.6

ISBD and FRBR relationship

This edition of the ISBD reflects the effort to bring description of all materials to a
common state of conformity with FRBR. This aspect has entailed a close examination of
the ISBD data elements to make optional those that are also optional in FRBR. In no
case is a data element mandatory in FRBR but optional in the ISBD.
The ISBD Review Group considered that it was essential for IFLA to clarify the
relationship between the ISBDs and the FRBR model. In trying to adapt ISBD
terminology to the FRBR terms work, expression, manifestation and item and to replace
terms such as publication, the group encountered difficulties, owing in large part to the
fact that the terms used in FRBR were defined in the context of an entity-relationship
model conceived at a higher level of abstraction than the specifications for the ISBDs. As
a paper presented at the Frankfurt IFLA Meeting of Experts on a International
Cataloguing Code (IME-ICC) had cautioned, “FRBR terminology should not be merely
incorporated such as it stands into the ISBDs and cataloguing rules, but these should keep
their own specific terminology, and provide accurate definitions showing how each term

4 IFLA Study Group on the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records, Functional
Requirements for Bibliographic Records: Final Report (München: K.G. Saur, 1998). Also
available at
http://www.ifla.org/en/publications/functional-requirements-for-bibliographic-records
5 IFLA Cataloguing Principles, 5.2.
6 International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions, Guidelines for the
application of the ISBDs to the description of component parts. (London: IFLA Universal
Bibliographic Control and International MARC Programme, 1988). Available online at:
http://www.ifla.org/files/cataloguing/isbd/component-parts.pdf
xii
ISBD 2011

in this specific terminology is conceptually related to the FRBR terminology”.7 The

review group agreed with the advice and decided, in 2003, to avoid using FRBR
terminology in the ISBD. Nevertheless, the ISBD Review Group did introduce some
changes in wording. One change is the use of the term resource rather than item or
publication. This decision was taken in order to avoid confusion, because the use of the
term item in the former ISBDs is different from the term item as used in FRBR.
The review group believed that development of a table to detail the relationship of each
of the elements specified in the ISBDs to its corresponding entity-attribute or relationship
as defined in the FRBR model would satisfy the need to make clear that the ISBDs and
FRBR themselves enjoyed a harmonious relationship. The table of these relationships,
based on the ISBDs published at the time, was issued as Mapping ISBD Elements to
FRBR Entity Attributes and Relationships, approved by the Cataloguing Section’s
Standing Committee on July 9, 2004.8
The ISBD Review Group wants to acknowledge all previous revision work and
publications of the ISBDs, as this new version has the intention of respecting the
stipulations associated with the individual ISBDs as much as possible, in order to adhere
to the objective of providing consistent stipulations for descriptions of all types of
resources. The following is a brief summary in recognition of this previous work.9

History
The International Standard Bibliographic Descriptions date back to 1969, when the IFLA
Committee on Cataloguing sponsored an International Meeting of Cataloguing Experts.
This meeting produced a resolution that proposed the creation of standards to regularize
the form and content of bibliographic descriptions. As a result, the Committee on
Cataloguing put into motion work that ultimately would provide the means for a
considerable increase in the sharing and exchange of bibliographic data. This work
resulted in the concept of the International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD).
The first of the ISBDs was the International Standard Bibliographic Description for
Monographic Publications (ISBD(M)), which appeared in 1971. By 1973, this text had
been adopted by a number of national bibliographies and, with translations of the original
English text into several other languages, had been taken into account by a number of
cataloguing committees in redrafting national and multinational rules for description.10
Comments from users of the ISBD(M) led to the decision to produce a revised text that
was published in 1974 as the “First standard edition”. The International Standard
Bibliographic Description for Serials (ISBD(S)) was also published in 1974.

7 Patrick Le Boeuf, "Brave new FRBR world". In IFLA Cataloguing Principles: Steps towards
an International Cataloguing Code: Report from the 1st IFLA Meeting of Experts on an
International Cataloguing Code, Frankfurt, 2003. Available at http://www.d-
nb.de/standardisierung/pdf/papers_leboeuf.pdf
8 Available at: http://www.ifla.org/files/cataloguing/isbd/isbd-frbr-mapping.pdf
9 For a more detailed introduction to the ISBDs, see: John Byrum, “The Birth and Re-birth of the
ISBDs: Process and Procedures for Creating and Revising the International Standard
Bibliographic Descriptions”, 66th IFLA Council and General Conference, Jerusalem, Israel,
2000. Available at:
http://archive.ifla.org/IV/ifla66/papers/118-164e.htm
10 A complete list of the superseded ISBDs is available at: http://www.ifla.org/en/node/900
xiii
 ISBD 2011

In 1975, the Joint Steering Committee for Revision of the Anglo-American Cataloguing
Rules proposed to the IFLA Committee on Cataloguing that a general international
standard bibliographic description suitable for all types of library materials should be
developed. The ISBD(G), published in 1977, was the result. The ISBD(M) was then
revised to bring it into line with the ISBD(G), and the “First standard edition revised”
was published in 1978.
Other ISBDs subsequently appeared for specific types of materials: ISBD(CM) for
cartographic materials, ISBD(NBM) for nonbook materials, and a revised ISBD(S) for
serials were published in 1977; ISBD(A) for older monographic publications
(antiquarian) and ISBD(PM) for printed music were published in 1980.

Revision, 1980–2000
At the IFLA World Congress in Brussels, held in August 1977, the Standing Committee
of the IFLA Section on Cataloguing made important new decisions in relation to IFLA’s
programme of ISBDs. It was decided that all ISBD texts would be fixed to a life of five
years, after which revision would be considered for all texts or for particular texts. As a
result, the Standing Committee formed an ISBD Review Committee; it first met in 1981
to make plans for reviewing and revising the ISBDs.
The ISBDs were republished as follows: ISBD(M), ISBD(CM) and ISBD(NBM) in 1987,
ISBD(S) in 1988, ISBD(CF) for computer files in 1990, ISBD(A) and ISBD(PM) in
1991, and ISBD(G) in 1992. By the end of the 1980s, the first general review project had
been completed. Thereafter, ISBD(CF) became ISBD(ER) for electronic resources,
published in 1997.
In 1992, the IFLA Section on Cataloguing with the cooperation of the Section on
Classification and Indexing set up a Study Group on the Functional Requirements for
Bibliographic Records (FRBR). One immediate consequence of this development was
the decision to suspend most revision work on the ISBDs while the FRBR Study Group
pursued its charge to “recommend a basic level of functionality and basic data
requirements for records created by national bibliographic agencies”. In 1998, the FRBR
Study Group published its Final Report after its recommendations were approved by the
IFLA Section on Cataloguing's Standing Committee. At that time the ISBD Review
Group was reconstituted to resume its traditional work. As expected, the IFLA Section
on Cataloguing’s Standing Committee asked the ISBD Review Group to initiate a full-
scale review of the ISBDs. The objective of this “second general review project” was to
ensure conformity between the provisions of the ISBDs and the data requirements in
FRBR for the “basic level national bibliographic record”.

Revision, 2000–2006
In this general revision project, ISBD(S) was revised to ISBD(CR) for serials and other
continuing resources, and was published in 2002 following meetings to harmonize the
ISBD(S) with the ISSN guidelines and with the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd
edition. A revised ISBD(M) was also published in 2002, and a revised ISBD(G) in 2004.
ISBD(CM) and ISBD(ER) underwent the worldwide review process and were revised
following that process, but were not finished at that time because work was begun on a
consolidated ISBD.

xiv
ISBD 2011

Preliminary consolidated edition, 2007

At the Berlin IFLA Conference in 2003, the ISBD Review Group decided to form the
Study Group on Future Directions of the ISBDs. This study group decided that
consolidation of all ISBDs was feasible. The study group was charged by the review
group with the task of preparing a definitive text, resulting in the preliminary
consolidated edition.
The ISBD Review Group was trying to solve some of the problems that today’s
cataloguers face. The consolidated ISBD is intended to serve as a standard for
description of all types of published materials up to the present date, and to make it easier
to describe resources that share characteristics of more than one format. In addition, it
facilitates the work of keeping the ISBD updated and consistent for the future.
All these last revisions as well as the revision process for the ISBD(A) in 2006 were
taken into account in the preliminary consolidated edition of the ISBD. The resulting text
was established by means of collocating related provisions from each ISBD in a new
structure, merging the published versions of texts for different types of materials as the
basis on which to work, updating the result with the revised versions of ISBD reached in
the last few years, and generalizing wording.
In accordance with the principle that the focus of the ISBD is the elements and not the
display and endeavouring to improve interoperability between bibliographic retrieval
systems and display formats, the prescribed punctuation was slightly changed in the
preliminary consolidated edition in 2007. For example, punctuation is repeated where an
area ends with a point and the following area is preceded by prescribed punctuation that
begins with a point. Also, if different elements in the same area are supplied, each is
enclosed in its own set of square brackets. This will give consistency in other displays
that differ from the ISBD display.
Grateful acknowledgement is made to all the study groups involved in the review of
specific ISBDs, and to the previous chair of the ISBD Review Group, John D. Byrum,
who carried out the majority of revision projects. Special thanks are due to Dorothy
McGarry, chair of the Study Group on Future Directions of the ISBDs, for the editorial
oversight she contributed in the revisions of several of the ISBDs and in the production of
the successive drafts and final version of the preliminary consolidated edition.

Consolidated edition, 2011

Despite the changes introduced by the revision projects summarized above, the essential
structure and data components of the ISBD have proved relatively stable over the years
and continue to be widely used in full or part by creators of cataloguing codes and
metadata schemas. However, given the changing nature of resources and recent
technological developments that have impacted bibliographic access, the ISBD Review
Group has decided to focus on maintaining the consolidated edition of the ISBD, which
has superseded the individual ISBDs. In maintaining the ISBD, the review group will
continue to take into account changes to national and multinational cataloguing codes.
The ISBD Review Group appointed a Material Designations Study Group (MDSG) in
2003 to investigate the general and specific material designations (GMD/SMD) as
applied to multiple formats and mixed media. This study group was aware of concerns
that had been raised by the Working Group on General Material Designations at the first
IFLA Meeting of Experts on an International Cataloguing Code (IME ICC) in 2003 in

xv
 ISBD 2011

Frankfurt. As Tom Delsey had noted in a 1998 study of the logical structure of Part I of
the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules,11 the GMD terms reflected a confusing mix of
physical format, class of material, form of carrier, and notation (e.g. Braille). Moreover,
the location of the GMD immediately following the title proper was seen as interrupting
the logical order and sequencing of title information.
By the IFLA 2007 meetings in Durban, the preliminary consolidated edition of the ISBD
had been published, and the MDSG had drafted a proposal for a content/carrier
component for ISBD Review Group discussion. The draft took into account version 1.0
of the RDA/ONIX Framework for Resource Categorization12 (August 2006), and the
subsequent drafts of RDA: Resource Description & Access13 incorporating the
RDA/ONIX Framework. These and other documents were instrumental to the work of
the study group as it addressed the structure and terminology of an independent ISBD
component for content/carrier.
Following further revisions and a period of worldwide review, a new Area 0, called
Content Form and Media Type Area, containing the elements content form and media
type, was approved in 2009 and published on the IFLA website.14 It is now included in
the ISBD for the first time, and the general material designation has been removed from
Area 1.
Some other important changes in the current edition are: the text has been edited to avoid
redundancy and achieve more harmonization; the levels of mandatory, optional and
conditional elements have been simplified to indicate only when an element is
mandatory; the basis of the description, which constitutes the object of the bibliographic
description, has been clarified; more attention has been paid to multipart monographic
resources; the sources of information have been revised for consistency of terminology
and application; more consideration has been given to the requirements of nonroman
scripts; stipulations for the description of older monographic resources that did not
correspond to the ISBD have been removed; it has been clarified that qualifiers are
different from elements; area 5 has been renamed and now allows printed resources to be
described consistently with other materials; the name of area 6 has been expanded; and
finally, many more definitions have been included in the glossary.

11 Tom Delsey. The Logical Structure of the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. 1998-1999.
Available at: http://www.rda-jsc.org/docs.html
12 RDA/ONIX Framework for Resource Categorization. 2006. Available at: http://www.rda-
jsc.org/working2.html#chair-10
13 RDA: Resource Description & Access. http://www.rdatoolkit.org/ ;
http://www.rda-jsc.org/rda.html
14 ISBD Area 0: Content Form and Media Type Area. Available at:
http://www.ifla.org/publications/isbd-area-0-content-form-and-media-type-area
xvi
ISBD 2011

Special thanks are due to John Hostage, editor of the Consolidated ISBD, for his editorial
oversight and contributions in the production of the successive drafts and final version of
this document. I would also like to acknowledge the many contributions from consulting
members of the review group, representatives of national libraries, national library
networks and international institutions, as well as those received as a result of the
worldwide review process from both institutions and individuals. These contributions
have provided many suggestions to help the ISBD Review Group in revision of the
ISBD.

Madrid, Spain Elena Escolano Rodríguez, Chair

December 2010 ISBD Review Group

xvii
ISBD 2011

A GENERAL CHAPTER

A.1 Scope, purpose and use

A.1.1 Scope
The International Standard Bibliographic Description (ISBD) specifies the requirements
for the description and identification of published resources that are likely to appear in
library collections. It is also concerned with resources for use by the visually impaired
(e.g. in eye-readable form or in embossed form) as well as those published for limited
distribution or for sale on demand. The ISBD determines the data elements to be
recorded or transcribed in a specific sequence as the basis of the description of the
resource being catalogued and employs prescribed punctuation as a means of recognizing
and displaying data elements and making them understandable independently of the
language of the description.
The provisions of the ISBD relate first to bibliographic records produced by national
bibliographic agencies and second to bibliographic records produced by other cataloguing
agencies.
It is anticipated that national or international committees responsible for preparing codes
of cataloguing rules will use the ISBD as the basis for their rules on description of library
materials to describe all aspects of each resource, including its content, its carrier, and its
mode of issuance.

A.1.2 Purpose
The primary purpose of the ISBD is to provide the stipulations for compatible descriptive
cataloguing worldwide in order to aid the international exchange of bibliographic records
between national bibliographic agencies and throughout the international library and
information community.
By specifying the elements that compose a bibliographic description and by prescribing
the order in which those elements should be presented, and secondarily the punctuation
by which they should be separated, the ISBD aims to:
 make records from different sources interchangeable, so that records produced in
one country can be easily accepted in library catalogues or other bibliographic
lists in any other country;
 assist in the interpretation of records across language barriers, so that records
produced for users of one language can be interpreted by users of other languages;
 assist in the conversion of bibliographic records to electronic form;
 enhance the portability of bibliographic data in the Semantic Web environment
and the interoperability of the ISBD with other content standards.

A.1.3 Use
The ISBD provides stipulations to cover the maximum amount of descriptive information
that may be required in a range of different bibliographic activities. It therefore includes
elements that are essential to one or more of those activities, but not necessarily to all.
A small number of elements of the description, such as a title, are mandatory and must be
included in any ISBD description. Other elements, such as an edition statement, are
1
A ISBD 2011

mandatory if the information is available. Elements are designated by the term

Mandatory or Mandatory if available or Mandatory if applicable after the heading for the
element. In the text, terminology such as is given or are given is used for these elements,
while terminology such as may be given is used for elements that are not mandatory.
National bibliographic agencies are called on to accept responsibility for creating the
definitive record for each resource issued in their respective countries. It is therefore
recommended that descriptions prepared by them contain all the mandatory elements set
out in the ISBD insofar as the information is applicable to the resource being described.
It is recommended that this practice be followed also by other libraries that share
bibliographic data with each other.
The responsibility for creating bibliographic descriptions may extend beyond libraries,
for example, to cultural institutions, publishers, independent scholars and various online
communities.
The ISBD description forms a part of a complete bibliographic record and is not normally
used by itself. The other elements that make up a complete bibliographic record, such as
access points and subject information, are not included in the ISBD stipulations. The
rules for such elements are normally given in cataloguing codes and other standards.
References from variations of the title proper or other references that may be called for in
a national cataloguing code do not form a part of the bibliographic description and are not
provided in the ISBD. They may be indispensable, however, in catalogues and
bibliographies.
Informational elements relating to a particular collection (location of material, recording
of holdings, etc.) are not provided by the ISBD; they are local elements that can be added
to the general description.
To describe a resource that exhibits characteristics of different types of materials (e.g. an
electronic continuing resource, a digital map that is serially issued), a cataloguer should
combine stipulations for the different types of materials that are necessary to describe all
aspects of the resource, including its content, its carrier, and its mode of issuance.

A.2 Treatment of resources

A.2.1 Object of the bibliographic description

The ISBD is used to create a description of a set of resources that bear the same
characteristics in respect to both intellectual content and physical format, i.e. an edition.
An edition may be identified by an edition statement on the resource or by information
provided by the publisher. A major difference between two resources in any of the
elements indicates that different editions are involved and separate descriptions are
required. A change in the identity of the distributor does not constitute a major
difference. An ISBD description describes a complete copy of a published resource.
Resources can be published as single-part resources or as multipart resources, as finite or
intended to be finite or intended to continue, and they can be issued at one time or at
successive times.
A single-part resource is a resource that is issued as a single physical unit.

2
ISBD 2011

Multipart resources are catalogued using either a multilevel description (see Appendix
A) or a single-level description of the entire resource. In some cases the parts of a
multipart resource can also be described as separate single-part resources.
Continuing resources are treated as serials or as integrating resources. Resources issued
in successive issues or parts that bear numbering and that bear other characteristics of a
serial (e.g. frequency in the title), but whose duration is limited (e.g. the newsletter of an
event), are also catalogued using the stipulations for continuing resources. In addition,
finite integrating resources (such as a Web site for a political campaign) are catalogued
using these stipulations.

For older monographic resources:

Not only editions, but also issues, impressions and states of older
monographic resources may be given separate descriptions. This
standard makes no provision for situations where no conclusive
evidence as to the intended extent of a resource exists or when an
imperfect copy is catalogued without the help of a bibliographic
description for the resource. Whenever possible, a description of a
complete copy should be found. Where no complete copy exists, a
description may be worked out from imperfect copies if the
imperfections are such as to permit this, and imperfections and other
peculiar characteristics relating to the copy in hand described in area 7
(see 7.11). In this case, it is understood that the description prepared
may not apply to all copies of the same edition, issue or state.

A.2.2 Electronic resources

Electronic resources are treated in the ISBD in two ways depending on whether access is
direct or remote. Direct access is understood to mean that a physical carrier can be
described. Such a carrier (e.g. a disk/disc, cassette, cartridge) must be inserted into a
computer or into a peripheral device attached to a computer. Remote access is
understood to mean that no physical carrier can be handled; access can only be provided
by use of an electronic device connected to a network or by use of resources stored on a
server or other storage device. All remote-access electronic resources are considered to
be published.
Electronic resources are also increasingly produced in different editions. A new edition
occurs when it has been determined that there are significant differences in the
intellectual or artistic content of the resource. In these cases, a separate bibliographic
record is created. A resource in which the differences are not found to be significant
would normally not warrant a separate bibliographic record, although a cataloguing
agency may choose to create multiple bibliographic records. Significant differences
include additions and deletions; a difference in the programming language; changes to
upgrade or improve the efficiency of the resource; modifications in the programming
language or operating system that allow the resource to be compatible with other
machines and operating systems.
Differences that do not constitute a new edition include: a difference in the size of the
physical carrier (e.g. 14 cm vs. 9 cm disk); differences in printer-related file formats (e.g.
ASCII vs. PostScript); differences in system-related formats (e.g. PC vs. Macintosh);

3
A ISBD 2011

differences relating to the character code or to blocking or recording densities. The

differences may be given in area 7.

A.2.3 Resources issued in multiple formats

If a resource is issued in different types of physical carriers, or in different output media,
each different physical carrier or different output medium is described in a
separate bibliographic record.

A.2.4 Multimedia resources

For the physical description of multimedia resources, see 5.1.2.

A.2.5 Reproductions
In describing a facsimile or other photographic, micrographic, or digitized reproduction,
bibliographic information pertaining to the reproduction is given in all areas of the
description, except area 3 for serials. Information pertaining to the original is given in
area 7 (see 7.2.4.2).

A.2.6 Changes requiring a new description (Continuing resources)

A.2.6.1 Major changes in title proper of serials

For serials, a new description is required in the case of a major change in the title proper.
The following are to be considered major changes:
a) for languages and scripts that divide text into words, the addition, deletion,
change, or reordering of any word within the first five words (the first six
words if the title begins with an article) of the title, except as indicated below
(see A.2.7);
Examples
Energy policy and conservation biennial report
becomes Energy policy and conservation report
Металлургия и технология
becomes Металлургия и машиностроение
New notes
becomes Upstream journal
La recherche aéronautique
becomes La recherche aérospatiale
Scene
becomes TV 2
IFLANET unplugged
becomes IFLA CD ...
Link magazine
becomes Link journal
b) an addition, deletion, or change in the title proper that changes the meaning of
the title or indicates a different subject matter;

4
ISBD 2011

Examples
The best bed & breakfasts in the world
becomes The best bed & breakfasts in England, Scotland & Wales
Editorial comment: Indicates different subject matter.
but not
Report on the high-level radioactive waste activities conducted under
MS 1990, 116C.712, subd. 5A
becomes Report on the high-level radioactive waste activities
conducted under Minnesota Statutes 116C.712
Editorial comment: Insignificant difference after first five words
c) a corporate body, named anywhere in the title, changes, except as indicated
below (see A.2.7.1).
Examples
The register of the Kentucky State Historical Society
becomes The register of the Kentucky Historical Society
NFCR Cancer Research Association symposia
becomes Association for International Cancer Research symposia

A.2.6.2 Other major changes to serials

For serials, a new description also is required in the following cases, even if the title
remains the same:
a) the title proper is a generic term and the issuing body changes its name or the
serial is issued by a different body (however, see A.2.7.1(e) for minor changes
in a body’s name that do not require a new description);
Example
Symposium series / Society for Applied Bacteriology
becomes Symposium series / Society for Applied Microbiology
b) the edition statement changes and indicates a significant change to the scope
or coverage of the serial;
Example
Transportation directory. — New England edition
becomes Transportation directory. — Eastern edition
c) the physical medium changes;
Examples
New Zealand national bibliography
Editorial comment: Published only in paper.
becomes New Zealand national bibliography
Editorial comment: Published only in microfiche.
MacInTax deluxe
Editorial comment: Issued on 3 1/2-in. computer disk.
becomes MacInTax deluxe
Editorial comment: Issued on CD-ROM.

5
A ISBD 2011

d) a hitherto dependent title becomes independent;

Example
Fauna Norvegica. Series B, Norwegian journal of entomology
becomes Norwegian journal of entomology
e) a serial is cumulated, and the cumulations bear separate numbering from the
uncumulated issues;
Example
Reader’s guide to periodical literature
Editorial comment: Issued in annual and less frequent cumulations with
numbering separate from that of the semimonthly, etc., issues.
f) a serial is formed by the merger of two or more other serials;
Example
Archivio di ottalmologia
and: Rassegna italiana di ottalmologia
merge to form: Archivio e rassegna italiana di ottalmologia
g) two or more serials are formed from the split of a serial.
Example
Geografi i Bergen
becomes Geografi i Bergen. Serie A
and Geografi i Bergen. Serie B

A.2.6.3 Major changes to integrating resources

For integrating resources, a new description is required in the following cases:
a) the edition statement changes and indicates a significant change to the scope
or coverage of the resource;
Example
Manual of forestry management practices. — Canadian edition
becomes Manual of forestry management practices. — North
American edition
b) the physical medium changes;
Example
Cuadernos de historia medieval
Editorial comment: Print version
becomes Cuadernos de historia medieval
Editorial comment: Online version
c) a resource is formed by the merger of two or more other resources;
Example
USMARC format for bibliographic data
and: Canadian MARC communication format for bibliographic data
merge to form: MARC 21 format for bibliographic data
6
ISBD 2011

d) two or more resources are formed from the split of a resource.

A.2.7 Changes not requiring a new description (Continuing

resources)

A.2.7.1 Minor changes in title proper of serials

For serials, a new description is not required in cases of minor changes in the title proper.
In general, if a minor change occurs in the title proper, the later title is given in area 7
(see 7.1.1.4.1). In case of doubt, the change is considered minor. The following are to be
considered minor changes:
a) a change in the representation of a word or words, for example,
one spelling vs. another
Examples
Statistisk aarbog for kongeriget Norge
becomes Statistisk årbok for kongeriket Norge
Labour history
becomes Labor history
abbreviated word or sign or symbol (e.g. &) vs. spelled-out form
Examples
Accommodations and travel services
becomes Accommodations & travel services
Ga. peach statistics
becomes Georgia peach statistics
Oxf. Hist. Soc.
becomes Oxford Historical Society
arabic numeral vs. roman numeral
Example
XXe siècle
becomes 20e siècle
number or date vs. spelled-out form
Examples
Four wheel fun
becomes 4 wheel fun
XX century
becomes Twentieth century
hyphenated word vs. unhyphenated word
Example
Year-book of the ...
becomes Year book of the ...
one-word compound vs. two-word compound, whether hyphenated or not

7
A ISBD 2011

Example
Openhouse
becomes Open house
b) a change involving an acronym or initialism vs. the full form (see also 1.1.3.3,
1.1.4.1.1);
Example
Research in technological adaptation
becomes RITA
c) a change in the inflexion of a word, for example, from singular to plural
form;
Examples
Fishery report
becomes Fisheries report
Research studies
becomes Research study
d) the addition, deletion, or change of articles, prepositions, and conjunctions
anywhere in the title;
Example
Fiscal survey of the states
becomes The fiscal survey of states
e) a change involving the name of the same corporate body and elements of its
hierarchy or their grammatical connection anywhere in the title (e.g. the
addition, deletion, or rearrangement of the name of the corporate body or the
substitution of a variant form, including an abbreviation);
Examples
Rapport de la Société canadienne de l’Eglise catholique
becomes Rapport / Société canadienne de l’Eglise catholique
Views / Goodridge Area Historical Society
becomes Views from the Goodridge Area Historical Society
becomes Views from the GAHS
Berichte der Deutschen Gesellschaft für Mathematik und
Datenverarbeitung
becomes GMD-Berichte
AAPG continuing education course notes series
becomes American Association of Petroleum Geologists continuing
education course notes series
Boletín de la Sociedad Española para la Defensa del Patrimonio
Geológico y Minero
becomes Boletín S.E.D.P.G.M.
f) the addition, deletion, or change of punctuation, including initialisms and
letters with separating punctuation vs. those without separating punctuation,
anywhere in the title;

8
ISBD 2011

Example
GBB
becomes G.B.B.
g) a change involving the order of titles when the title is given in more than one
language on the prescribed source of information, provided that the title
chosen as title proper still appears as a parallel title;
Example
South African medical journal = Suid Afrikaanse tydskrif vir
geneeskunde
becomes Suid Afrikaanse tydskrif vir geneeskunde = South African
medical journal
h) the addition, deletion, or change of words anywhere in the title that link the
title to the numbering;
Example
Tin
becomes Tin in ...
i) two or more titles proper are used on different issues of a serial according to a
regular pattern;
Examples
Weekly labor market report
Note: Last issue each month has title: Monthly labor market report
Minneapolis morning tribune
Note: Sunday issues have title: Minneapolis Sunday tribune
Editorial comment: Daily issues and Sunday issues have consecutive
numbering.
Annual report / Medical Association of South Africa
Note: Reports for alternate years have title: Jaarverslag / Die
Mediese Vereniging van Suid-Afrika
j) the addition to, deletion from, or change in the order of words in a list
anywhere in the title, provided that there is no significant change in the
subject matter;
Example
Kartboken for Oslo, Bærum, Lørenskog, Nesodden, Oppegård, Ski
becomes Kartboken for Oslo, Bærum, Asker, Lørenskog,
Nesodden, Oppegård, Ski
k) the addition or deletion anywhere in the title of words that indicate the type of
resource such as magazine, journal, or newsletter, or their equivalent in other
languages (but see A.2.6.1 for changes from one such word to another in the
first five words of the title).
Examples
Fussball-Jahrbuch
becomes Fussball

9
A ISBD 2011

Handel und Industrie

becomes Revue Handel und Industrie
Minnesota history bulletin
becomes Minnesota history
Trade and industry
becomes Trade and industry review
Colección Ciencias y técnicas
becomes Ciencias y técnicas
Baubetrieb, Bauökonomie, Baurecht
becomes Schriftenreihe Baubetrieb, Bauökonomie, Baurecht
Relatórios de pesquisa
becomes Série Relatórios de pesquisa

A.2.7.2 Minor changes to integrating resources

Any change in information recorded in the description for the same integrating resource
other than those noted in A.2.6.3 does not result in a new description; instead, the
description is changed to reflect the new information.
Example
Hirnet
becomes Terminál
Editorial comment: The only change is in the title proper of the Web site.

A.3 Outline of the ISBD and punctuation

A.3.1 Outline of the ISBD

The following outline sets out the chief uses of prescribed punctuation. In the outline, the
numbers of the areas and the terms “first statement …”, “subsequent statement …”, and
the like denote the order in which these statements are given in the description and have
no other connotation. Elements that are mandatory for any ISBD description are
indicated with “M” in the mandatory status column; elements that are mandatory if the
information is available or applicable to the resource are indicated with “MA”. Elements
that are repeatable are indicated with “R” in the repeatability column. Most elements can
be followed by parallel elements in another language or script; not all of them are shown
in the outline. For the punctuation of parallel elements, see A.3.2.9.

10
ISBD 2011

Repeatability
Mandatory
punctuation
Prescribed

status
Area Element

Note: Each area, other than the first in a paragraph, is preceded by a point, space,
dash, space (. — )
0. Content form and media
type area
0.1 Content form M R
. Subsequent content form in same R
media type
+ Subsequent content form in different R
media type
() 0.1.1 Content qualification MA
; Subsequent content qualification R
: 0.2 Media type M
1. Title and statement of
M
responsibility area
1.1 Title proper MA
= 1.2 Parallel title R
: 1.3 Other title information R
1.4 Statement of responsibility
/ First statement MA
; Subsequent statement R
; 1.1.5 Subsequent title by same author, etc. MA R
.2
. 1.4.5 Subsequent title by different author, etc. MA R
.11.2
2. Edition area
2.1 Edition statement MA
2.3 Statement of responsibility relating to
the edition
/ First statement MA
; Subsequent statement R
, 2.4 Additional edition statement MA R
2.5 Statement of responsibility following an
additional edition statement
/ First statement MA
; Subsequent statement R

11
A ISBD 2011

Repeatability
Mandatory
punctuation
Prescribed

status
Area Element

3. Material or type of
R
resource specific area
3.1 Mathematical data (Cartographic MA R
resources)
3.1.1 Statement of scale MA R
; 3.1.2 Statement of projection
() 3.1.3 Statement of coordinates and equinox MA
; 3.1.3 Statement of equinox
.3
3.2 Music format statement (Notated MA
music)
3.3 Numbering (Serials) MA
Numeric designation MA
() 3.3.3 Chronological designation MA
*
= 3.3.6 Alternative numbering system MA
; 3.3.7 New sequence of numbering MA
4. Publication, production,
distribution, etc., area
4.1 Place of publication, production and/or
distribution
First place M
; Subsequent place R
: 4.2 Name of publisher, producer and/or M R
distributor
, 4.3 Date of publication, production and/or M
distribution
() Printing or manufacturing information
4.4 Place of printing or manufacture R
: 4.5 Name of printer or manufacturer R
, 4.6 Date of printing or manufacture

12
ISBD 2011

Repeatability
Mandatory
punctuation
Prescribed

status
Area Element

5. Material description area R

5.1 Extent
: 5.2 Other physical details
; 5.3 Dimensions
Bibliographic format and dimensions
(Older monographic resources)
+ 5.4 Accompanying material statement R
6. Series and ()
multipart
R
monographic
resource area
6.1 Title proper of a series or multipart MA
monographic resource
: 6.3 Other title information of a series or R
multipart monographic resource
6.4 Statement of responsibility relating to a
series or multipart monographic
resource
/ First statement
; Subsequent statement R
, 6.5 International standard number of a MA
series or multipart monographic
resource
; 6.6 Numbering within a series or multipart MA
monographic resource
7. Note area ** R
8. Resource identifier and
R
terms of availability area
8.1 Resource identifier MA
Fingerprint (Older monographic
resources)
= 8.2 Key title (Continuing resources) MA
: 8.3 Terms of availability R

* Chronological designation enclosed in parentheses only when accompanying a numeric

designation.
** Only some notes are mandatory if applicable and/or available. See area 7.

13
A ISBD 2011

The following table lists the elements in the ISBD.

Element ISBD
Content form 0.1
Content qualification 0.1.1
Media type 0.2
Title
Title proper 1.1
Common title (of title proper) 1.1.3.7
Dependent title (of title proper) 1.1.3.7
Dependent title designation (of title proper) 1.1.3.7
Title of individual work by same author 1.1.5.2
Title of individual work by different author 1.4.5.11.2
Parallel title 1.2
Common title (of parallel title) 1.2.5.5
Dependent title (of parallel title) 1.2.5.5
Dependent title designation (of parallel title) 1.2.5.5
Other title information 1.3
Parallel other title information 1.3.4.7
Statement of responsibility relating to title 1.4
Parallel statement of responsibility relating to title 1.4.5.10
Edition statement 2.1
Parallel edition statement 2.2
Statement of responsibility relating to edition 2.3
Parallel statement of responsibility relating to edition 2.3.4
Additional edition statement 2.4
Parallel additional edition statement 2.4.4
Statement of responsibility relating to an additional edition 2.5
statement
Parallel statement of responsibility relating to an 2.5.2
additional edition statement
Statement of scale 3.1.1
Statement of projection 3.1.2
Coordinates 3.1.3.1
Longitude and latitude 3.1.3.2
Right ascension and declination 3.1.3.3
Equinox 3.1.3.4
Music format statement 3.2.1
Parallel music format statement 3.2.2
Numeric designation 3.3.2
Chronological designation 3.3.3

14
ISBD 2011

Element ISBD
Parallel numbering system 3.3.5
Subsequent numbering system 3.3.7
Place of publication, production and/or distribution 4.1
Additions to place of publication 4.1.9
Parallel place of publication, production and/or 4.1.11
distribution
Additions to parallel place of publication
Name of publisher, producer and/or distributor 4.2
Parallel name of publisher, producer and/or distributor 4.2.10
Date of publication, production and/or distribution 4.3
Place of printing or manufacture 4.4
Name of printer or manufacturer 4.5
Date of printing or manufacture 4.6
Specific material designation 5.1.2
Extent 5.1
Pagination 5.1.4
Playing time 5.1.5
Composition of material 5.2.2
Presence of illustrations 5.2.3
Presence of colour 5.2.4
Reduction ratio 5.2.5
Presence or absence of sound 5.2.6
Frame alignment 5.2.7.1
Process or method of reproduction of a still image 5.2.7.2
Playing speed 5.2.7.3
Recording method 5.2.7.4
Groove direction 5.2.7.5
Groove size 5.2.7.6
Number of tape tracks 5.2.7.7
Track configuration 5.2.7.8
Number of sound channels 5.2.7.9
Equalization 5.2.7.10
Noise reduction 5.2.7.11
Dimensions 5.3
Bibliographic format (Older monographic resources) 5.3.2
Accompanying material statement 5.4
Title proper of series or multipart monographic resource 6.1
Common title of series or multipart monographic
resource

15
A ISBD 2011

Element ISBD
Dependent title of series or multipart monographic
resource
Dependent title designation
Parallel title of series or multipart monographic resource 6.2
Parallel common title of series or multipart 6.2.2
monographic resource
Parallel dependent title of series or multipart 6.2.2
monographic resource
Parallel dependent title designation of series or
multipart monographic resource
Other title information of series or multipart monographic 6.3
resource
Parallel other title information of series or multipart 6.3.1
monographic resource
Statement of responsibility of series or multipart 6.4
monographic resource
Parallel statement of responsibility of series or multipart 6.4.1
monographic resource
International standard number of series or multipart 6.5
monographic resource
Numbering within series or multipart monographic 6.6
resource
Note 7
Note on content form and media type 7.0.1
Note on bibliographic reference 7.0.2
Note on frequency 7.0.3
Note on system requirements 7.0.4
Note on mode of access 7.0.5
Note on title proper 7.1.1
Note on nature, scope, form, purpose or language 7.1.2
Note on parallel titles and parallel other title 7.1.3
information
Note on statements of responsibility 7.1.4
Note on edition and bibliographic history 7.2
Note on changes to edition 7.2.2
Note on bibliographic history 7.2.3
Note on relationship to other resources 7.2.4
Note on translations 7.2.4.1
Note on reproductions 7.2.4.2
Note on different editions 7.2.4.3
Note on supplements, inserts, etc. 7.2.4.4

16
ISBD 2011

Element ISBD
Note on supplement to or insert in 7.2.4.5
Note on other relationships 7.2.4.6
Note on relationship between continuing resources 7.2.4.7
Note on material type or resource specific type 7.3
Note on publication, production, distribution, etc. 7.4
Note on material description 7.5
Note on series and multipart monographic resources 7.6
Note on contents 7.7
Note on resource identifier and terms of availability 7.8
Note on binding 7.8.2
Note on basis of description 7.9
Note providing a summary 7.10.2
Note on use/audience 7.10.3
Note on numbers 7.10.4
Note on copy in hand 7.11
Resource identifier 8.1
Standard identifier 8.1.2
Label name and catalogue number 8.1.4
Fingerprint 8.1.5
Qualification to identifier 8.1.3
Key title 8.2
Terms of availability 8.3
Qualification to terms of availability 8.3.2

A.3.2 Punctuation
A.3.2.1 Each element of the description is either preceded or enclosed by
prescribed punctuation. Prescribed punctuation that precedes an element is omitted when
it is the first element of an area. Prescribed punctuation is preceded and followed by a
space (a single space on a keyboard or an em space in printing) with the exception of the
comma (, ) and point (. ) which are only followed by a space. The inclusion of other
punctuation is at the discretion of the cataloguing agency, as is the spacing before and
after such punctuation. Prescribed punctuation is retained even when this results in
double punctuation (see A.3.2.7). For the punctuation of scripts written from right to left,
see A.3.2.11 and Appendix B.
A.3.2.2 Parentheses ( ( ) ) and square brackets ( [ ] ) are each to be treated as a
single punctuation symbol, and the preceding space comes before the first (opening)
parenthesis or square bracket and the following space comes after the second (closing)
parenthesis or square bracket (see also A.8 for exceptions). If parentheses or square
brackets are preceded or followed by prescribed punctuation that ends or begins with a
space, only one space is given. If a closing parenthesis or square bracket is followed by a

17
A ISBD 2011

comma or a point used as prescribed punctuation, or by any punctuation mark found on

the resource, no space is used.
Example
. —#[S.l.]#: Publisher
not . —##[S.l.]##: Publisher
Editorial comment: The character “#” is used in this example only
as a means of showing spacing and does not actually appear in a
bibliographic record.
A.3.2.3 Each area of the description other than the first is preceded by a point,
space, dash, space (. — ), unless that area is clearly separated from the preceding area by
paragraphing, in which case the point, space, dash, space may be replaced by a point (.)
given at the end of the preceding area.
A.3.2.4 When the first element of an area is not present in a description, the
prescribed punctuation of the first element that is present is replaced by a point, space,
dash, space (. — ) preceding the area.
A.3.2.5 When an area is repeated, each repetition is preceded by a point, space,
dash, space (. — ), except in the condition described in A.3.2.3.
A.3.2.6 When an element is repeated, each repetition is preceded by the prescribed
punctuation appropriate to the element.
A.3.2.7 When an element or area ends with a point and the prescribed punctuation
for the element or area that follows begins with a point, in order to take into account
punctuation for both abbreviations and prescribed punctuation, both points are given.
Examples
. — 3rd ed.. —
not . — 3rd ed. —
And then ... . — 4th ed.
not And then ... — 4th ed.
by J. Smith, Esq.. —
not by J. Smith, Esq. —
National flight / by Air Flight Inc.. Navigation advisor / Interactive
Mapping Corporation
not National flight / by Air Flight Inc. Navigation advisor / Interactive
Mapping Corporation
A.3.2.8 Two punctuation symbols can be used in all or most areas:
a) Square brackets enclose information found outside the prescribed sources of
information and interpolations in the description. When successive elements
within the same area are obtained from outside the prescribed sources of
information, each is enclosed in its own pair of square brackets.
Examples
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.]
not . — [S.l. : s.n.]
. — [2nd ed.]. — [S.l.] : [s.n.]
not . — [2nd ed.]. — [S.l. : s.n.]

18
ISBD 2011

. — ([Historical instruments at the Victoria and Albert Museum] ; [4])

not . — ([Historical instruments at the Victoria and Albert Museum ;
4])
b) The mark of omission, i.e. three points ( ... ), indicates the omission of some part
of an element. The mark of omission is preceded and followed by a space.
A.3.2.9 When in an area or an element the same information appears in more than
one language or script, the following provisions apply:
When one element is recorded in more than one language or script, the information in
each language or script after the first is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
When, in a single area, two or more elements are recorded in more than one language or
script, the elements in each language or script are given together with the appropriate
preceding punctuation for each element. The whole group of elements for the first
language or script recorded is preceded by punctuation appropriate to the first element
and each group after the first is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
When a single statement (e.g. a statement of responsibility) is given partly in one
language or script and partly in more than one language or script, the several linguistic
forms are transcribed together; equals signs or other punctuation symbols are used as
appropriate.
A.3.2.10 An area or element that does not apply to the resource is not included in the
description. The preceding or enclosing prescribed punctuation of such an area or
element is also omitted.
A.3.2.11 When information is given in a nonroman script, prescribed punctuation
may be given with the equivalent symbols in that script. Similarly, in a script written
from right to left, the point, space, dash, space combination of prescribed punctuation
reads from right to left.
Example

— .‫ ירדנה אלותין‬/ (‫סונטינה לכנור ופסנתר )או לחליל ופסנתר‬

.cop. 1982 ,‫ מכון למוסיקה ישראלית‬: ‫תל אביב‬
See Appendix B for the treatment of information given in scripts written both from left to
right and and from right to left.
A.3.3 The complete punctuation pattern for each area is set out at the beginning
of the area.

A.4 Sources of information

A.4.1 Basis of the description

For all types of material the whole resource constitutes the basis of the description. In
deciding the basis of the description, the bibliographic unit that is going to be described,
it is necessary to take into account the following:
Single-part monographic resources: the whole resource
Multipart monographic resources: a source identifying the entire resource and source of
information applying to the whole resource is preferred, but if there is no such source, the
first issue or part, or lacking this the earliest available issue or part is selected. For
analytic description of the part see single-part monographic resources.
19
A ISBD 2011

Serials: the first issue or part or, lacking this, the earliest available issue or part. For
numbered serials, the first issue or part is the one with the lowest numeric designation or
the earliest chronological designation. For unnumbered serials, the first issue or part is
the issue or part with the earliest date of publication, production and/or distribution.
Generally the first (or earliest) issue or part is preferred over a source associated with the
whole resource or with a range of more than one issue or part.

Area Basis of description

0. Content form and media type All issues or parts

1. Title and statement of First or earliest issue or part
responsibility
2. Edition First or earliest issue or part
3. Material or type of resource All issues or parts
specific For Numbering (Serials): First and
last issues or parts for each system
or sequence
4. Publication, production,
distribution, etc.
Place and publisher, producer, First or earliest issue or part
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer First or earliest issue or part
Date First and/or last issues or parts
5. Material description All issues or parts
6. Series and multipart monographic All issues or parts
resource
7. Note All issues or parts and any other
source
8. Resource identifier and terms of All issues or parts and any other
availability source

20
ISBD 2011

Integrating resources: the current iteration, except for the beginning date of publication.

Area Basis of description

0. Content form and media type Current iteration

1. Title and statement of Current iteration
responsibility
2. Edition Current iteration
3. Material or type of resource All iterations
specific
4. Publication, production,
distribution, etc.
Place and publisher, producer, Current iteration
distributor, etc.
Place and manufacturer Current iteration
Dates First and/or last iterations
5. Material description Current iteration
6. Series and multipart monographic Current iteration
resource
7. Note All iterations and any other source
8. Resource identifier and terms of All iterations and any other source
availability

A.4.2 Preferred sources of information

The selection of the preferred source of information varies depending on the type of
material, but there are common general criteria:
 comprehensiveness of information for identification: the source that gives the
fullest, clearest, and most authoritative information
 proximity of the source to the information: the source that is nearest the content of
the resource, such as an internal source, and
 persistence of the source of information: the source that is the most enduring.
If there is more than one source of information that is qualified as the preferred source of
information for a resource, the first occurring of those sources is selected, unless one of
the following conditions applies:
 If the resource contains preferred sources of information in more than one
language or script, the preferred source of information is selected as follows:
1. the source in the language or script that corresponds to the language or script
of the content or the predominant language or script of the content of the
resource
2. the source in the language or script of translation if the translation is known
to be the purpose of the resource
3. the source in the original language or script of the content
21
A ISBD 2011

4. the first occurring source.

 If the resource contains preferred sources of information bearing different dates,
the source bearing the later or latest date is selected.

A.4.2.1 Printed resources

A.4.2.1.1 Resources in roman script

The preferred source of information is the title page, or, for resources lacking a title page,
the title-page substitute. A title-page substitute is selected according to the criteria in
A.4.2. Sources such as a cover, spine, etc., are not treated as a preferred source of
information unless they were issued with the resource.
If information traditionally given on the title page is given on facing pages, with or
without repetition, the two pages are treated as the preferred source of information.
Title pages not selected as the preferred source of information or as part of a collective
single source of information are considered to constitute other preliminaries.
For resources lacking a preferred source of information applying to the whole resource,
see A.4.2.5.

For monographic resources:

When for a single-part monographic resource there is more than one
title page, the one selected is the one specific to the resource being
described (e.g. for a monograph in a series, the analytical title page; for
a facsimile reproduction, the title page with the reproduction details)
(see also 1.1.4.2).
When a multipart monographic resource is catalogued as a whole, the
title page common to the parts is used as the preferred source of
information.

For older monographic resources:

If a title-page substitute cannot be selected according to the criteria in
A.4.2, sources are considered in the following order: colophon, half-
title, other preliminaries, caption title, docket title, running title, incipit,
explicit, opening words of the main text, opening words of the resource.
In each description only one page, portion of page, or part of the
resource can be designated as a title-page substitute.

For continuing resources:

The preferred source of information is the title page or the title-page
substitute of the issue or iteration used as the basis of the description
(see A.4.1). The title-page substitute for a continuing resource lacking a
title page is taken from certain sources in the following order of
preference:
1. the analytical title page, cover, caption, masthead, editorial pages,
colophon;

22
ISBD 2011

2. the other preliminaries and information to be found on the

wrappers and top and bottom of text pages (such as running title);
3. the rest of the continuing resource: prefaces, forewords, tables of
contents, text, appendices, etc.;
4. reference sources outside the resource and not associated with it
(e.g. bibliographies, publishers’ lists).

A.4.2.1.2 Resources in non-roman scripts

If the colophon in a resource in a non-roman script has full bibliographic details, the
colophon is the preferred source of information when one or more of the following
conditions is true:
a) a leaf standing in the position of a title page bears only the title proper in the
manner of a half-title page;
b) a leaf standing in the position of a title page bears the title proper, with or without
other bibliographic information, in a calligraphic version (the full bibliographic
details in the colophon being given in conventional forms of Chinese characters as
used in modern Chinese, Japanese and Korean printing);
c) a leaf standing in the position of a title page bears only a Western-language
version of the title and/or publication details.

A.4.2.2 Cartographic resources and still images

The preferred source of information for a cartographic resource or a still image is chosen
in the following order of preference:
a) the resource itself;
b) the container (portfolio, cover, envelope, etc.) or case, the cradle and stand of a
globe, etc., issued by the publisher or manufacturer of the resource;
c) an accompanying text or brochure;
d) sources outside the resource, such as a catalogue, bibliography, etc.
The preferred source for an atlas is selected according to the criteria for monographs or
continuing resources, as appropriate (see A.4.2.1.1).

A.4.2.3 Multimedia and audiovisual resources

Many multimedia resources, sound recordings, videorecordings, and moving images lack
a single source of information for creating a bibliographic description. In describing a
resource it may therefore be necessary to select from such disparate sources of
information as the content of the resource itself (where the data may be given in a visual
or aural form or both), an affixed label, a container or an enclosure or other
accompanying textual matter such as a manual.
The preferred sources of information are:
a) a source that collectively identifies the work or works contained in the resource
and is permanently associated with the resource, such as the title frames of a
motion picture or the label on a disc
b) a source that collectively identifies the work or works contained in the resource
and accompanies the resource, such as a descriptive insert issued with a disc
23
A ISBD 2011

Textual sources will normally be preferred to sound sources. However, when textual
information is deficient or clearly erroneous and the integral sound source is more
adequate, the latter may be preferred.

A.4.2.4 Electronic resources

The preferred sources of information are:
a) a source that identifies the resource as a whole and is internal to the resource
itself, such as a title screen, main menu, program statements, the header to the file
including Subject: lines, home page, or encoded information (e.g. TEI header,
HTML title)
b) a source that identifies the resource as a whole and appears on the physical carrier
or its labels
c) a container issued by the publisher, producer, or distributor
d) documentation or other accompanying material (e.g. a publisher’s letter) that
identifies the resource

A.4.2.5 Resources without a common source of information

Single-part monographic resources. When there is no preferred source of information
applying to the whole resource, but each work contained in it has its own preferred source
of information, including resources with versions of the same work in more than one
language, the several sources of information may be considered collectively as a single
source of information.
Multipart monographic resources. When there is no preferred source of information
applying to the whole resource, but each part has its own preferred source of information,
the preferred source of the first available part is selected.
Continuing resources. When the resource contains more than one work, each with its
own preferred source of information and numbering, a separate description is made for
each. An appropriate explanation is given in area 7 relating the separate descriptions (see
7.2.4.6).

A.4.2.6 Resources without a source of information in the resource

If no source of information is found in the resource, sources outside the resource, such as
a catalogue, bibliography, or review, may be used.

A.4.3 Prescribed sources

For each area certain sources are designated as prescribed sources of information and
listed in an order of preference.
If data elements for area 1 are found in different sources (e.g. titles found on title page
and cover), the source is selected according to the preferred order of sources (see each
area and A.4.2) and the form found there is transcribed. When appropriate, the
information is given in the order found in the source selected.
For areas 2, 3, 4, and 6, multiple sources are prescribed, so a combination of sources
makes up the prescribed sources. If data elements for these areas are found in different
sources, the source is selected according to the preferred order of sources (see each area

24
ISBD 2011

and A.4.2) and is transcribed in the form found there. When appropriate, the information
is given in the order found in the source selected.
Information taken from a source other than prescribed sources for areas 1 to 4 and area 6
is enclosed in square brackets if it is transcribed as part of the area. Alternatively, such
information may be given in area 7 without square brackets. Information found outside
the resource may be given in area 7.
The resource described is that as issued by the publisher, producer, distributor, etc. No
part of the resource may be considered as a prescribed source unless it is part of the
resource as issued. For example, a cover or spine is used as a prescribed source only if it
is clear that the resource was issued in that binding.

For older monographic resources:

When information in area 1, 2, 4 or 6 is from a source other than the
prescribed sources of information for the area, the source of information
is given in area 7. When the resource lacks a title page and an
alternative source of information is selected as title-page substitute, the
title-page substitute is identified in area 7 (see 7.1.1.1), as is any
information in areas 1, 2, 4 and 6 taken from a substitute.

A.5 Language and script of the description

Elements in areas 1, 2, 3, 4 and 6 are normally transcribed or recorded from the resource
and are, therefore, wherever practicable, in the languages and/or scripts in which they
appear there. Interpolations in these areas are enclosed in square brackets and are given
in the language and script of the context of that part of the description, except:
 prescribed abbreviations (see A.6) and prescribed interpolations (see A.8, A.9);
 statement of function of distributor (see 4.2.5) and additions to the date of printing
(see 4.3.7, 4.6) are given in the language and/or script chosen by the cataloguing
agency.
Terms used in areas 5, 7 and 8 are usually not transcribed from the resource and therefore
do not require square brackets for interpolations, etc. The terms are given in the language
and/or script chosen by the cataloguing agency, except:
 when the original title or a variant title is provided in area 7;
 when quotations are provided in area 7;
 when the key title is provided in area 8.
Certain stipulations in the ISBD specify a particular English term or phrase to be used in
a description. Cataloguing agencies may use an equivalent term or phase in a language
chosen by the agency.
An element of the description of a resource appearing in a script other than that chosen by
the cataloguing agency may, if necessary, be given in transliteration or transcribed
without brackets into the script chosen by the agency. When the script is not in current
use or is otherwise not available a suitable alternative script should be used, e.g. Cyrillic
(civil) for Cyrillic (Church Slavonic).

25
A ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

The spelling of words taken from the resource is preserved, but
ligatures and other contemporary forms of letters and diacritics may be
transcribed in their current forms when the contemporary form is not
available to the cataloguing agency. No account is taken of the
differing forms of letters when no orthographic difference is made in
current usage. Accents and other diacritic marks not present on the
source are not added. For recording of upper and lower case letters, see
A.7. Interpolations by the cataloguing agency should follow modern
practice as to spelling. For Latin interpolations, see A.6.1.

A.6 Abridgements and abbreviations

A.6.1 Abbreviations found in the source of information used for the description
are transcribed as found. In area 1, information is not abbreviated or abridged.
Exceptionally, the abridgement of certain elements in the description is permitted,
provided the omission takes place at the end or in the middle of the element (e.g. a
lengthy title proper or a title proper of a serial that includes a date or number that varies
from issue to issue; see 1.1.5.1). In such cases, the omission is indicated by the mark of
omission ( ... ).

For older monographic resources:

When contractions and abbreviations in continuance of the manuscript
tradition of abbreviating words that were long and/or frequently
encountered are found, these may be left as they are or may be
expanded wherever possible. Any such expansion is enclosed in square
brackets or given in area 7.
Examples
Boetij viri celeberrimi de [con]solatio[n]e phylosophie
liber : cu[m] optimo [com]me[n]to beati Thome
Dialogus beati Gregorij Pape : eiusq[ue] diaconi Petri in
quattuor libros diuisus : de vita [et] miraculis
patru[m] italicor[um] : [et] de eternitate a[n]imarum
When the meaning of an abbreviation or contraction is conjectural, a
question mark is given following the conjectural expansion, e.g.
amico[rum?]. When the meaning of an abbreviation or contraction
cannot be determined, a question mark is given, enclosed in square
brackets, for each indeterminable abbreviation or contraction, e.g.
amico[?], [?]s, or the abbreviation or contraction may be left as it is.
A.6.2 If a single statement of responsibility consisting of the names of several
persons or corporate bodies is abridged (see 1.4.5.3), the omission is indicated by the
mark of omission and the insertion of the prescribed abbreviation et al. ( = et alii, and
others), or for non-roman script records, its equivalent in another script. The inserted
phrase is enclosed in square brackets.
A.6.3 Certain abbreviations are prescribed in specific stipulations (e.g. 4.1.14,
4.2.12).

26
ISBD 2011

A.6.4 In various stipulations, provision is made for the use of “standard

abbreviations” (e.g. in the edition statement, see 2.1.2) without specifying the forms of
the abbreviations to be followed. These abbreviations are not prescribed, but it is
recommended that international or national standards be used (see Appendix C).
The abbreviations used throughout in the examples, other than those prescribed above in
A.6.2 and A.6.3, are illustrative and not prescriptive (see also Appendix D). Certain Latin
abbreviations are used in order to facilitate the international exchange of bibliographic
records and to avoid the need for bibliographic agencies to supply equivalent terms to
match the text in every possible language.
A.6.5 Initials and acronyms are recorded without internal spaces, regardless of
how they are presented on the resource.
Examples
Pel battesimo di S.A.R. Ludovico ...
KL Ianuarius habet dies xxxi
Secundum usum S.R.E.
Prediche del M.R.P.C.M.
Abbreviations consisting of more than a single letter are treated as distinct words,
separated with spaces from preceding or following words or initials.
Examples
Ph. D.
Mr J.J. Rousseau
When two or more distinct abbreviations, initialisms, etc., appear in juxtaposition, each is
separated from the other by a space.
Examples
par R.F. s. d. C.
M. J.P. Rabaut

A.7 Capitalization
In general, in those scripts where capitalization is relevant, the first letter of the first word
of each area should be a capital; the first letter of the first word of some elements or parts
of elements should also be a capital (e.g. parallel title, alternative title, section title).
Other capitalization should follow the appropriate usage for the language and script used
in the description (see A.5 for the language, script, and form of letters to be used for
transcription). When more than one language or script appears in the description, each
should be capitalized in accordance with the usage of that language or script even when
this produces an inconsistent pattern of capitalization for the description as a whole.

For older monographic resources:

Letters of numerical value in a chronogram in the title or in the
publication, production, distribution, etc., area, or in an acrostic in the
text of a poem are given in capitals. Interpolations used by the
cataloguing agency should follow modern practice.

27
A ISBD 2011

Example
Anno Vt speraMUs, pace CoronanDo [1610]
A final larger capital I in Latin words is a ligature representing ii or ij.
It can be expanded (see A.6.1) or it may be left as it is.
Early type founts provided only one letter for upper case I and J and
one for U and V. (Lower case i/j and u/v were used interchangeably as
well, the differences follow the founts used and graphical conventions
rather than spelling conventions, but both letters were extant in most
type founts.) The capital letters U and V began to be differentiated in
the early 16th century, distinction between I and J, i and j, u and v came
later in the 16th century.15
Several slightly different transcription conventions for I and J and for U
and V are applied in the international cataloguing community. These
may range from recording the actual capitalization of the originals to
converting V to u in most cases. One consistent conversion method as
chosen by the cataloguing agency is to be applied.
For example, if the capitalization of the original is not recorded,
alternating I and J, U and V, and VV or UU representing W are
transcribed as they appear, that is:
I or J as i or j, final IJ as ij, U and V as u and v, VV as vv.
or, I or J may be converted to i or j, U and V to u or v, and VV to w,
according to modern spelling conventions.
If it is not possible to identify a capital letter as one or the other (e.g. I/J
or U/V in Gothic type), it should be normalized according to modern
orthography in the language of the resource.
Examples
JOHANNES as Johannes
JSAK as Isak

A.8 Misprints
Inaccuracies or misspelled words are transcribed as they appear on the resource. They
may be followed by sic enclosed in square brackets that are preceded and followed by a
space ( [sic] ) or the correct version may be added, enclosed in square brackets, the
correction being preceded by i.e. (id est, meaning “that is”), or its equivalent in another
language and/or script.
Examples
Chansons créés et interprétés [sic]
The world in anger [i.e. danger]
Looser [i.e. Loser] takes all

15 Consistent use of these types as different letters was not established until well into the 19th
century, however. See D.B. Updike, Printing Types: Their History, Forms and Use.
(Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1937), p. 22, note.
28
ISBD 2011

The notted [i.e. noted] history of Mother Grim

Barcelonette [i.e. Barcelonnette]
Golden Vienese [sic] waltzes
compuesto por Luis de Bricñneo [i.e. Briceño]
Small busines [sic] encyclopedias
An hnmble [sic] address
To my loaing [sic] friend
Antiqvtates [i.e. Antiqvitates] Alstetenses et Palatinatvs Saxonici

For older monographic resources:

When the printer has left a blank space for an initial letter to be inserted
by hand, the letter is supplied, enclosed in square brackets, and the
interpolation is explained in area 7.
Example
[T]he true history of recent events
Note: Initial letter space left blank by printer
Spaces that are intentionally left blank, to give room for dates or names,
etc., entered later by hand, are recorded enclosed in square brackets.
The term blank space or an appropriate equivalent in the language
chosen by the cataloguing agency is recorded. Additions by hand in
such spaces are recorded in area 7 or given enclosed in square brackets
in area 1 with an explanation in area 7.
Example
Kungörelse, Angående Någon tilärnad Entreprenade, af
tändningen och underhållandet af Stadsens enskilte
Lycktor. Gifwen Stockholms Rådhus den [blank
space] Junii 176[blank space]
Note: Date "19 Junii 1767" filled in by hand on title page
and on the last page of copy x in collection y
or
Kungörelse, Angående Någon tilärnad Entreprenade, af
tändningen och underhållandet af Stadsens enskilte
Lycktor. Gifwen Stockholms Rådhus den [19] Junii
176[7]
Note: Dates between brackets filled in by hand on copy
x in collection y
When copies with a misprint that has been corrected are known and
both variants are described in one record, the later variant is used as the
basis for description. Information about the misprint is given in area 7.

29
A ISBD 2011

Examples
Den sluga och förståndiga gubben, som lärer de
oförfarna både i städerna och på landet, at igenom
hwarjehanda hus-curer, hela och bota mångfaldiga
sjukdomar, så wäl hos människor som fänad; jämte
mycket annat, som kan tjena til förmon och nytta i
åtskilliga hushålls-stycken.
Note: Variant state has misprint in title: "sjukdo-"/"domar"
. — Stockholm, : gedruckt bey Henr. C. Merckell, königl.
Buchdr. im Grosz-Fürstenthum Finland., Anno 1721.
Note: Statement of publication taken from colophon.
Variant state has misprint in colophon: "Stocholm"
Turned letters are transcribed as intended and an explanatory note is
given.
Example
… virtue …
Note: The “r” in “virtue” is turned the wrong way

For continuing resources:

Inaccuracies or misspelled words are not transcribed in the title proper
(see 1.1.5.1).

A.9 Symbols, etc.

A symbol or other matter that cannot be reproduced by the facilities available is replaced
by its description or its equivalency in letters or words, as appropriate. The substitution is
enclosed in square brackets and an explanatory note is made if it is considered important
to users of the catalogue. A copyright symbol that cannot be reproduced may be replaced
by a word or abbreviation without square brackets.
Examples
/ by [E.B.C.]
Note: Author's initials represented by musical notes
I [love] Paris
Note: The word "love" in the title is represented by a heart symbol
Splinters, historical, sacred and profane, partly from off that standard
[oak], our blessed constitution
Note: The word "oak" is represented by a woodcut of the tree
[3rd ed.]
Note: Edition information represented by three stars
, cop. 2009
Editorial comment: Date appears as: ©2009.

A.10 Imperfections
Imperfections in the copy being described may be described in a note (see 7.11).

30
ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

The ISBD is concerned with the recording of copies of library materials
as issued, and makes no provision for situations where no complete
copy exists or when an imperfect copy has to be catalogued without the
help of a bibliographic record for a complete copy.
In the first case, compilers and users of databases, whether manual or
machine-based, should realize that descriptions taking account of
alterations during printing, special dedication copies, the presence of
cancel leaves, etc., may not apply to all copies of the same edition.
In the second case, a record for a complete copy should first be sought
and imperfections and other peculiar characteristics described in area 7;
but when no details of a complete copy can be found, information
supplied by the cataloguer from inference in the title and statement of
responsibility area is given in square brackets with an explanatory note.
Alternative possibilities are linked by the word or. When such
information cannot be supplied, lacunae are indicated by the mark of
omission with an explanatory note. The extent of an imperfect copy
when the complete extent cannot be inferred is given according to the
provisions of 5.1.4.1.5.

A.11 Examples
The examples given throughout this document are illustrative and not prescriptive except
when the stipulations specify that the form found in the example or examples is to be
followed. Most examples are based on the description of existing resources.

31
ISBD 2011

SPECIFICATION OF ELEMENTS

0 CONTENT FORM AND MEDIA TYPE AREA

Introductory note
The purpose of the content form and media type area is to indicate at the very beginning
of the description both the fundamental form or forms in which the content of a resource
is expressed and the type or types of carrier used to convey that content so as to assist
catalogue users in identifying and selecting resources appropriate to their needs. The
increasing variety and complexity of resource content and types of media, along with a
growing diversity of users with particular information needs, require greater specificity in
describing content form and media type early in the record. Providing full information
about content form and media type will facilitate access for all types of users with
specific needs, the exchange of cataloguing records within cooperative networks, and
interoperability with other metadata standards in an open access environment.
The content form and media type area comprises two elements, each taken from a closed
list: (1) the content form, one or more terms reflecting the fundamental form or forms in
which the content of a resource is expressed, to which may be added one or more content
qualifications, specifying the type, sensory nature, dimensionality, and/or presence or
absence of motion for the resource being described; and (2) the media type, indicating the
type or types of carrier used to convey the content of the resource.

Contents
0.1 Content form
0.2 Media type

Prescribed punctuation
A. Content qualification terms are enclosed in parentheses immediately following the
content form term ( ( ) ) .
B. When different content qualification terms are applicable to one content form, each
subsequent content qualification term is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
C. The media type term is preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ).
D. When different content forms are contained in one media type, each content form
term after the first is preceded by a point, space (. ).
E. When a resource consists of different media types and contains different content
forms, each subsequent content form : media type statement is preceded by a space, plus
sign, space ( + ).
Punctuation patterns
Content form (content qualification) : media type
Content form (content qualification ; content qualification) : media type
Content form. Content form (content qualification) : media type
Content form (content qualification). Content form (content
qualification) : media type

33
0 ISBD 2011

Content form (content qualification) : media type + Content form

(content qualification) : media type

Prescribed source
The resource itself

34
ISBD 2011

0.1 Content form

Mandatory
Content form categories reflect the fundamental form or forms in which the content of a
resource is expressed. One or more terms from the following list, or their equivalents in
the language and script chosen by the cataloguing agency, are given. For resources of
mixed content where there is no predominant part of the resource (i.e. all parts are equally
prominent or important), all terms that are applicable to the resource being described are
recorded, in alphabetical order. Exceptionally, for resources composed of mixed content
where three or more forms are applicable, the term multiple content forms may be given.
For resources of mixed content where one part of the resource is predominant and other
content is minimal or incidental (e.g. a printed book with more than a few illustrations,
but insufficient to be considered predominant; a recorded opera with some spoken
words), content forms that are not predominant may be omitted.

Content Form Terms

Content Form Term Definition and Scope of Term

dataset content expressed by digitally-encoded data intended
to be processed by a computer; examples include
numeric data, environmental data, etc., used by
applications software to calculate averages,
correlations, etc., or to produce models, etc., but not
normally displayed in its raw form. Excluded are
digitally recorded music [see music], language [see
spoken word], sounds [see sounds], computer-
reproduced images [see image] and text [see text]
image content expressed through line, shape, shading, etc.;
an image can be still or moving, in two or three
dimensions; examples include art reproductions,
maps, raised relief maps, photographs, remote-
sensing images, stereographs, motion pictures, and
lithographs
movement content expressed through motion, i.e. the act or
process of changing the position of an object or
person; examples include dance notation, stage
actions, or choreography, but exclude moving
images, such as motion pictures [see image]
multiple content forms mixed content where three or more forms are
applicable
music content expressed through ordered tones or sounds in
succession, in combination, and in temporal
relationships to produce a composition; music can be
written (notation), performed, or recorded in
analogue or digital formats as vocal, instrumental, or
mechanical sounds having rhythm, melody, or
harmony; examples include written music, such as
35
0 ISBD 2011

scores or parts, and recorded music, such as concert

performances, opera, and studio recordings
object content expressed through either naturally occurring
entities or human-made or machine-manufactured
artefacts; also referred to as three-dimensional
structures or realia, examples of artefacts include
sculpture, models, games, coins, toys, buildings,
equipment, clothing, cultural, and other items;
naturally occurring entities include fossils, rocks,
insects, biological specimens on slides, etc.;
cartographic objects include globes, relief models,
and cross-sections intended to be viewed from the
side in three-dimensional form, but not raised relief
maps [see image]
other content form if none of the other terms listed here applies to the
content of the resource being described, this term is
given
program content expressed through digitally-encoded
instructions intended to be processed and performed
by a computer; examples include operating systems,
application software, etc.
sounds content expressed through sounds made by animals,
birds, naturally occurring sources of noise, or such
sounds simulated by the human voice or digital (or
analogue) media; examples include recordings of bird
songs, animal calls, and sound effects, but exclude
recorded music [see music], and recorded human
speech [see spoken word]
spoken word content expressed through the sound of the human
voice talking; examples include talking books, radio
broadcasts, oral history recordings, and audio
recordings of plays, whether recorded in analogue or
digital format
text content expressed through written words, symbols
and numbers; examples include books (printed or
electronic), correspondence, databases of journals,
and microfilmed newspapers

36
ISBD 2011

0.1.1 Content qualification

Mandatory if applicable
0.1.1.1 A content form category is expanded by one or more content qualification
sub-categories that are applicable to the resource being described. Content qualifications
specify the type, presence or absence of motion, dimensionality, and sensory nature for
the resource being described.
Terms are taken from the following lists, or their equivalents in the language and script
chosen by the cataloguing agency, using as many terms as are appropriate to expand on or
further clarify the corresponding content form category. Qualifications are added if
different options are possible for a given content form, e.g. text (visual) or text (tactile);
image (still ; 2-dimensional) or image (still ; 3-dimensional).

0.1.1.2 Specification of Type

cartographic content representing the whole or part of the Earth or
any celestial body at any scale; includes maps,
atlases, globes, relief models, etc.
notated content expressed through a notational system for
artistic purposes (e.g. music, dance, staging) intended
to be perceived visually
performed content expressed in an audible or visible form, at a
given time, and recorded in a resource; includes
recorded performances of music or movement,
computer-generated music, etc.

0.1.1.3 Specification of Motion

(for use with Content form image only)
The content form image is qualified to show the perceived presence or absence of
movement in the image content of a resource.
moving image content that is perceived to be in motion,
usually by means of a quick succession of images
still image content that is perceived to be static

0.1.1.4 Specification of Dimensionality

(for use with Content form image only)
The content form image is qualified to show the number of spatial dimensions in which
the image content of a resource is intended to be perceived.
2-dimensional image content that is intended to be perceived in two
dimensions
3-dimensional image content that is intended to be perceived in
three dimensions

37
0 ISBD 2011

0.1.1.5 Sensory Specification

This attribute indicates a human sense through which the content of a resource as
published is intended to be perceived.
aural content that is intended to be perceived through
hearing
gustatory content that is intended to be perceived through taste
olfactory content that is intended to be perceived through smell
tactile content that is intended to be perceived through touch
visual content that is intended to be perceived through sight

38
ISBD 2011

0.2 Media type

Mandatory
Media type categories record the type or types of carrier used to convey the content of the
resource. Categories generally reflect the format of the storage medium and housing of a
carrier in combination with the type of intermediation device required to render, view,
run, etc., the content of a resource. One or more terms from the following list, or their
equivalents in the language and script chosen by the cataloguing agency, are given. For
resources of mixed media where there is no predominant part of the resource (i.e. all parts
are equally prominent or important), all terms that are applicable to the resource are
recorded. Exceptionally, for resources composed of mixed media where three or more
media types are applicable, the term multiple media may be given. For works of mixed
media where one part of the resource is predominant and other media types are minimal
or incidental, media types that are not predominant may be omitted. If no mediation
device is required to use or perceive the resource, the term unmediated is recorded.

Media Type Terms

Media Type Term Definition and Scope of Term

audio For audio player-enabled resources
media used to store recorded sound, designed for use
with a playback device such as a turntable,
audiocassette player, CD player, MP3 player, or iPod;
includes media used to store digitally encoded as well
as analogue sound
electronic For computer-enabled resources
media used to store electronic files, designed for use
with a computer; includes media that are accessed
remotely through file servers, as well as direct-access
media such as computer tapes and disks
microform For microform reader-enabled resources
media used to store reduced-size images, not readable
to the human eye, and designed for use with a device
such as a microfilm or microfiche reader; includes
both transparent and opaque micrographic media
microscopic For microscope-enabled resources
media used to store minute objects, designed for use
with a device such as a microscope to reveal details
invisible to the naked eye
multiple media For resources composed of mixed media where three
or more media types are applicable
other media if none of the other terms listed here applies to the
type of carrier and intermediation device required to
convey, use, or perceive the content of the resource
being described, this term is given

39
0 ISBD 2011

projected For projector-enabled resources

media used to store moving or still images, designed
for use with a projection device such as a motion
picture film projector, slide projector, or overhead
projector; includes media designed to project both
two-dimensional and three-dimensional images
stereographic For stereograph viewer-enabled resources
media used to store pairs of still images, designed for
use with a device such as a stereoscope or
stereograph viewer to give the effect of three
dimensions
unmediated For media for which no mediation device is
necessary
video For video player-enabled resources
media used to store moving or still images, designed
for use with a playback device such as a
videocassette player or DVD player; includes media
used to store digitally encoded as well as analogue
images

40
ISBD 2011

Examples
Dataset : electronic
Dataset (cartographic) : electronic
Image (cartographic ; moving ; 2-dimensional) : video
Image (cartographic ; still ; 2-dimensional ; tactile) : unmediated
Image (cartographic ; still ; 2-dimensional ; visual) : projected
Image (moving ; 2-dimensional) : projected
Image (moving ; 3-dimensional) : video
Image (still ; 2-dimensional ; tactile) : unmediated
Image (still ; 2-dimensional ; visual). Movement (notated ; visual) :
unmediated
Image (still ; 2-dimensional ; visual) : projected
Image (still ; 3-dimensional ; visual) : stereographic
Movement (notated ; tactile) : unmediated
Movement (notated ; visual) : unmediated
Multiple content forms : multiple media
Music (notated ; tactile) : unmediated
Music (notated ; visual) : electronic
Music (performed) : audio
Object (cartographic ; tactile) : unmediated
Object (cartographic ; visual) : unmediated
Object (tactile) : unmediated
Program : electronic
Sounds : audio
Spoken word : audio
Text. Image (cartographic) : electronic
Text (tactile) : unmediated
Text (visual) : microform
Text (visual) : unmediated + Text (visual) : microform

41
ISBD 2011

1 TITLE AND STATEMENT OF RESPONSIBILITY AREA

Mandatory

Introductory note
The title and statement of responsibility area includes the title proper, parallel titles, other
title information, and statements of responsibility. The elements are defined in the
glossary. More information appears at the beginning of each element of the area.

Contents
1.1 Title proper
1.2 Parallel title
1.3 Other title information
1.4 Statement of responsibility

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. Each parallel title or other parallel statement is preceded by a space, equals sign,
space ( = ).
C. Each unit of other title information is preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ), unless a
word or phrase is given on the resource to link a second or subsequent unit with the
preceding unit.
D. The first statement of responsibility following any title is preceded by a space,
diagonal slash, space ( / ).
E. Each subsequent statement of responsibility is preceded by a space, semicolon, space
( ; ), unless the statements are considered to form a single phrase.
F. Titles of individual works by different authors, composers, artists, etc., and titles of
anonymous works contained in a resource, are separated by a point, space (. ).
G. Titles of individual works by the same author, composer, artist, etc., contained in a
resource are separated by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
H. If a title is made up of common and dependent titles, each dependent title designation,
if any, or each dependent title following the common title is preceded by a point, space (.
).
I. Each dependent title following a dependent title designation is preceded by a comma,
space (, ).
J. A dependent title designation or dependent title following other title information is
preceded by a point, space (. ).
Punctuation patterns
Title proper
Title proper : other title information
Title proper = Parallel title
Title proper = Parallel title : other title information
Title proper : other title information = Parallel title : parallel other title
information

43
1 ISBD 2011

Title proper : other title information = parallel other title information

Title proper / statement of responsibility
Title proper = Parallel title / statement of responsibility
Title proper = Parallel title = Parallel title / statement of responsibility
Title proper : other title information : other title information / statement
of responsibility
Title proper / statement of responsibility = parallel statement of
responsibility
Title proper / statement of responsibility = Parallel title / parallel
statement of responsibility
Title proper / statement of responsibility ; second statement of
responsibility ; third statement of responsibility
Title / statement of responsibility. Title / statement of responsibility
Title ; Title / statement of responsibility
Title : other title information ; Title : other title information / statement
of responsibility
Title = Parallel title ; Title = Parallel title / statement of responsibility
Common title. Dependent title
Common title. Dependent title designation, Dependent title
Common title. Dependent title designation
Common title. Dependent title = Parallel common title. Parallel
dependent title
Common title. Dependent title / statement of responsibility
Common title : other title information. Dependent title : other title
information
Common title. Dependent title : other title information / statement of
responsibility = Parallel common title. Parallel dependent title :
parallel other title information / parallel statement of responsibility

Prescribed sources
Square brackets are placed around information given in area 1 that was found on the
resource but not on one of the prescribed sources. Individual stipulations place
limitations on the information found on the resource that is given in area 1.

Printed textual and notated music resources:

Title page or title-page substitute.

All other resources:

The resource itself, container, documentation, other accompanying
material.

44
ISBD 2011

1.1 Title proper

Mandatory if available
1.1.1 The title proper is the first element of the area even when it is preceded on
the preferred source of information by statements of responsibility, edition statements,
series statements, publication/distribution statements, date, price or other matter that is
not title proper information.
1.1.2 A file name of an electronic resource is not treated as the title proper unless
it is the only name given internally on the file and externally on the resource, its
container, documentation and other accompanying material.

1.1.3 Forms of title proper

1.1.3.1 The title proper can consist solely of a term or terms indicating a type of
work or its intellectual or artistic content or of a generic term or terms.
Examples
Proceedings
Plays
Collected works
Journal
Textes et documents
Concerto
Drawings
Survey data
Software
Graphics
会议文集
1.1.3.2 The title proper can consist of the name of a person or corporate body when
the preferred source of information bears no title other than that name.
Examples
Sophocles
The British Museum
Kongress geografa Jugoslavije, Rijeka-Pula-Gorica, 3-8.X.1949
Museum diluvianum quod possidet Joh. Jacobus Scheuchzer
Arthur Sullivan
The Beatles
Michigan Institute on the Teaching of Librarianship
Dian Fossey
International Summer School on Computational and Mathematical
Linguistics
徐悲鸿
梅原龍三郎
김수근
45
1 ISBD 2011

1.1.3.3 The title proper can consist of or include an initialism, an acronym, or a

logo.
Examples
ISBD(M)
IFLA journal
Collection CAP
MM 51
BASIC
P.M.S.
If the expanded form is present on the preferred source of information but not selected as
the title proper, it is given as other title information (see 1.3.3) or as a statement of
responsibility. If the expanded form is not on the preferred source, it may be given in
area 7 (see 7.1.1.3).
1.1.3.4 An alternative title is part of the title proper. There is no prescribed
punctuation before or after the linking word. The punctuation of titles that include an
alternative title is at the discretion of the cataloguing agency.
Examples
Eric, or, Little by little
"Le tiers des étoiles" ou On ne sait pas quel ange
Don Juan oder Die Liebe zur Geometrie
Un giorno di regno ossia Il finto Stanislao
袖珍神学, 或, 简明基督教词典
ジュリエット物語, あるいは, 悪徳の栄え
아라비안나이트, 일명, 千日夜話
Collegium institutionum juris, sive Controversiae, antinomiae et
difficultates librorum quatuor institutionum juris; ...
Editorial comment: Older monographic resource.
1.1.3.5 The title proper can include numbers or letters.
Examples
Analytic theory of continued fractions II
Knox County, Kentucky, marriage book BB & C
Knitting I
Knitting II
International map of the world 1:1 000 000
Royalists and Puritans, 1635–1660
World 1:5 000 000 series 1106
Le 01
37 design and environment projects
L und E
Dossiers CH+6

46
ISBD 2011

In Caii Plinii Secundi Naturalis Historiae I. & II. cap. Libri xxx.
Commentarius
Editorial comment: Older monographic resource.
Evangelischer Gnaden-Strom, das ist: Sechs evangelische Historien,
begrieffen im 2., 3. und 4. Cap. Johannis. ...
Editorial comment: Older monographic resource.
LXX. disputationes theologicæ; …
Editorial comment: Older monographic resource.
中国国界线画法标准样图(1:400万)
900句开口篇
한글 dBASE III plus 1.1H

For multipart monographic resources:

If the numeration of a part of a multipart monographic resource is an
integral part of the title proper, the numeration of the last part is given
following the numeration of the first, enclosed in square brackets after a
hyphen.
Example
Prima [-decima] egloga della Bucolica di Virgilio

For notated music resources and sound recordings:

If the title consists of the type of composition and one or more
statements about the key, numbering, date of composition, and medium
of performance, the name of the type of composition and the statements
of key, numbering, date of composition, and medium of performance
are treated as the title proper. (The name of a type of composition is
considered to be the name of a form, the name of a genre, or a generic
term used frequently by different composers (e.g. capriccio, concerto,
intermezzo, Magnificat, mass, movement, muziek, nocturne, requiem,
Stück, symphony, suite, Te Deum, trio sonata). Other titles (including
those that consist of such terms plus an additional word or words, e.g.,
chamber concerto, Konzertstück, little suite) are considered to be
distinctive. Statements of key, numbering, date of composition, and
medium of performance that appear with a distinctive title are treated as
other title information.
Examples
String quintet no. 1, A major, op. 18
Klavierkonzert Nr. 5, Es-Dur
Sinfonia 1 (1970)
Sonate en ré majeur, opus 3, pour violon
Scherzo for two pianos, four hands
降B大调第一弦乐五重奏, 作品第K174号

47
1 ISBD 2011

1.1.3.6 When a statement of responsibility, the name of a publisher, or information

relating to other descriptive elements (e.g. edition statement) is linguistically an integral
part of the title, it is included in the title proper.
Examples
Marlowe's plays
Revai Nagy lexicona
Report of the Expert Group on Special Care for Babies
Lettres inédites d'Anatole France à Paul Grunebaum-Ballin
Pocket volume of selections from the poetical works of Robert
Browning
The post-humous works of Robert Hooke
Cinema-Ed Bureau films for the year
University of California publications in classical archaeology
Willing’s press guide
La route Shell
Mundy's map of the twin cities Edmonton & Strathcona
Charles Aznavour présente ses plus grands succès
The Penguin book of Italian madrigals
The vocal score and libretto of The merry widow
The Esso student's business game
Adventure games of Derek Tyne
Galaxy Inc.'s guide to spreadsheets
Joe Lynn's payroll system
Bruce Mitchell on dimensional analysis
The compact edition of the Oxford English dictionary
朗文常用英文词根词典
鲁迅全集

For moving images:

Even when the credits are linguistically connected with the title, credits
for performer, director, producer, presenter, etc., that precede or follow
the title are not considered as part of the title proper.
Examples
Star wars
Editorial comment: Title frame reads: Twentieth Century Fox
presents Star wars
Thief
Editorial comment: Title frame reads: Thief, with James Caan

1.1.3.7 Common title and dependent title

The title proper can consist of a common title and a dependent title, with or without a
dependent title designation.

48
ISBD 2011

Examples
Internationale Quartär-Karte von Europa. Blatt 8, Magnitogorsk
Crecer como hijos de Dios. Libro del catequista
Nueva enciclopedia Larousse. Suplemento

1.1.4 Choice of title proper

1.1.4.1 Resources with one prescribed source of information

1.1.4.1.1 When two or more titles in the same language and/or script appear on the
preferred source of information, the title proper is selected by reference to the typography
of titles on the preferred source of information, or, if there is no typographical distinction,
the sequence of titles on the preferred source of information. If the typography or
sequence does not provide the basis for a clear choice, the most comprehensive title is
selected as the title proper.

For older monographic resources:

The first title appearing on the preferred source of information is
selected as the title proper.

For continuing resources:

When the title appears in full and in the form of an initialism or an
acronym, the full form is chosen as the title proper and the initialism or
acronym is given as other title information (see 1.3.3.1).
1.1.4.1.2 When the titles are in different languages or scripts (i.e. parallel titles, see
1.2), the title proper is the title in the language and script of the content of the main part
of the resource.
When this criterion cannot be applied, the title proper is selected by reference to the
typography of titles on the preferred source of information or, if there is no typographical
distinction, the sequence of titles on the preferred source of information.

1.1.4.2 Resources with more than one preferred source of information

1.1.4.2.1 When a resource has more than one preferred source of information, as in
the case of a multilingual or multi-script resource with a preferred source of information
in each language or script, the title proper is selected from the preferred source of
information that is in the language and script of the content of the main part of the
resource.
1.1.4.2.2 When this criterion cannot be applied (either because the resource has no
language or because its content is presented equally in more than one language or script),
the title proper is selected:

For printed resources or resources having the

characteristics of a printed book (including
microreproductions):
from the right hand (recto) of two facing title pages or from the first of
two or more title pages on recto pages.

49
1 ISBD 2011

For tête-bêche or back-to-back resources where text and/or preferred

sources of information in two different languages or scripts are
presented on separate pages with equal status, each at the “front” of the
book with respect to one of the covers, the choice of title proper is at
the discretion of the cataloguing agency. The title not chosen as title
proper is given as a parallel title (see 1.2.3). A note explaining the format
may be given in area 7.

For older monographic resources:

from the right hand (recto) of two facing title pages or from the first of
two or more title pages on recto pages, unless the first was clearly
intended to be cancelled. A letterpress title page is to be preferred to an
engraved title page.

For cartographic resources, multimedia resources, sound

recordings, videorecordings, still and moving images, and
electronic resources:
from the first of two or more sequentially presented sources of
information.

1.1.4.3 Resources with two or more works with a collective title

When a resource contains two or more individual works and bears a collective title as
well as the titles of the individual works on the prescribed source of information, the
collective title is chosen as the title proper. The titles of the individual works may be
given in area 7 (see 7.7.2).
Examples
Three notable stories
Note: Contents: Love and peril / the Marquis of Lorne. To be or not to
be / Mrs. Alexander. The melancholy hussar / Thomas Hardy

For older monographic resources:

The title proper can include the titles of the individual works, or the
titles of the individual works may be given in area 7, with their
omission from the title proper being indicated by the mark of omission.
Examples
The spinning wheel's garland, containing several
excellent new songs …
Note: Contents listed on title page as: I. The good
housewife's coat of arms. II. The spinning-wheel's
glory. III. The taylor disappointed of his bride. IV.
The changeable world.
P. Virgilii Maronis Opera omnia ...
Note: Contents listed on title page as: Bucolica,
Georgica, Aeneis; Ciris et culex

50
ISBD 2011

or
P. Virgilii Maronis Opera omnia: Bucolica, Georgica,
Aeneis; Ciris et culex; / ...

1.1.4.4 Resources with two or more works without a collective title

If on a resource lacking a collective title, one work is the predominant part of the
resource, its title is considered as the title proper and the titles of the other works are
given in area 7 (see 7.7.1).
If no one work is the predominant part of the resource, all the titles are given in area 1
(see 1.1.5.2).

1.1.4.5 Resources without any title

When a resource bears no title, a title is devised and recorded in square brackets. The
supplied title should be concise, reflecting the area and/or the subject of the resource, in
the language and script of the resource, or for a resource having no language, the
language and script chosen by the cataloguing agency. A note is added in area 7 to
explain that the title was supplied by the cataloguer (see 7.1.1.1).
Examples
[Phantom jet fighter landing at R.A.F. Leuchars, July 1971]
[Computer and information science technical reports, University of
Florida]
[Mining claims in parts of Gloucester and Restigouche counties, New
Brunswick, Canada]
[Coast of Maine from Rockland Harbor to Pemaquid Point]
[Carte de la lune]
[北陵志略]
[日記]
If a resource has displayed text but no title, such as some broadsheets, posters, wallcharts,
etc., the displayed text is treated as the title proper (see 1.1.5.4).

1.1.4.6 Resources that are part of, or supplement to, another resource
1.1.4.6.1 When a section, supplement, part, etc., has a title or a designation
insufficient to identify it without the inclusion of the common title, the title proper of the
resource consists of a common title and a dependent title designation and/or a dependent
title (i.e. a common title, a section designation and/or a section title; the title of the main
resource and the non-distinctive title of a supplement or insert; the title of the main series, a
subseries designation and/or the non-distinctive title of a subseries; the title of the multipart
monographic resource and the non-distinctive title of the part described, etc.). The common
title may also be given in area 6.
Examples
Advanced calculus. Student handbook
Histoire du peuple anglais au XIXe siècle. Épilogue
Ordnance Survey of Great Britain one inch to one mile map. Seventh
series. Sheet 145, Banbury

51
1 ISBD 2011

Italian secular song, 1606–1636. Florence

The German pre-classics. Series A, George Philipp Telemann
Mix and match games. Module 1, Letters
IEE proceedings. A
Acta Universitatis Carolinae. Philologica
Geographical abstracts. C, Economic geography
Kits for tots. Bimonthly filmstrip additions
Art of advocacy. Structured settlements
OSHA compliance manual. Application of key OSHA Topics
Ports et mouillages des Iles Féroé (Faerøerne). Partie nord
采矿设计师手册. 4, 矿山机械卷
企业管理基础. 教师手册

For continuing resources:

When describing a supplement or an insert with a dependent title, the
title of the main continuing resource is also given in area 7 (see 7.2.4.5).
1.1.4.6.2 When a supplement, insert, part, etc., of a multipart monographic resource
can be identified without the inclusion of the common title, the title proper is the
individual title of the supplement, insert, part, etc. The common title is given in area 6.
Examples
Mining and minerals
In area 6: (The law of South Africa ; vol. 18)
Bathymétrie de la terminaison sud de l'arc insulaire des Nouvelles-
Hébrides
In area 6: (Contribution à l'étude géodynamique du Sud-Ouest
Pacifique ; H.V. III-1)
Ernani
In area 6: (The works of Giuseppe Verdi. Series I, Operas = Le opere
di Giuseppe Verdi. Sezione I, Opere teatrali ; vol. 5)
Art music from the Far East
In area 6: (Musical sources)
U.S. grain sales and shipments
In area 6: (GSR agricultural surveys)
社会科学ジャーナル
In area 6: (国際基督教大学学報 ; 2B)
Aix-en-Provence
In area 6: (Série orange : carte topographique de la France à 1:50 000
; 3244)

For continuing resources:

When supplements and inserts are described under an independent title,
the common title is given in area 7 (see 7.2.4.5).

52
ISBD 2011

1.1.4.6.3 When the common title or title of the main resource is linguistically an
integral part of the title of the supplement, part, etc., the title proper consists of the
integrated statement of both titles.
Examples
Supplement to Hain's Repertorium bibliographicum
Geological basis for Vegetation of Southwest Africa
Editorial comment: Vegetation of Southwest Africa is the title of the main
resource.
Superfluous hair, from Mail order madrigals
More graphics for Imagine that!
Der ander Theil deß Formularij, zum Tractat von Commissarien vnd
Commissionen Camerae Imperialis gehörig, in sechs Bücher
abgetheilt

1.1.5 Transcription
1.1.5.1 The title proper is transcribed from the preferred source of information
exactly as to wording, but not necessarily as to capitalization or punctuation (see also
A.7).
Examples
Elements of mineralogy
A view of Sir Isaac Newton's philosophy
Abstract of an Act of Parliament, 27 George 2d, 1754
To the inhabitants of London and its environs. Awake! Arise! or be
forever fall'n!
Varias antiguidades de Portugal
By the King, a proclamation for a general fast
Nouvelle carte des pays du Marché commun
La Camargue
Carte de pollution des eaux superficielles de Languedoc-Roussillon
par les détergents anioniques
A new and exact map of the Dominions of the King of Great Britain on
ye continent of North America
一般动力学（ 动力学、振动与控制 ）最新进展
Editorial comment: Title appears as:
一般动力学[振动与控制、动力学]最新进展.
Exceptionally, a very lengthy title proper may be abridged in the middle or at the end, if
this can be done without changing the meaning of the title, without loss of essential
information and without introducing incorrect grammar. In abridging a title proper, none
of the first five words (the first six words if the first word is an article) is omitted.
Omissions are indicated by the mark of omission.

For older monographic resources:

Information pertaining to the title and appearing on the preferred source
of information before the title by which the work is commonly

53
1 ISBD 2011

identified is included without inversion in the title proper in the

description even when the typography indicates the subsidiary nature of
such information.
Examples
Quę contineant duodecim ęneidos libri … P Virgilij
Maronis
Hereafter foloweth a litel boke called Colyn Cloute
Pious invocations, devices, announcements (including epigrams and
dedications) are not included unless they constitute the only title or
appear to be part of the title proper by typography or sense.
Example
Haubtschluessel der teutschen vnd italiaenischen
Sprache
Editorial comment: The title is preceded by the invocation
A.M.A.D.

For continuing resources:

Obvious typographical errors are corrected when transcribing the title
proper, and the title as it appears on the preferred source of information
of the basis of description of the continuing resource is given in area 7.
In case of doubt whether the spelling of a word or words is correct, the
spelling is transcribed as found.
Examples
Housing starts
Note: Title appears on vol. 1, no. 1 as Housing sarts
but
Lakeland libarian [sic]
Editorial comment: Title appears as Lakeland lib*arian.
If the title includes a date, name, number, etc., that varies from issue or
part to issue or part, or from iteration to iteration, this date, name,
number, etc., is omitted. This omission is indicated by the mark of
omission, except when it occurs at the beginning of the title.
Examples
Report on the ... Conference on Development
Objectives and Strategy
La sidérurgie française en ...
IFLA CD ...
Editorial comment: On disc label: IFLA CD 2001.
Frommer’s Washington, D.C., on $ ... a day
Editorial comment: On the title page: Frommer’s
Washington, D.C., on $35 a day.

54
ISBD 2011

The annual report of Governor ...

Editorial comment: On the title page: The annual report of
Governor Rhodes. The name of the governor changes with
each specific term of office.
Tagungsbericht der Österreichischen Gesellschaft für
Gefässchirurgie
Editorial comment: On the title page: 2. Tagungsbericht der
Österreichischen Gesellschaft für Gefässchirurgie.

For serials:
If the title proper includes any statement that mentions an earlier title,
title absorbed, etc., that may or may not be grammatically linked to the
rest of the title, such a statement is not transcribed as part of the title.
The mark of omission is not given. Relationships with other resources
are given in area 7 (see 7.2.4).
Examples
The serpentine muse
not The serpentine muse, incorporating the ASH
newsletter
Note: Absorbed: The ASH newsletter
International gas report
not International gas report, including World gas report
Note: Absorbed: World gas report

1.1.5.2 Resources without a collective title

When the resource comprises two or more works without a collective title, the titles of
the individual works are given in the order indicated by the typography of titles on the
preferred source or sources of information or, if there is no typographical distinction, the
sequence of titles on the preferred source or sources of information. Edition statements
associated with individual titles are transcribed with the titles. A linking word or phrase
between the titles of the works by the same author as given on the preferred source of
information is retained. (For works by different authors, see 1.4.5.11.2.)
When the number of individual works is very large, the first three titles may be given,
followed by the mark of omission. The complete contents may be given in area 7.
Examples
The double-dealer ; Love for love ; The way of the world ; The
mourning bride
Flash and filigree ; and, The magic Christian
La petite hutte ; suivi de, Lorsque l'enfant paraît
Romeo and Juliet overture ; and, Capriccio italien
Infancy ; Childhood
Electronic writing ; Functional grammar ; Verbal communication …
初吻 ; 绿化树 ; 男人的一半是女人

55
1 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

The titles of the individual works are given in the order indicated by the
sequence of titles on the title page. When works additional to those
named on the title page appear in the resource, the titles of such works
are recorded in area 7.
Examples
The floures of philosophie ; with The pleasures of
poetrie annexed vnto them ...
The serving-man become a queen. Jockey of the green.
The lass of Richmond Hill
The humble petition of a beautiful young lady. The
Rvnd. Dr B=rk---y's answer to the young ladies
petition

1.1.5.3 Common title and dependent title

1.1.5.3.1 Dependent titles as part of the title proper

If a title proper consists of a common title and a dependent title, the first element
transcribed is the common title, which is followed by a dependent title designation, or a
dependent title, or both. The dependent title is linked directly to its common title. A
dependent title appearing on the resource but not on the preferred source of information is
given in square brackets.
Examples
Acta biologica. Protozoa
Études et documents. Série C
Journal of polymer sciences. Part A, General paper
Analele Universităţii Bucureşti. Seria ştiinţe sociale. Estetică
Pubblicazioni dell’Università cattolica del Sacro Cuore. Contributi.
Serie 3a, Varia
Dansk periodicafortegnelse. Supplement
La lettre du maire. Textes et documents
The Baker Street journal. Christmas annual
Collection Armand Colin. Section de philosophie
Studia religiosa Helvetica. Series altera
Les sources inédites de l’histoire du Maroc de 1530 à 1845. Prèmiere
série, Dynastie Saadienne
Encyclopedia of archaeology. Part 2, History and discoveries

1.1.5.3.2 Series designation as part of the numbering

For serials, any number or other information relating to a chronological designation is not
transcribed as a dependent title but is given in area 3 (see 3.3.7).

56
ISBD 2011

Example
Nuovo archivio veneto
In area 3: Ser. 2, v. 1 (1891)-ser. 2, v. 20 (1900) ; ser. 3, v. 1 (1901)-ser.
3, v. 42 (1921)
Editorial comment: Title not transcribed as Nuovo archivio veneto. Ser. 2, or
Nuovo archivio Veneto. Ser. 3

1.1.5.4 Displayed text without a title

When the resource has a displayed text but no title (as in the case of some broadsheets,
some posters, wallcharts, etc.), the text is transcribed either in full or in an abridged form
as the title proper.
Omission of complete phrases or sentences is not indicated; abridgement of phrases,
sentences, or words is indicated by the mark of omission.
The order of statements in the transcription is determined by reference to the typography
and the layout of the statements on the resource. Important parts of the content of the
text, such as the names of products or organizations and the names, places and dates of
events, are retained.
Additional information on these or any other aspect of the content may be given in area 7.
Punctuation is at the discretion of the cataloguing agency, except that combinations of
symbols and spacing that have a special function in ISBD descriptions are to be avoided.
Examples
Emprunt national 1920 – Souscrivez – Banque de Paris et des Pays-
Bas
Tales of wonder, no. 3 – The horror in the telescope, by Edmond
Hamilton
Note: Transcription of text from enlarged reproduction of magazine
cover
'Comment trouvez-vous ce petit vin-là ...'
Note: Caption title abridged
Court cases 1969 ... by counties in southeastern Connecticut
I am a jolly huntsman| My voice is shrill and clear
Note: The title is taken from the opening lines of the poem

For older monographic resources:

Omission or abridgement is indicated by the mark of omission. The
order of statements in the transcription is determined by the sequence of
information on the resource.

1.1.6 Changes in the title proper

Changes in the title proper may involve making a new description or a note (see A.2.6,
7.1.1.4).

57
ISBD 2011

1.2 Parallel title

1.2.1 A parallel title consists of a title in another language or script than the title
proper and presented as an equivalent of the title proper on the preferred source or
sources of information. A title in another language that is linguistically linked to another
part of the description is not treated as a parallel title.
A resource may have one or more parallel titles.
A parallel title can take the same various forms as the title proper (see 1.1.3).
1.2.2 If there are titles in more than one language and/or script on the preferred
source of information, each title not chosen as title proper (see 1.1.4.1.2, 1.1.4.2) may be
transcribed as a parallel title. Parallel titles are included if they are necessary for
identification or otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
Album for the young = Album für die Jugend
Herfra til evigheden = From here to eternity
Beyond horizons = Allende los horizontes
세계를 간다 = Video world tour guide
1.2.3 For tête-bêche or back-to-back printed textual resources where text and title
pages in two different languages or scripts are presented on separate pages with equal
status (see 1.1.4.2.2), the title not chosen as title proper is given as a parallel title. The
source of the title proper is given in area 7.
1.2.4 The original title in a language other than that of the title proper appearing
on the preferred source of information and not linguistically linked to other descriptive
elements (for example, as an alternative title (see 1.1.3.4); as part of other title
information (see 1.3.1); as part of a statement of responsibility (see 1.4.3.4); or as part of
an edition statement (see area 2)) may be treated as a parallel title.
Examples
Loser wins = Les séquestrés d'Altona
Tétralogie = Der Ring des Nibelungen
Alexandri Aphrodisiensis in Sophisticos Aristotelis elenchos
commentaria = Аλεξάνδρυ ̀Аφροδισίεως άποσημειόσεις εις τους
σοφιστικὸυς έλέγχους
The original title in a language other than that of the title proper that does not appear on
the preferred source of information may be given in area 7 (see 7.2.4.1).
For an original title in the language of the title proper, see 1.3.1.

1.2.5 Transcription
1.2.5.1 If a parallel title is given, it is transcribed exactly as to wording, but not
necessarily as to capitalization and punctuation. If a statement of responsibility, a
statement of other title information, or a statement relating to the publication, production,
distribution, etc., area can be linguistically linked to a parallel title, it is transcribed as
part of the parallel title.

59
1 ISBD 2011

Examples
Breathless = À bout de souffle
Pièces de clavecin = The complete harpsichord suites
French colonies in America = Colonies françaises d'Amérique
History of the French language = Histoire de la langue française
Exceptionally, a parallel title may be abridged. Omissions are indicated by the mark of
omission. The instructions in 1.1.5.1 are followed with regard to abridging lengthy
parallel titles, omitting dates, numbers, etc., and the transcription of obvious
typographical errors.
1.2.5.2 If the preferred source of information bears more than one parallel title,
these titles, if given, are transcribed in the order indicated by the typography of
statements or, if there is no typographical distinction, by the sequence of statements.
Examples
Majaladda xeerka = Majallat al-qānūn = Law quarterly review
Swiss financial year book = Schweizerisches Finanz-Jahrbuch =
Annuaire financier suisse = Annuario finanziario svizzero
Le nozze di Figaro = Die Hochzeit des Figaro = The marriage of
Figaro
Composizioni per liuto = Lute compositions = Lautenstücke
Quattro concerti per l'organo ed altri stromenti = Vier Orgelkonzerte =
Four organ concertos = Quatre concertos pour orgue
Snow White and Red Rose = Blancanieves y Rosaroja =
Schneewittchen und Rosenroth

For older monographic resources:

If the preferred source of information bears more than one parallel title,
these titles, if given, are transcribed in the order indicated by the
sequence of information. Any other information pertaining to the title
and statement of responsibility area, between a title proper and a
parallel title, or between parallel titles, is transcribed in the order
indicated by the sequence of information on the source of information
and is preceded by the appropriate prescribed punctuation.

60
ISBD 2011

Example
Joh. Amos Comenii Orbis sensualium pictus trilinguis,
hoc est Omnium fundamentalium in mundo rerum &
in vita actionum pictura et nomenclatura Latina,
Germanica & Hungarica : cum titulorum juxta atq[ue]
vocabulorum indice = Die sichtbare Welt in dreyen
Sprachen, Das ist Aller vornehmsten Welt-Dinge und
Lebens-Verrichtungen Vorbildung und lateinische,
deutsche und vngarische Benamung : sampt einem
Tittel- und Wörter-Register = A' Látható világ
háromféle nyelven, az-az Minden derekassab ez
világon lévő dolgoknak és az életben való
cselekedeteknek le-ábrázolása és Deák, Német és
Magyar megnevezése : A' fellyül való irásoknak és
szóknak laystromával
1.2.5.3 Parallel titles appearing on sources of information not selected as a
preferred source of information may be given in square brackets in area 1 or may be
given in area 7. Parallel titles appearing elsewhere on the resource may only be given in
area 7.

1.2.5.4 Resources without a collective title

When the resource comprises two or more works without a collective title (see 1.1.5.2),
and when any of the individual works has a parallel title or titles, any parallel title that is
given is given following the title to which it applies.
Examples
The enticing products of France = Les produits séduisants de la
France ; Grape harvesting in Languedoc = La vendange en
Languedoc
Du er ikke alene = You are not alone ; Opname = In for treatment
Sur le mariage = Über die Ehe ; Lessing ; Freud et la pensée moderne
= Freud in der modernen Geistesgeschichte ; Mon temps = Meine
Zeit
De l’autre côté du miroir et de ce que Alice y trouva = Through the
looking glass and what Alice found there ; La chasse au Snark =
The hunting of the Snark

For older monographic resources:

When the resource comprises two or more works without a collective
title, and when each or any of the individual works has a parallel title or
titles, the parallel titles are given in the order indicated by the sequence
of information on the resource.
When there is one preferred source of information applying to the
whole resource, the parallel titles are given in the order indicated by the
sequence of information. When there is no preferred source of
information applying to the whole resource, but works contained in it
have their own preferred sources of information that are used
collectively as a single source of information, the parallel titles are

61
1 ISBD 2011

given in the order indicated by the sequence of information on each

preferred source of information.
Example
Ταδε ενεστιν εν τωδε τω βιβλιω. Λουκιανου.
Φιλοστράτου Είκόνες ; του αύτου ‘Ηρωικά ; του
αύτου Bίοι σοφιστων. Φιλοστράτου Νεωτέρου
Είκωνες Καλλιστράτου Eκφάσεις = Qve hoc
volvmine continentvr. Luciani Opera. Icones
Philostrati ; eiusdem Heroica ; eiusdem Uitae
sophistarum. Icones Iunioris Philostrati.
Descriptiones Callistrati ...
Any other information pertaining to the title and statement of
responsibility area that may intervene between a title of a work and its
parallel title, or between parallel titles, if given, is transcribed in the
order indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred source
of information and is preceded by the appropriate prescribed
punctuation.
Example
Directio methodica processus iudiciarii iuris
consuetudinarii inclyti Regni Hungariae / per M.
Joannem Kithonich de Koztanicza ... = Rövid
igazgatas a' nemes Magyar Orszagnak es hozzá,
tartozó Részeknek szokott törvény folyasirol /
mellyet deákbol magyar nyelvre fordított Kaszoni
Janos

1.2.5.5 Parallel common title and dependent title

If the title proper is made up of a common title and a dependent title or titles, any parallel
common title and parallel dependent title that is given is transcribed following the
common title and dependent title.
Examples
Godišen zbornik na Zemjodelsko-šumarskiot fakultet na Univerzitetot
vo Skopje. Zemjodelstvo = Annuaire de la Faculté d’agriculture et
de sylviculture de l’Université de Skopje. Agriculture
Dansk periodicafortegnelse. Supplement = The Danish national
bibliography. Serials. Supplement
中国动物志. 昆虫纲. 第四十六卷, 膜翅目. 茧蜂科(四). 窄径茧蜂亚科 =
Fauna sinica. Insecta. Vol. 46, Hymenoptera. Braconidae (IV).
Agathidinae

1.2.5.6 Changes in the parallel title in continuing resources and

multipart monographic resources

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

If a parallel title is added, omitted, or changed on subsequent issues or
parts, a note of such changes is given in area 7 (see 7.1.3) if it is
considered important to users of the catalogue.
62
ISBD 2011

For integrating resources:

If a parallel title is added, omitted, or changed on subsequent iterations,
the description is changed to reflect the latest iteration and the earlier
parallel titles are given in area 7 (see 7.1.3) if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue.

63
ISBD 2011

1.3 Other title information

Other title information consists of a word or phrase, or a group of characters, appearing in
conjunction with and subordinate to the title proper, a parallel title or titles of individual
works contained in the resource. Other title information can include variant titles
appearing on the same source as the title proper.
Examples
Basse vallée de l'Aude, exploitation des aquifères, risques de
pollution : situation en 1972
Edgar Degas : pastels, lavis, gouaches, esquisses
Les plaideurs : comédie
Bilder einer Ausstellung : zehn Stücke für Klavier
Klavierkonzert in A, KV 414 : Ausgabe für Klavier, 2 Violinen, Viola
und Violoncello
WWW.hr : Croatian homepage since 1994
Le Louvre : peintures & palais
Léonard de Vinci : géant de la Renaissance
Dynamics of a molecule in a cage : CH4 in NaA Zeolite
Abbado in Berlin : the first year
Almageste : voyage céleste sur ordinateur
Sibilla Frigia : vidi leccelso idio che fragellare
アジア語楽紀行 : 旅するタイ語
느낌여행 오지체험 : 삼척 내미로 마을
1.3.1 Variant titles (other than parallel titles) not selected as title proper but found
on the same source as the title proper, including the original title in the language of the
title proper, are treated as other title information. Variant titles appearing elsewhere on
the resource may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.1.2).
Examples
Die Sage von den Nibelungen : Nibelungenlied
Voyage to Venus : Perelandra
The devils : The possessed
Concerto op. 7,7 : Konzert A-Dur für Streichorchester
Sinfonie Nr. 3 : Eroica
第三交响曲 : 英雄
but
Barbara
Note: Sleeve title: Barbara, ľaigle noir
1.3.2 A statement of other title information can include a statement of
responsibility, the name of a publisher, or details relating to other descriptive elements
(e.g. an edition statement) when such a statement is linguistically an integral part of the
other title information.

65
1 ISBD 2011

Any information appearing as other title information that includes one of the mandatory
elements (e.g. a statement of responsibility) is included either as other title information or
elsewhere in the description. Additional other title information is included if it is
necessary for identification or otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
In search of light : the broadcasts of Edward R. Murrow, 1938–1961
The psychology of second language learning : papers from the
Second International Conference of Applied Linguistics,
Cambridge, 8–12 September 1969
Heil Harris! : a novel based on the television series “The Avengers”
Le encicliche sociali di Leone XIII e Pio XI : testo latino e traduzione
italiana della “Rerum novarum” e della “Quadragesimo anno” con
riferimenti ad altri documenti pontifici
The greenwood tree : newsletter of the Somerset and Dorset Family
History Society
Esquisse géologique de la Thakkola, Népal central : missions
géologiques du C.N.R.S.
Black holes : Sidney Owen's space games
21世纪的信息资源编目 : 第一届全国文献编目工作研讨会论文集

1.3.3 Special cases of other title information

1.3.3.1 Initialisms and acronyms

If a title proper consists of an initialism or an acronym and an expanded form appears on
the preferred source of information, the expanded form is treated as other title
information.
Examples
ISBD(CM) : international standard bibliographic description for
cartographic materials
SPSS : statistical package for the social sciences
When the expanded form is treated as the title proper (see 1.1.3.3, 1.1.4.1.1), the
initialism or the acronym present on the preferred source of information is treated as
other title information.
Example
Cahiers de l’Institut de linguistique de Louvain : CILL
When the title proper consists of or includes an initialism or an acronym (see also
1.1.3.3), and an expanded form is available from a source other than the preferred source
of information, the expanded form is not treated as other title information, but it may be
given in area 7 (see 7.1.1.3).

1.3.3.2 Incomplete or ambiguous titles

When the title is incomplete or ambiguous it may be completed by additional information
supplied from the content of the resource. This addition, enclosed in square brackets, is
treated as other title information.

66
ISBD 2011

Examples
Kauheat karnevaalit : [opiskelijaliike Tampereen Yliopistossa]
I våra hus : [dikter]
Vegetation : [in Botswana]
Département de l'Yonne : [carte routière]
Florida : [tourist map]
Street map of Flagstaff, Arizona : [walking tours]
Société d’études de la province de Cambrai : [bulletin]

1.3.4 Transcription
1.3.4.1 If a statement of other title information is given, it is transcribed following
the title to which it applies.
1.3.4.2 If a statement of other title information is given, it is transcribed exactly as
to wording, but not necessarily as to capitalization or punctuation. Exceptionally, other
title information may be abridged. When abridging other title information, none of the
first five words (the first six words if the first word is an article) is omitted. Omissions
are indicated by the mark of omission.

For continuing resources:

For continuing resources other than updating looseleafs, other title
information is omitted from the description unless it is considered
important to users of the catalogue, or it may be abridged. If omitted
from the description, other title information may be given in area 7.
The instructions in 1.1.5.1 are followed with regard to abridging
lengthy other title information, omitting dates, numbers, etc., and
transcribing obvious typographical errors.

For updating looseleafs:

Other title information is included if it is necessary for identification or
otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue. Other title
information consisting solely of words relating to the currency of the
contents is not included.
1.3.4.3 A statement of other title information appearing on the preferred source of
information before the title proper may be transcribed following the title proper when this
is linguistically or otherwise possible. When this is not possible, the statement may be
given in area 7.
Examples
Tam-Tam : aus dem Repertoire von Nico Palermo
Editorial comment: "Aus dem Repertoire von Nico Palermo"
appears at the head of the title page.

For older monographic resources:

Other title information appearing on the preferred source of information
before the title proper is transcribed before the title proper.

67
1 ISBD 2011

1.3.4.4 When a preferred source of information bears more than one statement
constituting other title information, these statements, if given, are transcribed in the order
indicated by the typography of statements or, if there is no typographical distinction, the
sequence of statements.
Examples
Spirit of an age : New Zealand in the seventies : essays in honour of
W.B. Sutch
Distribution of principal kinds of soils : orders, suborders and great
groups : National Soil Survey classification of 1967
Animal stories : dramatized readings : a recorded anthology
The Hammons family : a study of a West Virginia family's traditions :
from the Archive of Folk Song
Offshore oil drilling : data analysis : from Neel Oil Research Council
联邦调查局档案 : FBI : 帝国之中的帝国 霸权之上的霸权
オールド・ファッション : 普通の会話 : 東京ステーションホテルに
て
천국의 계단 : 그리고 다시는 울지 않았다 : 최인호장편소설

For older monographic resources:

If a statement of other title information is given, it is transcribed in the
order indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred source
of information. This may result in an alternative title or details of
appendices or other supplementary matter being given as other title
information.
Example
A Christian funeral : a brief essay on that case, what
should be the behaviour of a Christian at a funeral? :
or, some directions how to regulate a funeral by the
rules of religion

1.3.4.5 Resources without a collective title

1.3.4.5.1 When a resource has no collective title (see 1.1.5.2), and when there are
statements of other title information relating to one or more of the titles of individual
works present, these statements, if given, are transcribed following the titles to which
they apply.
Examples
Youth : a narrative ; Heart of darkness ; The end of the tether
Le chevalier du guet : chanson folklorique française ; Qui frappe içi? :
Louisiane
Leonardo da Vinci : a pictorial biography ; The Medici : power and
patronage in Renaissance Florence
Special effects : morphing and warping ; 3-D modeling : generic
primitives and other basic tools

68
ISBD 2011

Some effects of geographical factors in combat simulations :

presentation / Zvonimir Bratun. Model Horus as a training method
in Slovenian Armed Forces : presentation ; Model Horus as a
training method in Slovenian Army / Dušan Marincic
Meditation : op. 90 ; Klänge der Stille : op. 91
Dixit Dominus : RV594 ; Stabat mater : RV621 ; Gloria in D major :
RV588 ...

For older monographic resources:

Statements of other title information, if given, are transcribed in the
order indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred source
of information. This applies even if the other title information relates to
more than one work.
Examples
Les Akanças : prologue mélo-dramatique, en un acte et
en prose ; suivi des Espagnols dans la Floride :
pantomime en trois actes et à spectacle
Vortigern : an historical tragedy, in five acts ... ; and
Henry the Second : an historical drama
1.3.4.5.2 A statement on the preferred source of information constituting other title
information and relating to more than one work by the same author, composer, etc., if
given, is transcribed following the titles of the works to which it applies. For notated
music and sound recordings, if the statement would normally be part of the title proper
(see 1.1.3.5), it is given as other title information. Otherwise, for example, if the works
by one author, composer, etc., are not consecutive, the statement may be given in area 7.
If the relationship between the statement constituting other title information and the titles
of the individual works is not clear, brief explanatory words may be added enclosed in
square brackets. Alternatively, the statement of other title information may be given in
area 7.
Examples
Endstation Sehnsucht ; Die Glasmenagerie : zwei Theaterstücke
Eight variations in G major, K. 24 ; Seven variations in D major, K. 25 :
for piano
Lied auf dem Dach ; Tafelmusik ; Ausklang : für großes Orchester
Pow! ; Zap it : two adventure games
Die grosse Liebe ; Wie sie starben : [beide umfassen] Dichter- und
Frauen-Porträts
1.3.4.5.3 A statement on the preferred source of information constituting other title
information and relating to all the works in a resource, although they are by different
authors, composers, etc., may be given in area 7.

1.3.4.6 Common title and dependent title

When the title proper consists of a common and a dependent title (see 1.1.5.3), a
statement of other title information relating to the dependent title, if given, is given

69
1 ISBD 2011

following the dependent title. Statements of other title information relating to the
common title may be given in area 6 or area 7.
Examples
Stock selection. Portfolios : money management
Jigsaw puzzles. Children's art : a decade of examples
Editorial comment: Other title information relating to common title: A visual
survey
Bibliographie de la France. Biblio. 1ère partie, Bibliographie officielle :
publications reçues par le Service du dépôt légal
Editorial comment: Other title information relating to common title: Journal
official du livre français paraissant tous les mercredis
Periodica polytechnica. Transportation engineering
Editorial comment: Other title information relating to common title:
Contributions to international technical sciences published by the Technical
University of Budapest
Publications of the Institute. Historical studies. Series III, Renaissance
Europe : texts and commentaries

For older monographic resources:

When the title proper consists of a common title and a dependent title
(see 1.1.5.3), individual statements of other title information, if given,
are given in the order indicated by the sequence of information on the
preferred source of information.

1.3.4.7 Parallel title and parallel other title information

1.3.4.7.1 When a preferred source of information bears one or more parallel titles
and other title information in more than one language and/or script, each statement of
other title information, if given, follows the title to which it is linguistically related.
Statements of other title information that are not transcribed in area 1 may be given in
area 7 (see 7.1.3).
Examples
On tour : 10 British jewellers in Germany and Australia = Auf Tournee :
zehn britische Goldschmiede in Deutschland und Australien
12 millions d’immigrés : feuille de lutte des travailleurs immigrés en
Europe = 12 milhões de imigrados : folha de luta dos operários
imigrados na Europa
Security : information and administrative management = Sécurité :
gestion de l’information et gestion administrative
Kleine Meditationen : für Streichtrio und Harfe = Short meditations : for
string trio and harp
Klavier-Quintett : Forellen-Quintett = Piano quintet : trout quintet =
Quintette avec piano : quintette "La truite"
Apocalypse de Jean : lecture = Apocalyps [sic] of John : a reading
Vienna : hotel and tourist guide = Wien : Hotel- und Reiseführer
La Birmanie : images du bouddhisme vivant = Burma : images of
living Buddhism
70
ISBD 2011

Les manuscrits datés : premier bilan et perspectives : Neuchâtel, 1983

= Die datierten Handschriften : erste Bilanz und Perspektiven :
Neuenburg, 1983
Mein erster Sor : Sammlung leichter Gitarrensoli = My first Sor :
selection of easy guitar-solos = II mio primo Sor : raccolta di facili
assoli per chitarra
挑战黑客 : 网络安全的最终解决方案 = Hacker proof : the ultimate
guide to network security

For older monographic resources:

Each statement of other title information, if given, follows the order
indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred source of
information.
Example
La Didone abbandonata : dramma per musica da
recitarsi in St. Pieterburgo nel giorno [blank space]
febraro 1766. nel Imperial teatro per commando di
Sua Maestà Imperiale Catarina II. / La musica è del
rinomato signor Baldassara Galuppi, direttore della
Musica, e Maestro di Cappella di Sua Maestà
Imperiale, e della Ducal Cappella di San Marco in
Venezia = Didon abandonnée : dramme en
musique qui doit etre representé sur le Theatre
impériale de St. Petersbourg le [blank space] fevrier
1766. par ordre de Sa Majesté Impériale Catherine
II.
1.3.4.7.2 When a preferred source of information bears one or more parallel titles,
but the statement of other title information is in only one language and/or script, the other
title information, if given, is given after the last parallel title transcribed.
Examples
Brecht heute = Brecht today : Jahrbuch der Internationalen Brecht-
Gesellschaft
Le rossignol = The nightingale = Die Nachtigall : conte lyrique en trois
actes
Priče iz davnine = Tales of long ago = Märchen aus Urväterzeiten :
izbor
Veliki česko-hrvatski rječnik = Česko-chorvatský slovník : za praktičnu
i školsku upotrebu
Carmina Burana = カルミナ・ブラーナ : cantiones profanae
신용춘의 국악세계 = Korean traditional music world of Shen Long-
chun : 퉁소 단소 연주곡
1.3.4.7.3 When a parallel title combines in itself the contents of both the title proper
and other title information, the other title information in the language of the title proper, if
given, is transcribed following the title proper and before the parallel title

71
1 ISBD 2011

Examples
Verbände und Gesellschaften der Wissenschaft : ein internationales
Verzeichnis = World guide to scientific associations
Année 1812 : ouverture = 1812 overture
Romeo i Julija : ljubavna priča = Romeo and Juliet’s love story

For older monographic resources:

The other title information is given in the order indicated by the
sequence of information on the preferred source of information.
1.3.4.7.4 When there is no parallel title, but statements of other title information
appear on the preferred source of information in more than one language and/or script,
the statement in the language and/or script of the title proper may be given. When this
criterion does not apply, the first statement appearing on the preferred source of
information may be given. The other statements may also be given.
Examples
Jugoslavija : hotel and tourist guide = Hotel- und Reiseführer
L’Europe laitière : annuaire international des produits laitiers =
internationales Jahrbuch der Milchprodukte = international
directory of dairy products
Nunc dimittis : Graduale für vier Stimmen, zwei Violinen, zwei Hörner
und Basso continuo = graduale for four voices, two violins, two
horns and basso continuo
Astérix : calendar = calendrier = Kalender = calendario

For notated music resources:

When the title consists of a generic term for type of composition (see
1.1.3.1) and there is no parallel title, and statements about key,
numbering, date of composition, and medium of performance appear on
the preferred source of information in more than one language and/or
script, the statement in the language and/or script of the generic term is
given as part of the title proper, following the term for type of
composition. When this criterion does not apply, the first statement
appearing on the preferred source of information is given. The other
statements may also be given.
Examples
Adagio et allegro molto, cor, trombone et orchestre =
horn, trombone, and orchestra = Horn, Posaune und
Orchester
Sonate für Violine und Klavier in h = for violin and piano
in b
1.3.4.8 A statement of other title information appearing on the resource, but not on
the preferred source of information, is given following the title proper or parallel title to
which it applies, enclosed in square brackets, if it is necessary for identification or
otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue. Otherwise, such a statement
may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.3).

72
ISBD 2011

Example
Civitas : [Monatsschrift des Schweizerischen Studentenvereins =
revue mensuelle de la Société des étudiants suisses = rivista
mensile della Società degli studenti svizzeri]

1.3.4.9 Changes in other title information in continuing resources and

multipart monographic resources

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

If other title information has been recorded in the title and statement of
responsibility area and that information changes on subsequent issues or
parts, any variation is specified in area 7 if it is considered important to
users of the catalogue. Alternatively, a note that the other title
information varies may be given, or the change may be ignored.

For integrating resources:

If the other title information is recorded in the title and statement of
responsibility area and that information changes on later iterations, the
description is changed and a note is made of the change if it is
considered important to users of the catalogue (see 7.1.3).

73
1 ISBD 2011

1.4 Statement of responsibility

Mandatory if available
A statement of responsibility consists of one or more names, phrases, or groups of
characters relating to the identification and/or function of any persons or corporate bodies
responsible for or contributing to the creation or realisation of the intellectual or artistic
content of a work contained in the resource described.
1.4.1. Only statements naming persons and/or bodies with principal responsibility
are required. Subsequent statements of responsibility are included if they are necessary
for identification or otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.
A statement of responsibility is not constructed when there is no such statement on the
resource.
1.4.2 A statement of responsibility can relate to such entities as:
 writers, composers, performers, graphic artists, choreographers, arrangers,
cartographers, programmers, principal investigators, animators, etc., whose work
is embodied in the resource, whether directly (e.g. author of text, editor, compiler,
translator, illustrator, engraver, cartographer, composer, arranger, choreographer),
or indirectly (e.g. author of the novel on which a film script is based, author of the
work on which the software is based, adapters of an already existing work),
whether in the same medium as the original or in another;
 collectors of various data, persons responsible for the direction of a performed
work; organizations, or individuals or corporate bodies sponsoring the work of
any of the above (with intellectual and not merely financial sponsorship),
producers of a popular music recording;
 production companies and individuals such as producers, directors, or others
having some degree of overall responsibility for a work; individuals who have
specific responsibilities when in the context of a particular film, or particular type
of film, they have a major creative role (e.g. cinematographers, writers of
screenplays or animators of animated films);
 developers and designers, whose work involves the creation of the content of a
resource or its realisation (e.g. game designer); entities having specific
responsibilities in the context of a particular resource or particular type of resource
(e.g. project directors of survey data, video director).
In principle such responsibility is vested not only in individuals or corporate bodies
having a significant role in the creation, production or realisation of the work, but also in
those whose role is comparatively minor (e.g. historical consultants) but who are
nevertheless named on the peferred source of information. Statements relating to
individuals or corporate bodies judged to have a minor role may be given in area 7 (see
7.1.4).

1.4.3 Forms of the statement of responsibility

1.4.3.1 A statement of responsibility can consist of one or more names of persons
or corporate bodies, with or without a linking word or short phrase indicative of the role
of the person or corporate body (see also 1.4.3.5).

74
ISBD 2011

Examples
/ Institut géographique national
/ réalisé et publié par les Éditions Grafocarte
/ edited by the Daily Express
/ by S. Hutchinson
/ dedicated by ... Grenvile Collins
/ presented by ... Lewis Morris
/ John Milton
/ engraved by Jukes
/ levée en 1817 par M. Givry
/ surveyed and drawn by E.M. Woodford
/ reproduced by W.H. Barrell
/ dressée par Ernest Grangez
/ compiled by the Ministry of Housing and Local Government
/ 胡昌平著
/ 国家图书馆图书采选编目部编
/ 鈴木玲子著
/ 홍이섭 지음
1.4.3.2 A statement of responsibility can consist of a phrase without a name or
designating an unnamed group when such a phrase describes an intellectual contribution
or is otherwise significant.
Examples
/ by Pär Lagerkvist ; translated from the Swedish
/ Erich Kästner ; für den Gebrauch in dänischen Schulen vereinfacht
/ compiled and edited by the graduating class
/ extracted from a chart drawn in 1785 ; with introductory commentary
by the composer
/ by Geoffrey Burgon ; text taken from the Chester mystery plays and
mediaeval poems
/ by a group of teachers representative of primary grades
/ Dieter Kendrick ; with spoken commentary by various artists
/ by a team of programmers and teachers
/ Arden Wilson ; with graphics by the author
/ aus dem Englischen ins Teutsche übersetzt
/ 南京市玄武区业余作者集体创作
1.4.3.3 A statement of responsibility can include a noun or noun phrase as well as a
names or names when such a phrase is indicative of the role of the person or corporate
body. Other nouns or noun phrases are normally treated as other title information (see
1.3).
Examples
/ selection and catalogue by Katherine Michaelson

75
1 ISBD 2011

/ the author John Milton

/ text by the Central Intelligence Agency ; maps by Rand McNally ; fruit
symbols designed and drawn by Joseph A.W. Kislingbury ; surveys
and sketches by J.B. Armstrong
/ d'après les travaux de M. Alfred Grandidier
/ piano accompaniments and notes by Claire Liddell
/ Text und Musik, John Lennon
/ research and text by Colin Barham
/ development and debugging, Philip Goldman
1.4.3.4 A statement of responsibility can include details relating to other
descriptive elements (e.g. original title, information about the edition of the work
translated) when such details are linguistically an integral part of the statement of
responsibility.
Examples
/ extracted from the Pensées by H.F. Stewart
/ Carson McCullersová ; dramatizace Edward Albee ; z anglického
originálu "The ballad of the sad café" přeložili Luba a Rudolf
Pellarovi
/ translated from the second edition, authorized August 10, 1908, with
an introduction and notes, by Andrew D. Osborn
/ reduced from the original plan of three inches to one mile and
planned to a scale of one inch & half to one mile by Isaac Johnson
in June 1800
/ selected and translated from La divina commedia, by J.G. Roman
/ adapted from Alice in Wonderland, by Wilford Hagers
/ traduit en vers latins, sur la troisième édition du texte françois, par M
l’Abbé Métivier
/ translated & emprynted by me William Caxton …
1.4.3.5 A statement of responsibility can consist of the names of one or more
corporate bodies acting as sponsors of a resource when the corporate bodies are named on
the preferred source of information and the relationship between the sponsor and the
resource is explicitly stated (or can be expressed by the addition of an appropriate word
or short phrase). If the name of a sponsoring body forms an integral part of the
publication, production, distribution, etc., statement (e.g. prefaced by a phrase such as
published for ...), it is included in area 4.
Examples
/ presented by West Virginia University ; sponsors, Consolidated Gas
Supply Corporation, West Virginia University College of
Engineering, West Virginia Section of the American Ceramic
Society
/ [sponsored by] Occidental Petroleum Corporation ; made by Sandler
Institutional Films, Inc.
/ éditée spécialement par I'Institut géographique national pour le
Touring Club de France
/ under the patronage of the Royal Scottish Geographical Society

76
ISBD 2011

1.4.3.6 A statement that is not connected with responsibility for the intellectual or
artistic content of the resource is not considered a statement of responsibility.
Statements such as mottoes, dedications, and statements of patronage or prizes (e.g.
Winner of the Tchaikovsky Award, 1971) may be omitted or given in area 7 (see 7.1.4).
Information such as with 33 maps, with 32 parts, accompanying gramophone record,
with accompanying reference manual may be given in area 5.
For statements connected with such responsibility but present within the other title
information, see 1.3.
1.4.3.7 A statement of responsibility that is linguistically an integral part of other
descriptive elements is transcribed as part of that element and is not repeated as a
statement of responsibility (see 1.1.3.6, 1.3.2).
When the name of the responsible entity is explicitly repeated on the preferred source of
information in a formal statement of responsibility, the name is transcribed as a statement
of responsibility.
Example
The John Franklin Bardin omnibus / John Franklin Bardin
In addition, if the title proper includes only one part of the name of the issuing body and
the other part of the name appears elsewhere on the preferred source of information, the
latter is given as a statement of responsibility.
Example
Skrifter fra Nordisk institut / Odense universitet
1.4.3.8 When the function of a corporate body whose name appears on the
preferred source of information is not specified and cannot be determined from the
resource being described or elsewhere, the name is not given as a statement of
responsibility. The name is given instead in area 7 (see 7.1.4).

1.4.4 One or more statements of responsibility

1.4.4.1 A single statement of responsibility occurs when the wording on the
preferred source of information shows a single statement. More than one person or
corporate body may be named in such a statement, as when they are represented as
performing the same function or, although performing different functions, their names are
linked by a conjunction.
Examples
/ edited by N.G.L. Hammond and H.H. Scullard
/ by Donald Elliott and illustrated by Clinton Arrowood
/ compiled and edited by Richard L. Coulton with the assistance of
voluntary aid
/ par L. Meyère et J. Hansen
/ developed by Dale Kahn with Laurie Fenster
/ by William Whiston, M.A. sometime professor of the mathematicks in
the University of Cambridg. and Humphrey Ditton, master of the
new mathematick school in Christs’s Hospital, London
Editorial comment: degrees and statements of positions held included for
older monographic resources (cf. 1.4.5.5).
77
1 ISBD 2011

/ the first by Leonard Lessius, the second by Lewis Cornaro, a noble

Venetian: …
/ first gathered and compiled in Latine by the right famous clerke
Maister Erasmus of Roterodame, and now translated into Englyshe
by Nicholas Udall
/ with additions by H.N. Ridley and the Rev. T.S. Lea
/ drawn in 1791 ... from the observations made by Fleurieu in 1769
and by Vincente Tofino in 1788
1.4.4.2 More than one statement of responsibility occurs when the wording shows
multiple statements, as when more than one person or corporate body is represented as
performing different functions and the statements are not linked by a conjunction.
Examples
/ by Rudolf Steiner ; translated by W.B.
/ with preface by Walter Allen ; editor, James Vinson
/ Centre national coopératif agricole de traitement antiparasitaire ;
directeur technique, Marcel Bonnefoi
/ by G. Robertson ; engraved by Morris
/ par N. de Fer ; A. Coquart sculpsit
/ by Michael Praetorius ; arranged for orchestra by N.J. Milner-Gulland
/ von Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart ; Klavierauszug, neu revidiert von
Wilhelm Kienzl
/ written by Danny Shapiro ; ported to Motif by Philip Schneider
/ par M. Marmontel, de l’Academie Française ; mit deutschen Noten
zum Schulgebrauch und Selbstunterricht herausgegeben
/ 汤显祖著 ; 汪榕培英译 ; 徐朔方笺校
/ チャールズ・バーチ, ジョン・B・プッコ著 ; 長野敬, 川口啓明訳
/ 쿨슨 리들 지음 ; 박영신 옮김
1.4.4.3 The difference between the first and subsequent statements of
responsibility is merely a matter of order. It does not imply that the first statement relates
to the principal responsibility for a work.
1.4.4.4 A statement of responsibility relating to appendices and other
supplementary matter, if given, is treated as an additional statement of responsibility
following the statement relating to the whole resource or to the main part of the resource,
if there is one. If such a statement appears on the resource but not on the preferred source
of information, it may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.4).
Examples
/ with an introduction by Scott Keltie
/ deur Annie Hofmeyr ; en'n geslagregister deur Joh. van der Bijl
/ by C.H.A. Armstrong ; with an appendix on the history and
architecture of the fabric by E.R. Arthur
/ attributed to Thomas Cavendish the circumnavigator ; with
descriptive text by F.C. Wieder
/ von Johann Christian Bach ; mit Kadenzen versehen von Li
Stadelmann
78
ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

Details of appendices and other supplementary matter are transcribed in
the order indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred
source of information. Accordingly, such statements appearing before
the statement of responsibility or where there is no separate statement
of responsibility are treated as other title information (see 1.3.4.4), and
those after a statement of responsibility are treated as subsequent
statements of responsibility. When they are taken from elsewhere on
the resource, such statements follow those statements of responsibility
that relate to the whole resource or the main part of it, or those that
relate to the statement concerned. For titles of other works on a
resource without a collective title, see 1.1.5.2.
Examples
/ by James Townley ; with a variety of German notes
explanatory of the idioms ... alluded to by John
Christian Hüttner
/ by the author of The conduct of the allies ; to which are
added the said Barrier-Treaty, with the two separate
articles ...
/ done into English from the French, with a new original
preface upon the same subject, by W.J. ; to which
are added, An essay upon Satyr, by Monsieur
d'Acier and A treatise upon pastorals, by Monsieur
Fontanelle

1.4.5 Transcription
1.4.5.1 A statement of responsibility is transcribed in the terms in which it appears
on the resource.
Examples
/ di Leon Battista Alberti Fiorentino ...
/ written by himself
/ Dauide Edguardo Anglo authore
/ by one who is neither a knight, nor a member of the House of
Commons
/ by **** …
/ as surveyed in 1822 for the use of the justices in sessions, by W.
Ravenshaw
/ dessiné et gravé par R. Hausermann
/ enregistrements de Roberte Hamayon
/ co-ordinated for the Voice of America by Tristram Coffin
/ Tatsuro Suzuki interviewed by Maya Koizumi
/ Modest Mussorgsky ; in der Instrumentation von Maurice Ravel
/ scriptwriter, Allan S. Mitchell ; consultants, Joan M. Clayton and
Simon Randolph
/ Abraham Bosse ; d'après Jean de Saint-Igny

79
1 ISBD 2011

/ developed by TNF Software Arts ; graphics by Larry Blum

/ principal investigators, T. Sheehan, H. Lovett
/ researched and compiled by Art Gump
/ 主办单位, 国家图书馆 ; 主编, 詹福瑞
/ Honoré de Balzac
/ Józef Lodowski
/ Home Office
/ Universidad de Salamanca
/ Mozart
/ British Library Bibliographic Services Division

For updating looseleafs:

Statements relating to persons who are editors of updating looseleafs
are recorded as statements of responsibility if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue.
Example
/ compiled and edited by Malcolm Evans and Martin
Standord

For sound recordings and moving images:

Names of individual members of musical or other ensembles, when
present on the preferred source of information, may be given in
parentheses following the name of the ensemble. Alternatively, the
names may be given in area 7 or omitted.
Example
/ Ravel ; Budapest String Quartet (J. Roismann and A.
Schneider, violins ; B. Kroyt, viola ; M. Schneider,
cello)

For older monographic resources:

Omissions may be made in lengthy statements, such omissions being
indicated by the mark of omission.
Example
/ quam … in florentissima electorali ad Albim
universitate, praeside … M. Augusto Pfeiffero,
Lavvenburgo-Saxone, publico eruditorum examini
exponit Martinus Bernhardi Gryphisbergâ
Pomeranus, ad diem XXXI. Januar. Anno …
MDCLXIII. …
1.4.5.2 A statement of responsibility that appears not on the preferred source of
information but elsewhere on the resource may be transcribed in area 1 enclosed in
square brackets or it may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.4). The source of such a statement
of responsibility may be given in area 7. A statement of responsibility taken from outside

80
ISBD 2011

the resource may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.4) with, if appropriate, the source of such
information.
Examples
/ [written and planned by Jennifer Vaughan]
Note: Author statement taken from title page verso
/ [Canadian Union of General Employees]
/ Johannes Brahms ; [englisches und deutsches Vorwort von Wilhelm
Altmann]
/ [par feu M. l'Abbé de Bretteville]
Note: Statement of responsibility from the title page of tome 4
/ [紫式部著]
/ [한국이공학사편집부 편]

For older monographic resources:

Statements of responsibility taken from outside the resource are given
in area 7, with the source of such information.
Example
Discours sur la creche de N. Seigneur. ...
Note: By Ezechiel Spanheim. Source: Holzmann &
Bohatta. Deutsches Anonymenlexikon, Bd. 1, S.
409, Nr. 11863
1.4.5.3 When the names of several persons or corporate bodies are represented in a
single statement of responsibility (see 1.4.4.1), the number of names transcribed is at the
discretion of the cataloguing agency. Multiple names transcribed may be separated by
commas or connected by linking words, as appropriate. If linking words are supplied,
they are enclosed in square brackets. Omissions are indicated by the mark of omission
and et al. (et alii) or its equivalent in another script, enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
/ by D.M. Chizhikov and V.P. Shchastlivyi
/ by Samuel Devend ... [et al.]
/ Dieter Ahlert, Klaus Peter Franz
/ [автори] Б. Конески, Х. Поленаковиќ ... [и др.]
/ National Park Service [and] Soil Conservation Service [and] Texas
Agricultural Experiment Station
/ Centre d’expansion Bordeaux Sud-Ouest, Institut national de la
statistique et des études économiques, Institut d’économie
régionale du Sud-Ouest
/ herausgegeben von der Universität des Saarlandes und der
Vereinigung der Freunde der Universität des Saarlandes
/ herausgegeben von Hans Fromm ... [et al.]
/ sculpserunt E.S. Hamersveldt et S. Rogeri
/ Carla Joynes, Lizbeth Beame [for] Deckle & Murphy
/ par Arthur Honegger, Daniel Lesur, Roland Manuel, Germaine
Tailleferre ... [et al.]
81
1 ISBD 2011

/ prepared by Albert Kreissinger, Ken Merrill [for] Alpha Unlimited

/ 李伟 … [等]著
Editorial comment: Character after brackets means “by”.

For older monographic resources:

Preferably all the names are transcribed.
1.4.5.4 When the names of persons or bodies appear in a statement of
responsibility in a less than full form, e.g. in the form of an acronym, the expanded form
may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.4).
1.4.5.5 Initials indicating membership of societies, academic degrees, etc., and
statements of positions held and qualifications following a person's name are transcribed
when the initials, etc., are necessary linguistically, or for identification of the person or in
establishing a context for the person’s activity. In all other cases initials, etc., are not
considered part of the statement of responsibility and are omitted.
1.4.5.6 A statement of responsibility that precedes the title proper on the preferred
source of information is transcribed following the title proper and other title information
unless it is linguistically linked to such information (see 1.4.3.7). The original position of
the statement of responsibility may be stated in area 7.
Example
/ Silvio Belli Vicentino
Note: Author's name at head of title page

For older monographic resources:

The original position of the statement of responsibility is stated in area
7.
1.4.5.7 A statement of responsibility that includes the name of a corporate body
expressed in a hierarchical form is transcribed in the form and order given on the
resource.
Examples
/ Bibliothèque nationale, Centre bibliographique national
/ Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México, Instituto de
Investigaciones Históricas
/ Centre international de dialectologie générale près l’Université
catholique de Louvain
/ U.S. Department of Agriculture Forest Service, South-Western
Region
/ Air Ministry, Meteorological Office
/ Division of Child Psychiatry, Cambridge Hospital
/ 国立国会図書館書誌部編
/ 국립중앙도서관 자료기획과
1.4.5.8 When the relationship between a statement of responsibility and a title is
not clear, a linking word or short phrase may be added in the language and script of the
title page, enclosed in square brackets in area 1, or an explanation concerning the
statement of responsibility may be given in area 7.
82
ISBD 2011

Examples
/ [verse translation by] Robert Lowell
/ [choisis et présentés par] Gilbert Prouteau
/ [collected] by Angus Mackay
/ [gravée par] Ch. Lemas
/ William Shakespeare ; [read by] Sir John Gielgud
/ [edited by] John Finlayson
or
/ John Finlayson
Note: Edited by John Finlayson according to …
1.4.5.9 If more than one statement of responsibility is given, the order of these
statements in the description is that indicated by the typography of the statements on the
preferred source of information or, if there is no typographical distinction, their sequence
on the preferred source of information without taking into account the extent or degree of
responsibility implied by the various statements. When the statements are not taken from
the preferred source of information, they should be given in a logical order, if such an
order applies, and enclosed in square brackets.
When the preferred source of information is composite in character (as in the case of a
multipart or multimedia resource having no unifying principal source), the statements of
responsibility are given in a logical order. Alternatively, the separate parts of the resource
may be described following the multilevel method (see Appendix A).
Examples
/ Rudolf Steiner ; [translated by Lady Maitland-Heriot] ; [edited by H.
Collison]
/ Mihajlo Velimirovic ; illustrazioni di Branimir Ganovic ; [traduzione in
lingua italiana a cura di Mario Sintich] ; [revisione scientifica a cura
di Protogene Veronesi]
/ by Suzanne Reynolds ; illustrated by the Studio Brambelli, Milan
/ edited by Michael Harloe ; sponsored by the International
Sociological Association Research Committee on the Society of
Regional and Urban Development
/ by Michael Chisholm ; [for the] Social Science Research Council
/ Hermann Hesse ; translated from the German by Basil Creighton ;
[translation] revised by Walter Sorrell
/ [Worte von] Juan Ramón Jiménez ; [Musik von] Mario Castelnuovo-
Tedesco
/ Jacques Offenbach ; music adapted and arranged by Ronald
Hammer ; new book and lyrics by Phil Park
/ design, Roger Teppe ; programmer, Bob Chompsky ; graphics, Carol
Mayer-Lenz

For older monographic resources:

When there is more than one statement of responsibility, the statements
are transcribed in the order indicated by the sequence of the information
on the preferred source of information.

83
1 ISBD 2011

Example
/ by the late ingenious and learned Hollander, Lambert
Hermanson ten Kate ; translated from the original
French by James Christopher le Blon
When the statements are found in the resource but not on the preferred
source of information, they are given in area 1 enclosed in square
brackets, in the order indicated by the sequence of statements on the
source of information used, or in a logical order, if such an order
applies, when more than one other source of information is used.
Alternatively, the information is given in area 7.
Example
A summarie and true discourse of Sir Frances Drakes
VVest Indian voyage / [begun by captaine Bigges] ;
[finished by his Lieutenant Maister Croftes] ; [edited
by Thomas Cates]
Note: Statements of responsibility from Cates's preface
or
A summarie and true discourse of Sir Frances Drakes
VVest Indian voyage
Note: “Begun by captaine Bigges … the same being
afterwards finished (as I thinke) by his lieutenant
Maister Croftes, or some other, I knowe not well
who”. Edited by Thomas Cates. Statements of
responsibility quoted from Cates’s preface
When a respondent and praeses are given for an academic disputation,
both the names and the words indicative of their function are treated as
part of a single statement of responsibility (unless linguistically linked
to the title proper or to other title information).
Examples
Discursus historico-theologicus de annis ministerii
Christi / quem ... in incluta Universitate Altdorfina
publico eruditorum examini subiiciunt praeses
Isaacus Laurbecchius SS. theol. dd. & respondens
Joh. Fridericus Kernius, Schleusinga-
Hennebergicus. Ad diem 21. Mai. Anno o.r. M.DCC
but
Consensû Benevolo illustris & gratiosissimi Senatûs
Medici in florentissima ad Salam Academià. Præside
... Johanne Arnoldo Friderici, phil. & med. doct.
anatom. chirurg. ac botan. p.p. famigeratissimo,
medico provinciali Saxo-Altenburgico … hanc
dissertationem medicam de hydrope tympanite
publicæ artis cultorum ventilationi submittit ad diem
[blank space] Martii, M.DC.LXXII. ... David Richter,
Zittâ Lusatus. Autor

84
ISBD 2011

For sound recordings and audiovisual resources:

If there is more than one statement of responsibility, the statements
should be arranged so that the different categories of responsibility are
given in a logical order. For example, for sound recordings: composers
of the music, including persons whose improvisatory roles are deemed
part of the creative process; authors of the text; performers in the
following order: soloists/actors/readers; chorus; director of the chorus;
orchestra; director of the orchestra; director of a dramatic production;
producer of a popular music recording.

1.4.5.10 Parallel title and parallel statement of responsibility

1.4.5.10.1 When a preferred source of information bears one or more parallel titles
and/or parallel statements of other title information, and also has statements of
responsibility in more than one language and/or script, each statement of responsibility, if
given, follows the title or other title information to which it is linguistically related.
Examples
National accounts statistics, 1950–1968 / Organisation for Economic
Cooperation and Development = Statistique des comptes
nationaux, 1950–1968 / Organisation de cooperation et de
développement
Carte minéralogique de l'Afrique / Organisation des Nations Unies
pour l'éducation, la science et la culture [et] Association des
services géologiques africains = Mineral map of Africa / United
Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization [and]
Association of African Geological Surveys
Die Zauberflöte : für zwei Flöten oder Violinen / W.A. Mozart ; nach
einer Ausgabe aus dem Jahr 1792 herausgegeben von Gerhard
Braun = The magic flute : for two flutes or violins / W.A. Mozart ;
from an edition of 1792 edited by Gerhard Braun
Sowjetische Klaviermusik für die Jugend / herausgegeben von Nikolai
Koptschewski = Soviet piano music for young people / edited by
Nicolai Kopchevsky = Musique de piano soviétique pour la
jeunesse / édité par Nicolas Kopchevski
Familias norte-americanas : los De Stefano / colaborador de
educación, Beryl L. Bailey = American families : the De Stefanos /
educational collaborator, Beryl L. Bailey
Swiss cycling journal : offizielles Organ / Schweiz. Radfahrer-Bund
SRB = organe officiel / Fédération cycliste suisse = organe
ufficiale / Federazione ciclistica svizzera
Canadian urban sources : a survey / Canadian Council on Urban and
Regional Research = Sources urbaines canadiennes : un aperçu /
Conseil canadien de la recherche urbaine
オーケストラの時の時 / 湯浅譲二 = Time of orchestral time / Joji
Yuasa
미궁 / 황병기 연주 = The labyrinth / by Byungki Hwang

85
1 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

The various titles and statements are transcribed in the order indicated
by the sequence of information on the preferred source of information.
Example
Anatomia uteri humani gravidi tabulis illustrata / auctore
Gulielmo Hunter ... Reginae Charlottae medico
extraordinario, in Academia Regali anatomiae
professore … = The anatomy of the human gravid
uterus exhibited in figures / by William Hunter …
1.4.5.10.2 When it is not possible to give an appropriate statement of responsibility
after each title or other title information, the statements of responsibility, if given, are
given together following the last parallel title or parallel other title information.
Examples
Printing at Gregynog : aspects of a great private press = Argraffu yng
Ngregynog : agweddau ar wasg breifat fawr / Michael Hutchins ;
translated by David Jenkins = y cyfieithiad gan David Jenkins
8 capriccios : hegedüre, második hegedii kiséretével = für Violine, mit
Begleitung der zweiten Violine / Henryk Wieniawski ; átnézte és
ujjrenddel allátta = revidiert und mit Fingersatz versehen von Jenö
Hubay
1.4.5.10.3 When a preferred source of information bears one or more parallel titles
and/or parallel statements of other title information, but the statement of responsibility is
in only one language and/or script, the statement of responsibility is given after the last
parallel title or parallel other title information transcribed.
Examples
Bibliotecas = Libraries = Bibliothèques / Ernest Malaga
Bieler Jahrbuch = Annales biennoises / Herausgeber,
Bibliotheksverein Biel
Carte de tapis végétal de la région méditerranéenne = Vegetation map
of the Mediterranean region ... / by P. Lalande ; F.A.O. [and]
UNESCO
Mährische Volkspoesie in Liedern = Moravian folk poetry in song =
Chant sur des poésies populaires moraves / Léoš Janáček
Svensk kyrkomusik = Schwedische Kirchenmusik = Swedish church
music / Vokal- und Instrumentalensemble der Rundfunkchor ;
Leitung, Eric Ericson
Statistique des comptes nationaux, 1969–1985 = National accounts
statistics, 1969–1985 / Organisation de coopération et de
développement économiques

For older monographic resources:

The statement of responsibility is given after the title or statement of
other title information with which it is associated.

86
ISBD 2011

Examples
Nouum Testamentum seu quattuor euangelioru[m]
volumina lingua Hungarica donata / Gabriele
Pannonio Pesthino interprete = Wij Testamentum
magijar nijeluen
Cursus mathematicus, nova, brevi, et clara methodo
demonstratvs, per notas reales & vniuersales, citra
vsum cuiuscunque idiomatis intellectu faciles =
Cours mathématique, demonstré d’une novvelle,
briefve, et claire methode, par notes reelles &
vniuerselles, qui peuuent estre entenduës facilement
sans l’vsage d’aucune langue / par Pierre Herigone,
mathematicien
Frederici Ruischii ... Thesaurus animalium primus ... =
Het eerste cabinet der dieren / van Frederik Ruysch
1.4.5.10.4 When there is no parallel title, but statements of responsibility appear on
the preferred source of information in more than one language and/or script, the statement
in the language and/or script of the title proper is given. When this criterion does not
apply, the statement indicated by the typography of the statements on the preferred source
of information or, if there is no typographical distinction, the sequence on the preferred
source of information is followed. The other statements may also be given.
Examples
Tin statistics / International Tin Council = Conseil international de
l'étain = Consejo Internacional del Estaño
Bibliotheca Celtica : a register of publications relating to Wales and the
Celtic peoples and languages / Llyfrgell Genedlaethol Cymru = The
National Library of Wales
Bibliographica belgica / Commission belge de bibliographie =
Belgische commissie voor bibliografie
Europa cantat VI : Leicester 1976 / au nom de la Fédération
européenne des jeunes chorales édité par = im Auftrag der
Europäischen Föderation Junger Chöre herausgegeben von = for
the European Federation of Young Choirs edited by Willi Gohl
Madame Bovary / réalisateur, Jean Renoir ; d'après le roman de
Flaubert = director, Jean Renoir ; after the novel by Flaubert
Directions in tin trade of selected North American countries : statistical
survey / International Tin Council = Conseil international de l'étain

For older monographic resources:

All statements of responsibility are given following the title proper and
any other title information.

1.4.5.11 Resources without a collective title

1.4.5.11.1 If a resource has no collective title (see 1.1.4.4, 1.1.5.2) and all the
individual works have the same statement of responsibility, the statement of
responsibility is given after all the titles, parallel titles and statements of other title
information.

87
1 ISBD 2011

Examples
Baby doll : the script for the film ; Something unspoken ; Suddenly last
summer / Tennessee Williams
Fréjus ; Le Var touristique / Provence Paris publicité
Daily mail motor road map of London and ten miles round ; Motor road
map of south-east England / Edward Sandford
Fantaisie-Impromptu op. 66 ; Scherzo op. 31 / Chopin
3. Sinfonie : "Das Lied von der Nacht" : für Tenor Solo, gemischten
Chor und Orchester op. 27 = 3rd symphony : "Song of the night" :
for tenor solo, mixed chorus and orchestra op. 27 ; 4. Sinfonie-
Concertante für Klavier and Orchester op. 60 = 4th symphony-
concertante for piano and orchestra op. 60 / Karol Szymanowski
Duo Nr. 1 G-Dur, KV 423, für Violine und Viola ; Duo Nr. 2 B-Dur,
KV 424, für Violine und Viola / Wolfgang Amadeus Mozart ;
Susanne Lautenbacher, violin ; Ulrich Koch, viola
A survey of spending on foreign language teaching ; Foreign language
teaching resources / principal investigator, J.L. Pianko
Le Colonel Chabert ; suivi de Honorine ; et de L'interdiction / Balzac

For older monographic resources:

The statement of responsibility is given in the order indicated by the
sequence of information on the preferred source of information.
1.4.5.11.2 If the individual works have different statements of responsibility, each
statement is given after the title, parallel title or statement of other title information to
which it applies. A linking word or phrase between the titles of the works by different
authors as given on the preferred source of information is retained. Edition statements
associated with individual titles are transcribed with the titles. (For works by the same
author, see 1.4.5.11.1.)
Examples
Teorija kredita : skripta / Milutin Ćirović. Teorija dopunskog kredita :
skripta / Vjekoslav Meichsner
Crépuscule en montagne / S. Sohet-Boulnois. Carillon corse /
Georges Lauro
The high school cadets = Kadettenmarsch / Musik, J.P. Sousa ;
Bearbeitung, Franz Bummerl. Musik im Blut : Marsch / Musik und
Bearbeitung, Hans Kolditz
Fantasy and fugue for orchestra and organ, op. 10 (1963) / Wallingford
Riegger ; Polish National Radio Orchestra ; Jan Krenz, conductor.
Synthesis for orchestra and electronic sound (1960) / Otto
Luening ; Hessian Symphony Orchestra ; David Van Vactor,
conductor. Nocturne (1958) / Colin McPhee ; Hessian Radio
Symphony Orchestra ; David Van Vactor, conductor. Fantasia for
organ (1929) / Otto Luening ; Ralph Kneeream, organist
Hybrid imaging : technology and graphic design / April Cubbitt. Art and
the machine / Fran Chen. Space art / Jean-Louis Gero ; illustrator,
Judy Randall

88
ISBD 2011

中华人民共和国国歌 / 田汉词 ; 聂耳曲. 国际歌 / 欧仁·鲍迪埃词 ;

比尔·狄盖特曲
The authorship of Wuthering Heights / by Irene Cooper Willis. And The
structure of Wuthering Heights / by C.P.S.
Le Western / textes rassemblés et présentés par Henri Agel, nouvelle
édition. Évolution et renouveau du western, 1962–1968 / par Jean
A. Gili
An examination of Dr. Burnet's theory of the earth ... / by J. Keill, the
second edition corrected ... . To the whole is annexed A
dissertation on the different figures of the coelestial bodies, &c ... /
by Mons. de Maupertuis
My very first prayer time book / by Mary Fletcher ; illustrations by
Treyer Evans, revised edition. Now I lay me down to sleep / text
and pictures by Rex Catto

For older monographic resources:

When the individual works other than supplementary matter are not
known to be by the same author, the titles, parallel titles, other title
information, and statements of responsibility are recorded in the order
indicated by the sequence of information on the preferred source of
information.
Examples
Catonis disticha de Moribus. 2. Dicta insigni Septem
Sapientum Graeciae. 3. Mimi Puliam, sive, Senecae
Proverbia, Anglo-Latina. Cato item Grammatice
interpretatus Latinis & vernaculis vocibus pari
ordine, sed diversis lineis alternatis. … / A Carolo
Hoolo, A. M. Privatae Scholae Grammaticae
Institutore in Purificum viciculo apud Londinates.
Editorial comment: original punctuation and capitalization
retained.
La fauconnerie / de F. Ian des Franchières ... recueillie
des liures de M. Martino, Malopin, Michelin & Amé
Cassian. Avec, Une autre Fauconnerie / de
Guillaume Tardif ... Plus, La vollerie / de messire
Artelouche d'Alagona ... D'avantage, un recueil de
tous les oiseaux de proye, seruans a la fauconnerie
& vollerie
1.4.5.11.3 If the individual works have statements of responsibility relating to some
but not all titles, each statement is given after the last of the titles to which it applies.
Examples
Godly contemplations for the unlearned, 1575 ; A letter of a Catholike
man beyond the seas, 1610 / Thomas Owen. The conviction of
noveltie, 1632 / R.B.
Jephte ; Le cinque piaghe di Christo / Antonio Draghi. Oratorio di S.
Petro piangente / Pietro Andrea Ziani
Rhapsody in blue ; Prelude for piano no. 2 / George Gershwin.
Symphonic dances from West Side story / Leonard Bernstein
89
1 ISBD 2011

Nuclear disarmament ; Politics of peace / principal investigator,

Thomas Cashdollar. Strategies for defense / principal investigator,
Damien Toffel
土佐日記 / 紀貫之著 ; 池田弥三郎訳. 蜻蛉日記 /
藤原道綱母著 ; 室生犀星訳
채근담 / 홍자성 저 ; 조지훈 역. 생활의 발견 / 임어당 저 ; 박일충
역

For older monographic resources:

The statements are transcribed in the form and order given on the
preferred source of information.
1.4.5.11.4 If the individual works have their own statements of responsibility and the
preferred source of information shows also one or more statements of responsibility
applicable to the whole resource, the statement or statements of responsibility applicable
to the whole resource are given after all other statements, preceded by a space, semicolon,
space. The relationship between the last named statement of responsibility and the
preceding transcription should be made clear by the addition of a linking word or short
phrase, enclosed in square brackets.
If this addition is linguistically impossible or would result in an awkward or cumbersome
statement, the relevant portion of the statement of responsibility and/or the explanation
may be given in area 7 (see 7.1.4).
Examples
The white devil ; The duchess of Malfi / by J. Webster. The atheist's
tragedy ; The revenger's tragedy / by Tourneur ; [all] edited with an
introduction and notes by J.A. Symonds
Could it be magic / Text und Musik von Adrienne Anderson und Barry
Manilow. Komm doch mal rüber / Musik, Dieter Zimmermann ;
Text, Charley Nissen ; Klavierbearbeitung [beider Kompositionen],
Rolf Basel
Symphony no. 4 in A major, op. 90 : Italian / Mendelssohn. Symphony
in C major / Bizet ; [both works performed by] National
Philharmonic Orchestra ; Leopold Stokowski
Spellbinder / Tom Leach. The music director / Bob Dithridge. Word
magic / Charles Zipf ; editor [of the three works], Glen Furness

For older monographic resources:

The statement or statements of responsibility applicable to the whole
resource are given in the order indicated by the sequence of the
information on the preferred source of information. If the relationship
between each person or corporate body and the individual work is not
clear, an explanation is given in area 7.
Example
The natural history of Iceland ... ; to which is added, A
meteorological table, with remarks / translated from
the Danish original of Mr. N. Horrebow
Note: Both works are translated from N. Horrebow
90
ISBD 2011

1.4.5.12 Common title and dependent title

When the title proper consists of a common title and a dependent title (see 1.1.5.3),
statements of responsibility relating to the dependent title are given after the title proper.
Statements of responsibility relating to the larger work may be given in area 6 with the
common title.
Examples
Plan d'ensemble au 1:2 000 de la région d'Ile-de-France. Bloc 1-77-
29, Bonnières-sur-Seine / Ministère de l'environnement et du cadre
de vie, Etablissement public régional d'Ile-de-France
Urban and regional references. Supplement / compiled by Canadian
Council on Urban and Regional Research
Teaching geology with computer software. North America / Bureau of
Education
Bulletin. Supplement
Area 6: (Bulletin / Faculty of Archaeology)
Publications de la Sorbonne. Série Byzantina / Centre de recherches
d’histoire et de civilisation byzantines

For older monographic resources:

Statements of responsibility are given in the form and order given on
the preferred source of information. In case of doubt or if the statement
of responsibility refers to the title proper as a whole, an explanation or
comment may be given in area 7.

1.4.6 Changes in the statement of responsbility in continuing

resources and multipart monographic resources

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

If a person or corporate body recorded in a statement of responsibility is
added or deleted on a subsequent issue or part and this change does not
require a new description (see A.2.7), the name of the later person or
body is given in area 7 or a note is made of the deletion (see 7.1.4.1). If
the change is only in the presentation of the name of the person or body,
a note is made if it is considered important to users of the catalogue.

For serials:
Major changes in the name in the statement of responsibility in
conjunction with a generic title require a new description (see A.2.6.2).

For integrating resources:

If persons or corporate bodies recorded as a statement of responsibility
change in subsequent iterations, the description is changed to reflect the
latest iteration and the names of earlier persons or bodies are given in
area 7 (see 7.1.4.1).

91
ISBD 2011

2 EDITION AREA

Introductory note
The edition area includes the edition statement, parallel edition statements, statements of
responsibility relating to the edition, additional edition statements, and statements of
responsibility relating to an additional edition statement.

Contents
2.1 Edition statement
2.2 Parallel edition statement
2.3 Statement of responsibility relating to the edition
2.4 Additional edition statement
2.5 Statement of responsibility relating to an additional edition statement

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. Each parallel edition statement is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
C. The first statement of responsibility relating to the edition or following an additional
edition statement is preceded by a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ).
D. Each subsequent statement of responsibility relating to the edition or following an
additional edition statement is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
E. An additional edition statement following either an edition statement or a statement of
responsibility relating to the edition is preceded by a comma, space (, ).
Punctuation patterns
. — Edition statement
. — Edition statement = parallel edition statement
. — Edition statement / statement of responsibility
. — Edition statement / statement of responsibility ; second statement
of responsibility ; third statement of responsibility
. — Edition statement / statement of responsibility = parallel edition
statement / parallel statement of responsibility
. — Edition statement, additional edition statement
. — Edition statement / statement of responsibility, additional edition
statement / statement of responsibility

Prescribed sources
Information taken from a source other than one of the following prescribed sources is
given in square brackets if it is recorded in this area. The preferred order of sources is:

For printed textual and notated music resources:

Title page, first page of music, other preliminaries, cover, colophon, the
rest of the resource

93
2 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

Title page, title-page substitute, colophon

For cartographic resources, multimedia resources, sound

recordings, videorecordings, still and moving images, and
electronic resources:
The resource itself, container, accompanying material

94
ISBD 2011

2.1 Edition statement

Mandatory if available

2.1.1
An edition statement normally includes either the word edition (or its equivalent in
another language) or a related term together with a number (2nd edition, etc.), or a term
indicating difference from other editions (new edition, revised edition, standard edition,
large print edition, fourth state, May 1970 script, etc.). A statement that includes the
word edition or its equivalent is not considered an edition statement when it represents
printing information, as is typical in publications of certain countries or in certain
languages. An edition statement can also include other phrases that may be linguistically
associated, linking the edition to other elements of the description (e.g. original title in a
form such as abridgement of ...).
When a resource has multiple edition statements relating to parts or pieces of the resource
(e.g. an interactive multimedia work), the statement or statements that relate to the
resource as a whole are transcribed. When there is no one statement that applies to the
resource, the statement or statements may be given in area 7. An edition statement that
appears only in the accompanying documentation is not regarded as an edition statement
of the resource unless information in the documentation indicates that the statement
applies to the resource.
Examples
. — 2nd ed.
. — 1st Carroll & Graf ed.
. — Revised version
. — 3e éd.
. — Ungekürzte Taschenbuchausg.
. — Version avec commentaires en anglais
. — 修正版
. — 제3판
The following types of statements are considered edition statements:
Geographic edition statements
Examples
. — Northern ed.
. — Overseas ed.
. — Московский вечерний вып.
. — 欧州国際版
. — 서울판
Special interest edition statements
Examples
. — Éd. pour le médecin
. — Managers’ ed.

95
2 ISBD 2011

. — 少年版
. — 看護学生版
. — 교사용판
Special format or physical presentation statements
Examples
. — Airmail ed.
. — Braille ed.
. — Large print ed.
. — Microform ed.
. — CD-ROM版
. — Ausg. mit Supplementen
. — 축쇄판
Language edition statements
Examples
. — English ed.
. — Éd. française
. — 中英文对照版
. — 日本語版
. — 한국어판

For older monographic resources:

A statement such as newly printed should be treated as an edition
statement when it appears to imply the existence of an earlier edition
and to be associated with the title, but as a part of the publication,
production, distribution, etc., area when it appears to be associated with
that area (see 4.1.8). The edition statement may include information
concerning the issue, impression or state being described (see also
A.2.1). Statements about unchanged impressions of an edition are
given as edition statements or additional edition statements.
Example
. — The fifth impression

For notated music resources:

When the term edition is used in order to indicate the version, the
arrangement, etc., of a musical work, the statement is given in area 1
(see 1.3), even when the term edition is used on the resource. When the
term edition is used in order to indicate the form in which a work is
presented in the resource (music format), the statement is given in area
3 (see 3.2.1.1), even when the term edition is used on the resource.
However, a term denoting vocal range (e.g. Low voice; Ausgabe für
hohe Stimme) is treated as an edition statement.

96
ISBD 2011

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, and still and moving images:
For a recorded performance, a statement that appears on the resource
and that indicates the edition or version from which the performance is
drawn is not regarded as an edition statement, but may be recorded in
area 7.

For electronic resources:

Related terms such as version, level, release or update can indicate an
edition statement; however, these terms are sometimes used to indicate
major or minor changes in a resource and therefore may not constitute a
reliable guide to indicate a new edition.

2.1.2 Transcription
The edition statement is given in the terms in which it appears on the resource. It is
enclosed in square brackets if it does not appear on a prescribed source. Standard
abbreviations may be used (see A.6.4). Arabic numerals are given in place of other
numerals or spelled-out numbers. Explanatory phrases appended to the edition statement
are given when considered necessary for identification of the edition.
If the edition statement consists solely or chiefly of symbols or other matter that cannot
be reproduced by the facilities available (see A.9), the characters are replaced by words or
numbers, as appropriate, enclosed in square brackets. An explanation may be given in
area 7 (see 7.2).
Examples
. — 4th revised ed.
. — 1. ed.
. — 3. Aufl.
. — Nuova ed.
. — Sehr veränderte Aufl.
. — Ungekürzte Ausg.
. — Deutsche Erstausg.
. — Neuaufl. der deutschen Originalausg.
. — 67th ed., complete with street plan
. — 5a ed., con un copioso índice alfabético de materias
. — Novissima ed. (7a), interamente riveduta
. — Ed. 4
. — 3. erw. Aufl.
. — Éd. réduite
. — Ed. 3-GSGS
. — [Three stars] ed.
Editorial comment: Statement appears as: ★★★ ed. Cataloguing agency
unable to reproduce stars.
. — 2e éd. du recueil noté
. — Reprint ed.
97
2 ISBD 2011

. — Hohe Stimme (Originallage)

. — Ed. special
. — Version 3.5
.—第3版
. — 復刻版
. — 버전 2.1

For older monographic resources:

The exact wording is given when the edition statement is taken from a
prescribed source of information. When the edition statement is taken
from any other source, standard abbreviations may be used and arabic
numerals are substituted for other numerals or spelled out numbers.
When the edition statement is not taken from a prescribed source of
information, the source of the statement is given in area 7.
Examples
. — The second edition
. — Newly imprinted and very necessary vnto all youthe
2.1.3 When no edition statement appears on the resource, although it is known
that the resource contains significant changes from previous editions or is a reproduction,
a suitable edition statement in the language of the preferred source of information and in
accordance with the provisions of 2.1.2 may be supplied, enclosed in square brackets.
Edition numbers should not be supplied, unless it is clear that the resource has a place in
a sequence of otherwise numbered editions. An explanation is given in area 7.
Alternatively, the information is only given in area 7.
Examples
. — [New ed.]
. — [3e éd.]
. — [Reproduction en fac-similé]
. — [Rev. ed.]
. — [With a new appendix]
. — [Éd. de Grenoble]
. — [2. Aufl.]
. — [Apr. 1995 issue]
. — [Rev. ed., Aug. 1995]
. — [Version 1.5]
. — [School ed.]
. — [増訂稿本]
. — [영인판]

98
ISBD 2011

2.1.4 Edition statements not transcribed in the edition area

2.1.4.1 An edition statement that is an integral part of an element in another area
(such as title proper or other title information) and has been treated as part of that element
(see 1.1.3.6, 1.3.2) is not repeated in the edition area.
Examples
The compact edition of the Oxford English dictionary
not The Oxford English dictionary. — Compact ed.
not The compact edition of the Oxford English dictionary. — Compact
ed.

The compact version of Symphony

not Symphony. — Compact version

For continuing resources:

For serials, statements indicating volume numbering or designation, or
chronological coverage (e.g. 1st edition, 1916 edition) are given in area
3 (see 3.3).
Statements indicating regular revision or frequent updating (e.g.
Revised edition issued every 6 months) are treated as frequency rather
than edition statements and are given in area 7 (see 7.0.3).
2.1.4.2 An edition statement associated with one or more works in a resource
lacking a collective title is not given in the edition area, but in area 1, with conventional
punctuation (see 1.1.5.2).

2.1.5 Changes in the edition statement

For multipart monographic resources:

If an edition statement is added, dropped, or changed on parts
subsequent to the first part, a note on such a change is given in area 7 if
it is considered important to users of the catalogue (see 7.2.2).

For serials:
If an edition statement is added, dropped, or changed on subsequent
issues or parts, a note on such a change is given in area 7 if it is
considered important to users of the catalogue (see 7.2.2), unless the
addition, deletion, or change is the result of a major change that
requires a new description (see A.2.6.2(b)).

For integrating resources:

If a major change in edition occurs, a new description is made (see
A.2.6.3(a)). If a minor change occurs, the description is changed and a
note on the change is given in area 7 if it is considered important to
users of the catalogue (see 7.2.2).

99
ISBD 2011

2.2 Parallel edition statement

A parallel edition statement is an equivalent of the edition statement in another language
or script.
When a prescribed source of information bears edition statements in more than one
language or script, the statement in the language and script of the title proper is given.
When this criterion cannot be applied, the edition statement made prominent by
typography or, if there is no typographical distinction, the one appearing first is given. A
parallel statement may also be given.
Examples
. — Canadian ed. = Éd. canadienne
. — Students' ed. = Éd. pour les étudiants
. — 2. prerađeno i dopunjeno izd. = 2nd revised and enlarged ed.

For older monographic resources:

When a prescribed source of information bears edition statements in
more than one language or script, the statement appearing first is given.
A parallel statement may be given, and if given, it is recorded along
with any corresponding statement of responsibility or additional edition
statement in the order indicated by the sequence of information on the
source.
Example
. — Troisième edition = The third edition

101
ISBD 2011

2.3 Statement of responsibility relating to the edition

Mandatory if available
2.3.1 Statements of responsibility relating to the edition can refer to persons or to
corporate bodies and can indicate functions such as that of a reviser of a new edition, or
can name the person or body responsible for the provision of supplementary matter, of
appendices, etc., in a new edition.
Examples
. — 5th ed. / by C. Ellis
. — Facsimile ed. / edited, with an introduction, by John Goode
. — Rev. version 3.3 / programmer, Kate Maggor
. — Mis à jour / M. Pillot
. — Revised version / photographer, William P. Gottlieb
. — 2. izd. / spremno besedo napisal M. Matičetov
. — 2nd ed. / with a historical time chart newly devised by M.A. Stuart
. — 2nd ed. / with a new epilogue by the author
. — Neuaufl. / herausgegeben und kritisch revidiert von Hans Joachim
Moser
. — 2e éd. / préface de Léon-Arthur Elchinger
. — 3rd ed. / with supplementary notes and appendices by H.J. Laski
. — May 1970 script / revised collectively by the Peking Opera Troupe
of Peking
. — 改訂第41版 / 沖中重雄編著
. — 제7판 / 이은상 편
2.3.2 Statements of responsibility and details of appendices and other subsidiary
matter relating to the edition being described, or to parts of the edition being described,
but not to all editions of the work, are given in accordance with the provisions of 1.4, in
the edition area when found on a prescribed source of information. When such
statements do not appear on a prescribed source of information, they may be given in area
2 in square brackets or may be given in area 7.
Examples
. — Student version / with new graphics by Gerry Herin
. — English language ed. / with commentary spoken by John Parrinder
2.3.3 The following information is given in area 1: (a) statements of
responsibility that clearly relate to the first edition or to all editions of a work, (b)
statements of responsibility that do not clearly relate to only one or only some editions,
and (c) details of appendices or other subsidiary matters relating to the edition.

2.3.4 Parallel statement of responsibility relating to the edition

Parallel statements of responsibility relating to the edition may be given.

103
2 ISBD 2011

2.4 Additional edition statement

Mandatory if available
2.4.1 An additional edition statement is given when the resource carries a formal
statement identifying it as belonging to an edition or impression within an edition, or to
an edition that is equivalent to the first named edition, or when the resource has
significant differences in content from other impressions of the larger edition to which it
belongs.
Examples
. — 3rd ed., reprinted with a new pref.
. — 2nd ed., revised issue
. — 2nd ed., rev. version
. — 3rd ed., [with an appendix]
. — English ed., 2nd ed.
. — World's classics ed., new ed. revised, reset and illustrated
. — 4th ed. / revised by H.G. Le Mesurier and E. McIntosh, reprinted
with corrections
. — 3rd ed., 2nd (corrected) impression
. — English full ed., 4th international ed.
. — Vollständige Taschenbuchausg., 1. Aufl.
2.4.2 Additional edition statements are transcribed in accordance with the
provisions of 2.1.2 and 2.1.3.
Examples
. — Amtliche Ausg., 17 Aufl.
. — Abridged ed., 2nd ed.
. — 5th ed., 2nd impression, with corrections
. — Nouvelle impression en facsimilé de la 1re éd. de 1751-1780
. — Interactive ed., 1993 version
. — 2. ed., con nuova prefazione e aggiunta di tre appendici
2.4.3 Additional edition statements naming an unchanged impression or reissue
may be given.
Examples
. — 4e éd., 3e tirage
. — 2nd ed., 2nd printing
. — 2., unveränderter Neudruck der 3., völlig neubearbeiteten Aufl.
. — Nouvelle éd., revue et augmentée, 70e mille
. — 3. ed., 4. rist.
. — Versione italiana, ristampa
. — 第 2 版, 第 3 次印刷

2.4.4 Parallel additional edition statement

Parallel additional edition statements may be given.
104
ISBD 2011 2.5.2

2.5 Statement of responsibility relating to an additional edition

statement
Mandatory if available
2.5.1 Statements of responsibility relating to an additional edition statement are
transcribed in accordance with the provisions of 2.3.
Examples
. — Rev. ed. / with revisions, an introduction, and a chapter on writing,
by E.C. White, 2nd ed. / with the assistance of Eleanor Gould
Packard
. — The second edition, reprinted / with a new preface by Dr. Horace
Smith
. — 2nd ed., reissued / with an afterword by the course convener
. — Version 2.4, corr. / with diagrams by Harry Weeks

2.5.2 Parallel statement of responsibility relating to an additional

edition statement
A parallel statement of responsibility relating to an additional edition statement may be
given.

105
ISBD 2011

3 MATERIAL OR TYPE OF RESOURCE SPECIFIC AREA

Introductory note
Area 3 contains data that are unique to a particular class of material or type of resource.
Where information exists for another type of resource, the information that can be
assigned to any other area of description is so assigned.
The language and/or script of the elements within area 3, the order of the elements, and
the prescribed punctuation for the area appear in the stipulations for particular types of
resources using the area. These are cartographic resources (for mathematical data),
notated music resources (for music format statements), and serials (for information
relating to numbering).
When a resource is a combination of materials and types of resources for which area 3 is
used (e.g. a map serial) or when multiple scales are given, area 3 is repeatable.
When area 3 is repeated, the occurrence of area 3 that is related to the content of the
resource (e.g. scale information for a cartographic resource or notated music format
statement) is given first; the area 3 for serials (numbering information) is given last.
Examples
. — Scale 1:250 000 ; universal transverse Mercator proj. — No. 1
(1970)-
. — Scores and parts. — No. 1-
. — Scales differ. — No. 1-

Contents
3.1 Mathematical data (Cartographic resources)
3.2 Music format statement (Notated music)
3.3 Numbering (Serials)

107
ISBD 2011 3.1.1.2

3.1 Mathematical data (Cartographic resources)

The mathematical data area includes the statement of scale, statement of projection, and
the statement of coordinates and equinox for cartographic resources.

Contents
3 1.1 Statement of scale
3.1.2 Statement of projection
3.1.3 Statement of coordinates and equinox

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. The projection statement is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
C. The statements of coordinates and equinox are enclosed in one pair of parentheses ( (
) ).
D. The statement of equinox is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
Punctuation patterns
. — Statement of scale
. — Statement of scale ; projection statement
. — Statement of scale ; projection statement (coordinates ; equinox)
. — Statement of scale (coordinates ; equinox)
. — Statement of scale ; projection statement (coordinates)
. — Statement of scale (coordinates). — Statement of scale
(coordinates)

Prescribed sources
The resource itself, container, accompanying material. Information taken from a source
other than one of the prescribed sources is given in square brackets if it is recorded in this
area.

3.1.1 Statement of scale

Mandatory if applicable
3.1.1.1 The scale is given as a representative fraction, expressed as a ratio (1: ).
There is no space before or after the colon in the ratio. The term scale or its equivalent in
another language and/or script may be recorded with the representative fraction.
Examples
. — Scale 1:25 000
. — Escala 1:100 000
. — 1:1 000 000
. — Scale 1:5 000–1:25 000
. — 縮尺 1:50 000
. — 축척 1:100 000

109
3 ISBD 2011

3.1.1.2 When the scale relates only to particular parts of the resource, the part to
which it relates is indicated.
Examples
. — Scale 1:3 982 200 at equator
. — Scale 1:59 304 960 along meridians
3.1.1.3 A statement of scale is given when known or calculated, even if the scale is
included in area 1.
Example
. — 1:500 000
Title proper: France au 1:500 000
3.1.1.4 When the representative fraction is computed from a verbal statement of
scale, it is given in square brackets. The verbal expression of the scale may be
transcribed following the representative fraction.
Examples
. — [1:7 200]. 1 pouce pour 100 toises
. — Scale [1:63 360]. 1 inch to 1 mile
3.1.1.5 When there is no numeric or verbal statement of scale, the representative
fraction is derived from a bar scale, a graticule (i.e. from 1° of latitude that on average is
111 kilometres) or grid, or by comparison with a map of known scale, and is enclosed in
square brackets with an indication that it is an approximation.
Examples
. — [Ca 1:1 800 000]
Editorial comment: Representative fraction computed from bar scale.
. — Scale [ca 1:277 740]
Editorial comment: Representative fraction computed from graticule.
. — 縮尺 [約 1:432 000]
. — 축척 [약 1:100 000]
3.1.1.6 When the resource is not drawn or constructed to scale, the phrase Not
drawn to scale or its equivalent in another language is substituted for a statement of scale.
3.1.1.7 When the scale of the resource is not given on a prescribed source and the
scale has not been determined by the cataloguing agency, the phrase Scale not given or its
equivalent in another language is substituted for a statement of scale.
3.1.1.8 When a vertical scale is appropriate, such as on relief models, this scale is
recorded following the horizontal scale. The vertical scale is specified as such.
Examples
. — Scale 1:1 744 080. — Vertical scale [ca 1:96 000]
. — 1:100 000. — Échelle altimétrique 1:100 000
. — 1:1 744 080. — 垂直縮尺 1:96 000
. — 축척 1:100 000. — 수직축척 1:100 000

110
ISBD 2011 3.1.3.2

3.1.1.9 The scale for celestial charts is expressed as an angular scale in millimetres
per degree.
Example
. — Scale 88 mm per 1°

3.1.2 Statement of projection

3.1.2.1 The statement of projection may be recorded when present on the resource.
When identified from other sources, the statement of projection may be supplied,
enclosed in square brackets.
3.1.2.2 The statement of projection consists of the name of the projection.
Associated phrases related to the statement of projection may be added. Such phrases
usually consist of statements pertaining to properties of the projection that are applicable
only to the resource described (e.g. as regards meridians and parallels). Standard
abbreviations may be used.
Examples
; proj. conique conforme de Lambert sécante aux parallèles 48° et 77°
; proj. conique conforme de Lambert, parallèles d'échelle conservée
45° et 49°
; proj. de Mercator transverse universelle, ellipsoide de Clarke 1880
; conic equidistant proj., standard parallels 40° and 21° N
; transverse Mercator proj., 10 000 yards India Zone I grid, Everest
spheroid
; azimuthal equidistant proj. centered on Nicosia, N 35°10′, E 33°22′

3.1.3 Statement of coordinates and equinox

3.1.3.1 Coordinates
Mandatory if applicable and available
The coordinates delimit the greatest extent of the area covered and are recorded when
present on the resource, or may be supplied if they are known and considered important
to users of the catalogue.
3.1.3.2 For terrestrial maps, the coordinates are given in the following order:
westernmost extent (longitude)
easternmost extent (longitude)
northernmost extent (latitude)
southernmost extent (latitude)
Longitude and latitude are expressed in degrees (°), minutes (′) and seconds (″) of the
sexagesimal system (360° circle); longitude is always taken from the Greenwich prime
meridian.
The degrees, minutes and seconds of longitudes and latitudes are preceded by the
appropriate initials for West (W), East (E), North (N) and South (S) or their equivalents in
another language or script. The two sets of longitude and latitude are separated from
each other by a diagonal slash not preceded or followed by a space. Each longitude or
latitude is separated from its counterpart by a dash, not preceded or followed by a space.

111
3 ISBD 2011

Examples
(E 79°–E 86°/N 20°–N 12°)
(E 110°30'–E 120°30'/N 25°15'–N 22°10')
(E 15°00'00"–E 17°30'45"/N 1°30'12"–S 2°30'35")
(W 74°50'–W 74°40'/N 45°5'–N 45°00')
(W 0°2'37"–E 0°0'35"/N 44°5'30"–N 43°45'00")
Maps of other celestial bodies, such as the Earth’s moon, may have coordinates recorded
as appropriate to the given celestial body’s coordinate system.
Coordinates may be recorded as decimal degrees.
Example
(W 95.15°–W 74.35°/N 56.85°–N 41.73°)

3.1.3.3 Right ascension and declination

For celestial charts, the right ascension of the centre of the chart, or the right ascensions
of the western and eastern limits of the area covered by the chart, and the declination of
the centre of the chart, or the declinations of the northern and southern limits of the area
covered, are given as coordinates.
The right ascension is designated by RA or its equivalent in another language, followed
by the hours, and, when necessary, minutes and seconds of the twenty-four-hour clock.
The declination is designated by Decl. or its equivalent in another language, followed by
the degrees (°) and, when necessary, minutes (′) and seconds (″) of the sexagesimal
system (360° circle), using a plus sign (+) for the northern celestial hemisphere and a
minus sign (-) for the southern celestial hemisphere.
The right ascensions and declinations are separated from each other by a diagonal slash
not preceded or followed by a space. When two right ascensions and two declinations are
given, each right ascension or declination is linked to its counterpart by the word to or its
equivalent in another language.

3.1.3.4 Equinox
When coordinates are given, the statement of equinox may also be given. The equinox is
expressed as a year preceded by equinox or its equivalent in another language. A
statement for the epoch is added when it is known to differ from the equinox, and both
are separated with a comma; the epoch is designated by epoch or its equivalent in another
language.
Examples
(RA 16 h 30 min to 19 h 30 min/Decl. -16° to -49° ; equinox 1950,
epoch 1948)
(RA 16 h/Decl. -23° ; equinox 1950)
(RA 2 h/Decl. +30° ; equinox 1950)
(RA 2 h 00 min to 2 h 30 min/Decl. -30° to 45° ; equinox 1950)
(ゾーン+30° ; 分点1950)
(존 +40° ; 분점 1948)
For charts centred on a pole, the declination limit is indicated.
112
ISBD 2011

Example
(Centred at South Pole/Decl. limit -60°)

113
ISBD 2011 3.2.1.2

3.2 Music format statement (Notated music)

Mandatory if available
Area 3 for notated music resources includes the music format statement and parallel
music format statements. The music format statement is a term or phrase representing the
physical form of presentation of a notated music resource. Details of the physical units of
the resource are given in the material description area (see 5.1).
A music format statement is not given for works for solo instrument or instruments
played in succession, works for only one voice, or works for one voice and one
accompanying instrument.

Contents
3.2.1 Music format statement
3.2.2 Parallel music format statement

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. Each parallel music format statement is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).

Prescribed sources
The resource itself, with the following preferred order of sources: title page, first page of
music, other preliminaries, cover, colophon, the rest of the resource. Information taken
from a source other than the resource is given in square brackets if it is recorded in this
area.

3.2.1 Music format statement

3.2.1.1 The music format statement is given in the terms in which it appears on the
resource. Explanatory phrases added at the end of a music format statement are included
if they are considered important to users of the catalogue. Further explanations may be
given in area 7 (see 7.3.2).
Examples
. — Full score
. — Orchester-Partitur
. — Partitur mit untergelegtem Klavierauszug
. — Score and set of parts
. — Partition, reproduction du manuscrit de l'auteur
. — Miniature score
. — Partitur [und Solostimme]
3.2.1.2 When no music format statement appears on the resource, a suitable
statement may be supplied, enclosed in square brackets, in the language and script of the
title proper or in the language and script chosen by the cataloguing agency.
Example
. — [Partition et parties]

115
3 ISBD 2011

3.2.2 Parallel music format statement

When a resource bears music format statements in more than one language and/or script,
the statement appearing first is given as the music format statement. A parallel statement
may be given.
Example
. — Játszópartitúra = Playing score

116
ISBD 2011 3.3

3.3 Numbering (Serials)

Mandatory if available
The numbering area consists of the numeric designation and/or chronological designation
of the first and/or last issue or part of a serial.
The dates given in area 3 may or may not coincide with the dates of publication given in
area 4.
If the first and/or last issue or part or a surrogate thereof is not available, any information
about the first and/or last issue or part may be given in area 7 (see 7.3.3.2). Area 3 is
omitted if both the first and last issues or parts or surrogates thereof are not available.
When the description is not based on the first and/or last issue or part, information about
the issue or issues or part or parts used is given in area 7 (see 7.9).
Numbering data other than that relating to the first and/or last issue or part may also be
given in area 7 (see 7.3.3).
In describing a facsimile reproduction or other photographic reproduction, the numeric
designation and/or chronological designation of the original serial are given.

Contents
3.3.1 Structure of the numbering area
3.3.2 Numeric designation
3.3.3 Chronological designation
3.3.4 Transcription
3.3.5 Parallel numbering system
3.3.6 Alternative numbering system
3.3.7 New sequence of numbering

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. A hyphen ( – ) after the number and/or date of the first issue or part of the serial links
this numbering to the number and/or date of the last issue or part of the serial, or indicates
that the serial is continuing. If only the number and/or date of the last issue or part is
given, the number and/or date is preceded by a hyphen ( – ).
C. If there is both a numeric designation and a chronological designation, the date is
enclosed in parentheses ( ( ) ) after the number unless the number is a division of the
date.
D. The second and each subsequent system of numbering (alternative numbering or
numbering in a different language or different calendar) used in the same issues as the
first one is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
E. A new sequence of numbering is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
Punctuation patterns
. — Date of the first issue or part–date of the last issue or part
. — Date of the first issue or part–
. — Number of the first issue or part–number of the last issue or part
. — Number of the first issue or part–
117
3 ISBD 2011

. — Number of the first issue or part (date of the first issue or part)–
number of the last issue or part (date of the last issue or part)
. — Number of the first issue or part (date of the first issue or part)–
. — –number of the last issue or part (date of the last issue or part)
. — Number of the first issue or part–number of the last issue or part =
other number of the first issue or part–other number of the last
issue or part
. — Number of the first issue or part–number of the last issue or part ;
number of the first issue or part using a new sequence of
numbering–number of its last issue or part
. — Number of the first issue or part–number of the last issue or part ;
statement of the new sequence, number of its first issue or part–
number of its last issue or part

Prescribed source
The resource itself. Information taken from a source other than one of the prescribed
sources is given in square brackets if it is recorded in this area.

3.3.1 Structure of the numbering area

The numbering area consists of the numeric designation and/or the chronological
designation of the first issue or part, followed by a hyphen. If the serial is complete, this
is followed by the numeric designation and/or the chronological designation of the last
issue of part. The chronological designation is enclosed in parentheses when a numeric
designation is also given; otherwise, the chronological designation is given without
parentheses.

3.3.2 Numeric designation

A numeric designation is given as it appears, except that arabic numerals are given in
place of other numerals or spelled-out numbers and multiple levels of numbering are
given in a hierarchical order. A numeric designation may include alphabetic or other
characters as well as numbers. Words in the designation may be abbreviated.
Examples
. — Bd. 1–
. — Vol. 1, no. 1–
. — Bd. 1–Bd. 70
. — 1号–
. — 제1호–
3.3.3 Chronological designation
A chronological designation is given as it appears. Words in the designation may be
abbreviated.
Examples
. — 15 Jan. 1970–
. — Mai 1972–
. — 1925–
118
ISBD 2011 3.3.4.4

. — 1916 ed.–
. — 2e trimestre 1973–
. — 1980/1981–
. — 1936–1965

3.3.4 Transcription
3.3.4.1 If the numbering of the issues or parts of a serial consists of both a numeric
and a chronological designation, both designations are recorded. The chronological
designation is given after the numeric designation, enclosed in parentheses.
Examples
. — Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1971)–
. — Vol. 1 (1960)–
. — 1号 (昭和21年1月)–
. — 제1권 제1호 (1980년 1월)–
3.3.4.2 If a serial has ceased publication, the numbering of the last issue or part is
given following the numbering of the first issue or part.
Examples
. — Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1971)–vol. 5, no. 12 (Dec. 1975)
. — 1971, no. 1 (Jan. 1971)–1975, no. 12 (Dec. 1975)
. — Bd. 5 (1957/63)–Bd. 6 (1964/70)
. — 1巻1号 (大正8年4月)–36巻2号 (昭和30年2月)
. — 1호 (1988년 7월)–30호 (1990년 12월)
3.3.4.3 If the designation includes more than one number, month, year, etc.,
separated by a hyphen, a slash is used in place of the hyphen to avoid confusion with the
hyphen that separates the designations of the first and last issues.
Examples
. — No. 1/2–
Editorial comment: Designation appears on issue as: Number 1–2.
. — 1999/2000–
Editorial comment: Designation appears on issue as: 1999–2000.
. — Aug./Sept. 1970–
Editorial comment: Designation appears on issue as: August–September
1970.
3.3.4.4 Incomplete, inaccurate, or misspelled data are completed or corrected by
inserting the missing information or by giving the correct version, enclosed in square
brackets.
Examples
. — [19]76–
. — Vol. 1 ([19]83)–
. — 1986 [i.e. 1968]–
. — Vol. 20 [i.e. 21] (1846)–

119
3 ISBD 2011

. — [19]85, 1–[19]93, 3
3.3.4.5 If the numbering consists of a number that is a division of the date, the
number is generally given after the date.
Examples
. — 1971, no. 1 (Jan. 1971)–
. — 1967, no. 1–
. — [19]85, 1–
Editorial comment: Numbering appears on issue as 1-85.
3.3.4.6 Dates not of the Gregorian calendar are recorded as given on the source of
information. The equivalent dates of the Gregorian calendar are added in square brackets
if they do not appear on the resource.
Examples
. — 1353 [1979]–
. — No 1 (22 haha 85 E.P. [27 oct. 1957])–
. — No 1 (3 niv. an 6 [23 déc. 1797])–
. — No 1 (15 clinamen 77 E.P. [6 avr. 1950])–no 28 (1er absolu 85 E.P. [8
sept. 1957])
3.3.4.7 If a serial is a continuation of one or more other serials (see A.2.6), the
numeric and/or chronological designation given is that of the first issue or part of the new
serial.
Examples
. — Bd. 5 (1957/63)–
. — 6 (1963)–
3.3.4.8 If a serial has ceased and the number and/or date of the first issue or part is
not known, only the number and/or date of the last issue or part is given.
Example
. — –årg. 38, n:r 4 (26. mars 1892)
3.3.4.9 If a serial has ceased after one issue, the numbering of the issue is given
without a hyphen.
Example
. — Vol. 1, pt. 1 (Dec. 1989)
3.3.4.10 If the first issue or part of a serial is available but lacks any numbering, and
subsequent issues or parts define a designation pattern, numbering is supplied for the first
issue or part based on that pattern. If information about designations of subsequent issues
or parts is not available, [No. 1]- (or its equivalent in the language of the title proper) or a
chronological designation for the first issue or part is given as appropriate.
Examples
. — [Pt. 1]–
Editorial comment: Subsequent issues numbered Part 2, Part 3, etc.
. — [No. 1]–

120
ISBD 2011 3.3.7

. — [1968]–
Editorial comment: An annual report for which a chronological designation is
more appropriate.
. — [第1号]–
. — [1호]–

3.3.5 Parallel numbering system

If there are designations in more than one language or script on the issue or part, the
designation appearing in the language and script of the title proper is given; if this
criterion does not apply, the first is given. The parallel designations may also be given.
Examples
. — Vol. 20–
or
. — Vol. 20– = T. 20– = Bd. 20–
. — 1976, broj 1 (1 siecenj = 1 jan.)–

3.3.6 Alternative numbering system

If the numbering system on the source contains more than one system of numeric
designations or contains chronological designations in different calendars, all the
designations are given in area 3.
Examples
. — Bd. 1, Nr. 1 (Frühling 1970)– = Nr. 1–
. — Bd. 1, Nr. 1 (Frühling 1970)–Bd. 6, Nr. 3 (Winter 1975) = Nr. 1–Nr.
24
. — Vol. 6, no. 2– = Vol. 13, no. 3 (Mar. 1969)–
Editorial comment: Each issue continues the numbering of the two
predecessor titles.
. — No 1 (13 sept. 1797 = 27 fruct. an 7)–
. — 11巻 1号 (1958)– = 101号 (1958)–
. — 17권 6호 (1989)– = 130호 (1989)–
. — No 188 (22 oct. 1796 = 1er brum. an 5)–no 500 (4 sept. 1797 = 18
fruct. an 5)

3.3.7 New sequence of numbering

If a serial adopts a new sequence of numbering but a new description is not required, the
numbering of the first sequence is given followed by the numbering of the new sequence.
Normally, the serial carries a designation, such as new series, second series, etc., to
indicate that a new sequence of numbering, not a new serial, is intended. The designation
of the new sequence, if any, is given, followed by a comma and its numbering.
Examples
. — Bd. 1 (1962)–Bd. 6 (1967) ; n.F., Bd. 1 (1968)–
. — Vol. 1, no. 1 (Jan. 1941)–vol. 4, no. 5 (May 1950) ; n.s., vol. 1, no.
1 (June 1950)–vol. 2, no. 12 (May 1952)

121
3 ISBD 2011

. — Vol. 1, no. 1 (Mar. 1950)–vol. 4, no. 5 (Aug. 1954) ; Dec. 1954–

. — Vol. 1 (1921)–vol. 19 (1939) ; n.s., vol. 1 (1946)–vol. 30 (1975) ;
vol. 50 (1976)–
. — Vol. 1, no. 1 (Nov. 23, 1936)–vol. 73, no. 25 (Dec. 29, 1972) ; vol.
1, no. 1 (Oct. 1978)–
. — 31 Mar. 1961–26 Sept. 1969 ; year 1, no. 1 (1 Oct. 1969)–
. — T. 12, 40/41 (jan./juil. 1962)–t. 27, 103 (déc. 1977) ; nuova serie, 1/2
(sett. 1978)–
. — 1–v. 101 ; new ser., v. 1–

122
ISBD 2011 4

4 PUBLICATION, PRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION, ETC., AREA

Introductory note
The publication, production, distribution, etc., area includes the place of publication,
production and/or distribution; the name of publisher, producer, and/or distributor; the
date of publication, production, and/or distribution; the place of printing or manufacture;
the name of printer or manufacturer; and the date of printing or manufacture. The
elements are defined in the glossary.
The phrase publication, production, distribution, etc. is intended to cover all types of
publication, production, distribution, issuing and release activities connected with
resources. Area 4 is also used to record data connected with the physical manufacture of
the resource, but these are distinguished from the publication, production, distribution,
etc., activities, although both may be executed by the same person or body. When a
person or body combines the activities of publication, production, distribution, etc., with
those of physical manufacture or when it is uncertain whether the person or body is
responsible for publication, production, distribution, etc., or for physical manufacture
alone, the statement is treated as one relating to publication, production, distribution, etc.
The modern functions of publisher, bookseller, printer and distributor are often
undifferentiated in older monographic resources. Unless otherwise indicated, the terms
place of publication, production, and/or distribution and name of publisher, producer
and/or distributor are used to refer to the location and name of a publisher, bookseller,
printer or distributor.

Contents
4.1 Place of publication, production and/or distribution
4.2 Name of publisher, producer and/or distributor
4.3 Date of publication, production and/or distribution
4.4 Place of printing or manufacture
4.5 Name of printer or manufacturer
4.6 Date of printing or manufacture

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. A second or subsequent place is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ), unless a
linking word or phrase is given.
C. Each name is preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ) unless in the case of second or
subsequent publishers, producers, distributors, etc., a linking word or phrase is given.
D. Parallel information is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
E. The date is preceded by a comma, space (, ).
F. A hyphen (-) after the date of publication of the first issue or part or the first iteration of an
integrating resource links this date to the date of the last issue or part or the last iteration of
the resource, or indicates that the resource is continuing.
G. The place of printing or manufacture, name of the printer or manufacturer and date of
printing or manufacture (for older monographic resources, when recorded as a statement

123
4 ISBD 2011

distinct from the publishing statement) are enclosed in one pair of parentheses ( ( ) ).
Within the parentheses the same punctuation is used as in B, C and E.
Elements in this area can be repeated in any pattern that is appropriate to the resource
being described.
Punctuation patterns
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or producer,
date
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or
producer ; place of publication or production : name of publisher or
producer, date
. — Place of publication or production ; place of publication or
production : name of publisher or producer, date (place of printing
or manufacture : name of printer or manufacturer, date)
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or producer,
date ; place of distribution : name of distributor, date
. — Place of publication or production ; place of publication or
production : name of publisher or producer, date (place of printing
or manufacture ; place of printing or manufacture : name of printer
or manufacturer, date)
. — Place of publication or production = parallel statement of place of
publication or production : name of publisher or producer, date
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or producer =
parallel statement of place of publication or production : parallel
statement of name of publisher or producer, date
. — Place of distribution : name of distributor, date (place of printing or
manufacture : name of printer or manufacturer, date)
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or producer,
date (place of printing or manufacture : name of printer or
manufacturer)
. — Place of publication or production : name of publisher or
producer : name of publisher or producer, date
. — Place of distribution : name of distributor, date
. — Place of publication : name of publisher ; place of production :
name of producer, date ; place of distribution : name of distributor,
date

Prescribed sources
Information taken from a source other than one of the following prescribed sources is
given in square brackets if it is recorded in this area. However, if the different elements
of this area are present on different sources of information, it may be necessary to
combine these elements from the different sources.
The preferred order of sources is:

For printed textual and notated music resources:

Title page, first page of music, other preliminaries, cover, colophon, the
rest of the resource.

124
ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

Title page, title-page substitute, colophon

For cartographic resources, multimedia resources, sound

recordings, videorecordings, still and moving images, and
electronic resources:
The resource itself, container, accompanying material.

125
ISBD 2011 4.1.3

4.1 Place of publication, production and/or distribution

Mandatory
4.1.1 The place of publication, production and/or distribution is the name of the
place associated on the prescribed source of information with the name of the publisher,
producer or distributor (see 4.2). If no publisher, producer or distributor is named, it is
the place from which the resource was issued or distributed.
Examples
. — London
. — Baltimore
. — Mосқва
4.1.2 If the information appearing on the prescribed source of information is
known to be incorrect, a correction may be supplied in square brackets (see A.8) and/or
an explanation given in area 7 (see 7.4.1).
Examples
. — Dublin
Note: Known to be published in Belfast
. — Paris [i.e. Leiden]
Editorial comment: Known to have been published in Leiden.

. — London [i.e. Agen]

Note: Published at Agen
or
. — London
Note: Published at Agen

. — Tripilo [i.e. Dublin]

Note: The place of publication is fictitious; identified by the Huntington
Library as Dublin
or
. — Tripilo
Note: The place of publication is fictitious; identified by the Huntington
Library as Dublin
. — Zippelzerbst gedruckt durch Flachslanden [i.e. Leipzig : Johann
Heinrich Ellinger]
Note: The place and publisher are fictitious; publisher identified by the
publisher’s device (VD17 23:321271P)
4.1.3 When more than one place is associated with the name of a single
publisher, producer or distributor, the place made more prominent by typography or, if
there is no typographical distinction, the place name that appears first is given. If there is
no typographical distinction and the places do not appear in sequence, the place
considered most important to users of the catalogue is given.

For older monographic resources:

When there are two or more places of publication, production and/or
distribution, and when the second and subsequent places are

127
4 ISBD 2011

linguistically separate from the name of the publisher, producer and/or

distributor, all are recorded in the order indicated by the sequence in
which they appear on the prescribed source.
Examples
. — London ; York
. — A Lausanne & se trouve à Paris
4.1.4 A second or subsequent place may be given.
Examples
. — London ; Chicago
. — Köln ; Paris
. — København ; Oslo
. — Barcelona ; Lisbon
. — Berlin ; Köln ; Frankfurt am Main
4.1.5 When a second or subsequent place is omitted, the omission may be
indicated by etc. or its equivalent in another script, enclosed in square brackets (see also
4.2.4).
Examples
. — Wien [etc.]
. — Москва [и др.]
. — London ; New York ; Paris [etc.]
. — Toronto [etc.]
4.1.6 When the names of more than one publisher or producer are given (see
4.2.3), the place of publication or production for each publisher or producer is given
immediately before the name, unless it is the same as that of the first-named publisher or
producer.
Examples
. — New York : Columbia University ; Boston : Computer Research
Institute
. — Paris : Gallimard : Julliard
4.1.7 When both a publisher or producer and a distributor are given (see 4.2.5),
the place of distribution is given if it differs from the place of publication or production.
Examples
. — Washington, D.C. : Smithsonian Institution ; New York : distributed
by W.W. Norton
. — Washington, D.C. : U.S. Bureau of the Census ; Rosslyn, Va. :
distributed by DUALabs
. — Boulder : East European Monographs ; New York : Columbia
University Press [distributor]
4.1.8 The place of publication, production and/or distribution is given in the
orthographic form and grammatical case in which it appears on the resource.

128
ISBD 2011 4.1.8

Examples
. — V Praze
. — Frankfurt am Main
. — Pestini
. — Torino

For older monographic resources:

Prepositions before the name of the place of publication, production
and/or distribution are included, as are any accompanying words or
phrases associated with the name of the place and not linguistically
linked to the name, address or sign of the publisher, printer, etc. Words
or phrases that are so linked are transcribed with the name of the
publisher, producer and/or distributor (see 4.2.6).
Examples
. — A Lyon
. — In London
. — Imprinted at London
. — Impressum ... Venetiis
. — Nouvelleme[n]t i[m]primee a Paris
. — London printed
Editorial comment: Publication, production, distribution, etc.,
statement reads “London printed, in the year 1742”.
When the name of the place of publication, production and/or
distribution is taken from within the name of the publisher, producer
and/or distributor, it is enclosed in square brackets.
The place or places of publication, production and/or distribution
appearing with the name of a publisher, producer and/or distributor are
transcribed as part of the name of the publisher, producer and/or
distributor and are also given, enclosed in square brackets, as the place
or places of publication, production and/or distribution.
Examples
. — [London] : sold by T. Richardson in London
. — [Bresslaw] : bey Caspar Closemann, Buchhändlern
in Bresslaw zubefinden
. — [London] : Philadelphia printed, London reprinted for
C. Dilly
When the name of the place appears in the text of both statements it is
recorded in both places.
Example
. — In Fiorenza : stampato in Fiorenza appresso
Lorenzo Torrentino
Note: Statement of printing taken from the colophon

129
4 ISBD 2011

When an address or sign of the publisher, printer, etc., is given on the

resource, but without the name of the town or district, the name of the
town is supplied enclosed in square brackets as the place of publication,
production and/or distribution, and the address or sign is included with
or as the name of publisher, producer and/or distributor.
Examples
. — [London]
Editorial comment: Publication statement reads: J. Pitts,
Printer and Toy Warehouse, 6 Great St. Andrew Street, 7
Dials.
. — [Paris]
Editorial comment: Publication statement reads: à l'enseigne
de l'éléphant (the trade sign of a Paris printer).
. — [London]
Editorial comment: Publication statement reads: sold in St.
Paul's Churchyard.
When the place of publication, production and/or distribution appears
only as part of another area and is recorded there, or is taken or inferred
from the name of publisher, producer and/or distributor, or is known
only from information outside the prescribed sources of information for
this area (including sources outside the resource), it is given enclosed in
square brackets and in a standardized form chosen by the cataloguing
agency. An explanatory note may be given in area 7.
Examples
. — [Köln]
Editorial comment: Standardized form of name chosen by a
cataloguing agency in Germany.
. — [London]
Note: Shown in the Stationers’ register as entered to a
London bookseller
. — [Bayreuth] : impensis Orphonatrophei Baruthini,
[1738] ([Bayreuth] : typis Friderici Eliae Dietzelii)
. — [Leipzig] : sumptibus Iohannis Fritzschi, bibl. Lips.,
[1674] ([Weissenfels] : literis Johannis Brühlaei,
Gymn. Weissenf. typogr.)
Note: Cf. VD17 14:052745K
. — [Venetiis] : Academia Veneta

4.1.9 Additions to the place of publication, production and/or

distribution
If it is considered necessary for identification, the name of a larger place such as a
country, state, etc., is added to the place of publication, production and/or distribution. It
is preceded by a comma if transcribed from a prescribed source of information or
enclosed in square brackets if taken from another source.
Examples
. — Washington, D.C.
130
ISBD 2011 4.1.11.2

. — Cambridge, Mass.
. — Santiago [Chile]
. — London [Ontario]
. — Cambridge [England]
. — London, Ontario
. — New Haven [Connecticut]
. — 府中 [東京]
. — 고성군[강원도]
If it is considered necessary for identification, the full address of the publisher, producer
or distributor is added to the place name. It is enclosed in parentheses if transcribed from
a prescribed source of information or in square brackets if transcribed from another
source. (See also 4.2.8 for addresses given as part of the identification of the publisher or
printer.)
Examples
. — London [37 Pond Street, N.W.3]
. — St-Bruno-de-Montarville, Québec (1985 La Duchesse)
. — Vancouver (571 Howe Street)
. — [England] : Glyndebourne Festival Opera, 1977 ; New York (P.O.
Box 153, Ansonia Station, New York, N.Y. 10032) : [distributed by]
Video Arts International, 1985
Editorial comment: The place where the office of the Glyndebourne Festival
Opera is located is not known (see 4.1.12).
. — Cupertino, CA (10648 Gascoigne Dr., Cupertino 95014)
. — Paris (66, avenue de Versailles, 75016)
4.1.10 If it is considered necessary for identification, an alternative or corrected
version of the place name is supplied (see A.8), enclosed in square brackets. The
abbreviation i.e. is used for corrections (see 4.1.2).
Examples
. — Christiania [Oslo]
. — Lerpwl [Liverpool]
. — Leningrad [St. Petersburg]
. — Lodnon [i.e. London]
. — Florentiæ [Florence]
. — 江府 [江戸]
. — 황셩 [서울]

4.1.11 Parallel statement of place of publication

4.1.11.1 When the name of the place of publication, production and/or distribution
appears on the prescribed source of information in more than one language or script, the
name in the language and script of the title proper is given. If this criterion does not
apply, the form of name made prominent by typography or, if there is no typographical
distinction, the form of name that appears first, is given.

131
4 ISBD 2011

4.1.11.2 Parallel statements may be given.

Examples
. — Genf = Genève
. — Bern = Berne
. — Nueva York = New York

For older monographic resources:

The form of name that appears first is given, followed by the other
forms of name in the order indicated by the sequence of information on
the prescribed source.
4.1.12 When a place of publication, production and/or distribution does not appear
anywhere on the prescribed sources of information, the name of the known city or town is
supplied in square brackets. If the city or town is uncertain, or unknown, the name of the
probable city or town followed by a question mark may be supplied in square brackets.
The name of a larger place such as a country, state, etc., may be added. An explanatory
note may be given in area 7.
Examples
. — [Hamburg?]
. — [Evry]
. — [Paris]
. — [Prague?]
. — [Amsterdam?]
. — [Fawsley?]
. — [Portland, Maine?]
. — [大坂?]
. — [서울]
4.1.13 When the name of a city or town cannot be determined, the name of the
state, province or country is given, according to the same stipulations as are applicable to
the names of cities or towns.
Examples
. — Canada
Editorial comment: Known as place of publication; appears on prescribed
source.
. — [Aragon]
Editorial comment: Known as place of publication; appears outside
prescribed source.
. — [Guatemala?]
Editorial comment: Probable, but uncertain, as place of publication.
4.1.14 When no place can be determined, the abbreviation s.l. (sine loco) or its
equivalent in another script is supplied, enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
. — [S.l.]

132
ISBD 2011

. — [Б.м.]
. — [出版地不详]
. — [出版地不明]
. — [발행지불명]

4.1.15 Change of place of publication, production and/or distribution

For older monographic resources:

If a single bibliographic description is being created for a resource that
is either issued in more than one physical part and the place of
publication, production and/or distribution of each part changes during
the course of publication, or the resource contains individual title pages
with places of publication, production and/or distribution that differ
from that pertaining to the whole resource, the place of publication,
production and/or distribution from the first or earliest part is
transcribed and the places of publication, production and/or distribution
of the other part or parts are given in area 7. (See also 4.2.13.)
Example
. — Stuttgart ; Tübingen
Note: Vols. 33-40 have variant place of publication
statement: Stuttgart ; Augsburg

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

If the place of publication, production and/or distribution changes on
subsequent issues or parts, the later place is given in area 7 (see 7.4.2) if
it is necessary for identification or otherwise considered important to
users of the catalogue.

For integrating resources:

If the place of publication, production and/or distribution changes on
subsequent iterations, the description is changed. The earlier place is
given in area 7 (see 7.4.2) if it is necessary for identification or
otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.

133
ISBD 2011 4.2.3

4.2 Name of publisher, producer and/or distributor

Mandatory
4.2.1 The name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor corresponds to the
person or corporate body that effects the publication, production and/or distribution or
release activities for the resource.
A label name appearing in conjunction with the name of a publisher or production
company on resources such as sound discs, cassettes, etc., is not transcribed in the
publication, production, distribution, etc., area. It may be given in the series area if the
label name is considered to be a series title (see area 6), or in the resource identifier and
terms of availability area, if the name is accompanied by a catalogue number (see 8.1.4).

For older monographic resources:

This element includes the names of one or more publishers, distributors,
booksellers, and (if included on a prescribed source of information for
this element) the printers of the resource, together with associated
information concerning places of activity and statements of printing and
reprinting.
4.2.2 The name of the publisher or producer is given directly after the place of
publication or production associated with it on the prescribed source of information.
Examples
. — London : Methuen
. — London : Library Association
. — Roazhon [Rennes] : Bremañ
. — Ташкент : Фан
. — [London] : Eccles Centre for American Studies
. — 東京 : 丸善
. — 서울 : 종로서적
4.2.3 When more than one publisher or producer is named on the prescribed
source of information, the name made more prominent by typography or, if there is no
typographical distinction, the name that appears first is given. If there is no typographical
distinction and the names do not appear in sequence, the name considered most important
to users of the catalogue is given.
Second and subsequent names of publishers or producers may be given.
Examples
. — London : The Times ; Edinburgh : John Bartholomew & Son
. — Paris : Institut géographique national ; Clermont-Ferrand : Éd.
Parc des Volcans
. — Paris : le Centurion : Desclée De Brouwer : Éd. du Cerf
. — London : National Savings Committee ; Edinburgh : National
Savings Committee for Scotland
. — Waterloo [Ontario] : Leisure Studies Data Inc. ; Chicago : National
Opinion Research Center

135
4 ISBD 2011

. — Paris : Éd. Est-Ouest internationales : Éd. Unesco

. — Madrid : Debate ; Barcelona : Círculo de Lectores
. — [México, D.F.] : Alfaomega ; León : Everest
. — Chicago : University of Chicago Press ; Milano : Ricordi

For older monographic resources:

When a resource has more than one publisher, producer, and/or
distributor in a single source, generally all the names performing any
function are transcribed in the order indicated by the sequence in which
they appear. They are separated with prescribed punctuation only when
they are not linked by connecting words or phrases.
4.2.4 When second or subsequent names of publishers or producers are omitted,
the omission may be indicated by etc. or its equivalent in another script, enclosed in
square brackets (see also 4.1.5).
Examples
: Evans [etc.]
: Payot [etc.]
: The Times [etc.]
: Evaporated Milk Association [etc.]
: American Association of Individual Investors [etc.]

For older monographic resources:

If the names are considered too numerous, the statement may be
shortened by omitting all or some of the names after the first. In such
cases, the mark of omission is used and after it, a phrase is supplied
enclosed in square brackets to convey the extent of the omission. The
number of omitted publishers, producers, and/or distributors, etc., is
included, and the number of omitted places (if more than one) are
included in the supplied phrase (see also 4.2.6). Alternatively, the
information of what is omitted is given in area 7.
Examples
: chez Claude Barbin ... Jean Boudot ... George & Louis
Josse
Editorial comment: The omissions are of the booksellers'
addresses.
: printed for F.C. and J. Rivington, Otridge and Son, J.
Nichols and Co. ... [and 26 others]
or
: printed for F.C. and J. Rivington, Otridge and Son, J.
Nichols and Co. …
Note: 26 other publishers mentioned in the imprint
: printed for James, John and Paul Knapton ... T. Becket
... T. Davies ... W. Jackson in Oxford, and A. Kincaid,
and Company, in Edinburgh
Editorial comment: The omissions are of the booksellers'
addresses.
136
ISBD 2011 4.2.6

: printed and sold by J. Newbery and C. Micklewright,

also by Mess. Ware, Birt, Astley, Austen, Robinson,
Dodsley, and Needham, in London … [and 8 others
in 8 places]
or
: printed and sold by J. Newbery and C. Micklewright,
also by Mess. Ware, Birt, Astley, Austen, Robinson,
Dodsley, and Needham, in London …
Note: Eight other publishers and places mentioned in the
imprint
4.2.5 Words or phrases indicating the function (other than solely publishing)
performed by the person or body are given. If only the distributor is named, this function
must be given. When the names of both a publisher or producer and a distributor appear
on a prescribed source of information, the name of the distributor may be given. When
the name of the distributor appears on any other source, it may be given in area 7 (see
7.4.1).
Examples
: published for the Social Science Research Council by Heinemann
: printed for the CLA by Morriss Print. Co.
: Boyars : distributed by Calder and Boyars
: diffusion A. Lecot
: to be sold by Jas. Gardner
: distributor G. Schirmer
: released by Beaux Arts Co.
: produced for Bairnswear
: presented by Shell Education Service
: distributed by Harvard University Press
: privately printed for the Parish Register Section
If the function performed by the distributor is not explicitly stated, a brief word or phrase
indicating the nature of the activity may be added, enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
: Vacation Work [distributor]
: Technical and Scientific Films : Film Producers Guild [distributor]
4.2.6 The name of a publisher, producer or distributor may be given in a
shortened form, provided it can be understood and identified without ambiguity.
Examples
: Bietti
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as Casa editrice Bietti.
: Художественная литература
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as Государственое
издательство Художественная литература.
: H.M. Gousha
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as The H.M. Gousha Company.

137
4 ISBD 2011

: M. Eschig
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as Editions Max Eschig et Cie.
: Readex
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as Readex Microprint
Corporation.
: Addison-Wesley
Editorial comment: Publisher's name appears as Addison-Wesley Publishing
Company.
but not
: The Society
Editorial comment: Publisher’s name appears as American Chemical Society.

For older monographic resources:

The names of publishers, printers, distributors, etc., are transcribed in
the form in which they appear on the prescribed source of information
with necessary preceding words and phrases (see also 4.1.8).
Examples
: chez Augustin Courbé
: en casa de Guillielmo Roville
: na officina de Antonio de Sousa da Sylva
: par Ian de Tournes pour Antoine Vincent
: à l'enseigne de l'éléphant
: de l'imprimerie de Balleu, se trouve chez Marcilly [et
chez] les marchands de nouveautés
Note: The two distributor statements are bracketed
together following "chez"
: printed for J. Warner
: printed for the editor, and sold by him
: by the widowe of Jhon Mommart
: printed for the executors of the late widow Kelly
Qualifications such as printer to the King and addresses may be
omitted. However, addresses are given when they aid in identifying,
dating or localizing the resource.
Example
. — A Rouen : chez Jean Oursel, rue Ecuyere, vis-à-vis
la rue du Petit-Puits, à l’Imprimerie du Levant
Insignificant information in the middle or at the end of the statement of
publication, production, distribution, etc., may be omitted. Such
omissions are indicated by the mark of omission.
4.2.7 When the name of the publisher, producer or distributor appears in full in
area 1, either the full form may be repeated in area 4, or an abbreviated form may be
given there. If a resource is privately printed, the person or body issuing the resource,
whether a commercial publisher, a private press, or a person or body for whom the
resource was printed, is given as the publisher.

138
ISBD 2011 4.2.7

Examples
. — London : H. Mackeson
Statement of responsibility: by Henry Clive Mackeson
. — [Paris] : CEDOCAR
Statement of responsibility: Centre de documentation de l'armement
. — Versailles : C.N.R.A.
Title proper: Liste des périodiques reçus au Centre national des
recherches agronomiques
. — Kürten : Stockhausen
Statement of responsibility: Karlheinz Stockhausen
. — Cleveland : Cleveland Health Museum
Statement of responsibility: Cleveland Health Museum
. — Québec : O.L.F.
Statement of responsibility: Office de la langue française, Centre de
terminologie
. — Malden, MA : National Chemical Data Board
Statement of responsibility: National Chemical Data Board
. — [Philadelphia] : Institute for Scientific Information
Statement of responsibility: Institute for Scientific Information
. — [Seattle?] : G.B. Schrier
Statement of responsibility: by Gary B. Schrier
Note: “Privately printed limited edition”
. — Bel Air, Md. : Jack L. Shagena
Statement of responsibility: Jack L. Shagena
Note: “Privately printed by the author”

For older monographic resources:

When the name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor appears
only in another area and is recorded there, or is known from
information outside the prescribed sources of information for this
element (including outside the resource), it is given in the shortest
convenient form enclosed in square brackets. When the information is
taken from a source other than the title page, this source is recorded in
area 7.
Examples
. — [Paris] : [Philippe Pigouchet pour Symon Vostre],
[25 avril 1500]
Editorial comment: Pigouchet's device is on the title page.
The title reads: Ces presentes heures a lusaige du Mans
fure[n]t acheuees lan Mil. cincq ce[n]s le xxv jour dapuril
pour Symon Vostre ...
. — [London] : [Francis Barlow], 1605
Editorial comment: End of title reads: illustrated with ...
sculptures by Francis Barlow and are to be sold at his house.
The name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor is neither
abridged because it repeats information nor expanded because it omits
information relating to an author as publisher.

139
4 ISBD 2011

Example
. — Trykt udi London : af Frys, Couchman og Collier
paa Forfatterens egen Bekostning
Editorial comment: Printed by Frys, Couchman and Collier at
the author’s own cost; author is Ernst Wolff.

4.2.8 Incomplete name of publisher or producer

When only the address, sign, or initials of the publisher, producer and/or distributor
appears in lieu of the name, the address, sign, or initials are transcribed as the name of
publisher, producer, and/or distributor. If the name of the publisher, producer and/or
distributor can be identified, this name is supplied enclosed in square brackets by filling
in the name after the initials or by adding the name before or after the address or sign, as
appropriate. An explanatory note is given in area 7.
Examples
: [Jean-Pierre Costard] Rue Saint-Jean-de-Beauvais, la premiere porte
cochere au dessus du College
Note: Costard named as publisher in: La France littéraire / J.M.
Quérard
: prostant in Coemeterio D. Pauli [apud Abelem Swalle]
Note: Publisher named on title page verso
: printed and sold [by John Evans] at No. 41, Long-Lane
Note: John Evans active at this address between 1791 and 1795
: printed by H[umphrey]. L[ownes]. for George Lathum at the Bishops
head in Pauls Church-yard
Note: Printer’s name according to ESTC S126474

4.2.9 Name of publisher, producer and/or distributor taken from

source outside the prescribed sources of information
When the name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor is known from information
outside the prescribed sources of information (including sources outside the resource), it
is given in square brackets and in a form appropriate to the date, script and language of
the resource. The source of the information is recorded in area 7.
Example
: [Paul Linley and John Flaskett]
Note: Publisher taken from Short Title Catalogue
When the name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor is uncertain or unknown, the
name of a probable publisher or producer (or the names of a number of alternative
publishers or producers) may be supplied, followed by a question mark and enclosed in
square brackets.
Example
: [John Smith?]

For older monographic resources:

An explanatory note of the supplied information is given in area 7.

140
ISBD 2011 4.2.11

Example
: printed for the authors vse [by Nicholas Okes?]
Note: Printer conjectured by Short title catalogue (2nd
ed.)

4.2.10 Parallel name of publisher, producer and/or distributor

4.2.10.1 When the name of a publisher, producer and/or distributor appears on the
prescribed source of information in more than one language or script, the form of name in
the language and script of the title proper is given. If this criterion does not apply, the
form of name made more prominent by typography or, if there is no typographical
distinction, the form of name that appears first is given.

For older monographic resources:

The form of name that appears first is given, followed by the other
forms of name in the order indicated by the sequence of information on
the source.
Example
: Wytisstené v Kryssstoffa Baumana, w Drazdanech =
Gedruckt by Christoph Baumann zu Dreßden
4.2.10.2 Parallel statements may be given.
Examples
: Galerie nationale du Canada pour la Corporation des musées
nationaux du Canada = National Gallery of Canada for the
Corporation of the National Museums of Canada
: Bundeskanzlei = Chancellerie fédérale
. — Kraków : Polskie wydawnictwo muzyczne = Krakau : Polnischer
Musikverlag
. — Bruxelles : Parlement européen, Direction générale des études =
Brussels : European Parliament, Directorate General for Research

4.2.11 Printer as substitute for name of publisher, etc.

The name of the printer or manufacturer is not given as a substitute for the name of an
unknown publisher, producer or distributor, except for older monographic resources.
However, when a person or corporate body combines the activities of printing or
manufacturing and publication, production or distribution, or when the responsibility is
uncertain, a named printer or manufacturer is assumed to be also the publisher or
producer.
Examples
: Imprimerie nationale
: Institut géographique national
Editorial comment: The institute is both a publisher and a manufacturer.

141
4 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

When the name and/or address of the printer appears on a prescribed
source of information with or without other names of publishers,
printers, distributors, etc., it is given as, or as part of, the name of the
publisher, printer, distributor, etc.
Examples
: printed and are to be sold by Randal Taylor
: printed by J. and H. Hughs ... and sold by T. Payne
: J. Grundy, printer
: printed and sold at 60, Old Street
: tryckt hos Lars Salvius
: printed, and re-printed by E. Waters
: de l'imprimerie de J. Barbou
: typis exscripsit Joachimus Redanus
In some cases the name and/or address of the printer appears on a
prescribed source of information without the name, address or sign of
the publisher or bookseller. If the latter is known, it is recorded after
the name and/or address of the printer following a space, colon, space
and enclosed in square brackets.
Example
: acheuee de imprimer par maistre Nicole de la Barre :
[chez Jean Petit]
Note: Statement of printing taken from colophon; the
last leaf bears the device of Jean Petit, the
bookseller
When the name of the publisher, distributor or bookseller is unknown,
but the name of the printer is known from information outside the
prescribed sources of information for this area (including sources
outside the resource) it is given enclosed in square brackets. The source
of the information is recorded in area 7.
Examples
. — [East Molesey] : [Robert Waldegrave]
Note: Statement of publication from Short title catalogue
(2nd ed.).
. — [Genève] : [Cramer]
Note: Statement of publication from Bibliothèque
nationale catalogue

4.2.12 Name of publisher unknown

When no name can be given as that of the publisher, producer or distributor, the
abbreviation s.n. (sine nomine) or its equivalent in another script is supplied, enclosed in
square brackets.
Examples
: [s.n.]
142
ISBD 2011

: [б.и.]
: [出版者不详]
: [出版者不明]
: [발행처불명]

4.2.13 Change of name of publisher, producer and/or distributor

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

If changes occur in the name of the publisher, producer and/or
distributor on subsequent issues or parts, the name of the later
publisher, producer and/or distributor is given in area 7 (see 7.4.2) if it
is necessary for identification or otherwise considered important to
users of the catalogue.

For integrating resources:

If changes occur in the name of the publisher, producer and/or
distributor on subsequent iterations, the description is changed to reflect
the latest iteration. The earlier name or names are given in area 7 (see
7.4.2) if they are necessary for identification or otherwise considered
important to users of the catalogue.

143
ISBD 2011 4.3.4

4.3 Date of publication, production and/or distribution

Mandatory
4.3.1 The date or dates of publication, production or distribution of the resource
are given.
Examples
, 1979
, 2003-
Editorial comment: Beginning publication date for online version of Croatica
chemica acta, which includes issues from vol. 69, no. 1 (1996).
4.3.2 When the same date applies to both publication or production and
distribution or to more than one publisher or producer and distributor, it is given after the
last name or statement of function.
Examples
. — New York : Sterling [etc.] ; London : distributed by Ward Lock,
1977
4.3.3 If the date of publication or production differs from the date of distribution,
each date is given after the appropriate name or statement of function.
Examples
. — London : Educational Records, 1973 ; New York : Edcorp
[distributor], 1975
. — Seattle, Wash. : Laser Learning Technologies, 1993 ; Hardwick,
Vt. : Optical Transfer [distributor], 1995
4.3.4 Dates of the Gregorian calendar are given in arabic numerals. Dates not of
the Gregorian calendar are given as they appear on the resource with the equivalent date
of the Gregorian calendar added in square brackets when it can be established.
Examples
, 1969
, 5730 [1969 or 1970]
Editorial comment: Jewish calendar.
, 1398 [1977 or 1978]
Editorial comment: Hijri (Islamic) calendar.
, an IX [1801]
Editorial comment: French Revolutionary calendar.
, 光緒8 [1882]
Editorial comment: Chinese regnal year calendar.
, 단기4289 [1956]
Editorial comment: Korean calendar.
When dates in different calendars appear on a resource, all dates are given, separated by a
space, equals sign, space.
Example
, an III = 1795

145
4 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

Dates of publication, printing, etc., are transcribed as they appear on the
resource, including the day and month, if present. Words and phrases
that are grammatically linked to the date, such as anno and printed in
the year, are transcribed as part of the date element.
Examples
, 7 July 1766
, printed in the year 1742
Editorial comment: Imprint reads: London, printed in the year
1742.
If the date forms part of the place or publisher statement, it is recorded
with the statement and also given as the date of publication, enclosed in
square brackets. When the date does not appear in the publication,
production, distribution, etc., area, but has been given in area 1 or area
2, the date is also given as the date of publication, enclosed in square
brackets.
Examples
, [1744]
Editorial comment: Publication statement reads: Printed in
the year M.DCC.XLIV. and sold at the pamphlet-shops in
London and Westminster.
, [1795?]
Editorial comment: Title reads: The circular letter, to the
General Baptist churches for the year 1795. By John Marsom,
read, approved, and ordered to be printed, by the General
Assembly.
Days of the month and the names of months that do not appear in the
publication, production, distribution, etc., area but are known as the
date of publication are given together with the year in arabic numerals
and in the language and script chosen by the cataloguing agency. When
the statement of the date of publication is very long, e.g. if it is not
given in numerals, it may be formalized. A note is given in area 7,
stating the source of the date and including a transcription of the
statement, if it is considered important to users of the catalogue.
Example
, [18 May 1507]
Note: Colophon reads: Anno gratiae millesimo
quingentesimo septimo die vero decimoctavo Maij
or
Note: Date from colophon
Capital letters appearing apparently at random on a title page or
colophon may represent a chronogram and should therefore be left in
capital form and not converted to lowercase. Dates taken from a
chronogram are given enclosed in square brackets in arabic numerals.
A note may be given in area 7 explaining the source of the date and
including a transcription of the chronogram.
146
ISBD 2011 4.3.4

Examples
, [1788]
Note: Date given in a chronogram in the title
Editorial comment: Title reads: NoMIna CLerI IVnIorIs
HVngarICI eX benIgno faVore Caesareo regIo In arCe
PosonIensI CoLLoCatI.
, [1694]
Note: Date given in a chronogram in the publication
statement
Editorial comment: Publication statement reads: Hamburgi
Typis Thomæ Rossii. – Anno, quo VIX fas SVperI
qVæCVnqVe MonetIs proDere nos popVLIs! ...
Dates given in roman numerals are transcribed as they appear, omitting
internal spaces.The Gregorian year is supplied in arabic numerals
enclosed in square brackets.
Example
, M.DC.IIII. [1604]
Editorial comment: Imprint date reads: M. DC. IIII.
Dates not of the Gregorian calendar, and statements of the day of
publication or printing in terms other than those of the calendar month,
are given as found on the resource. The equivalent date or dates in
modern chronology are supplied enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
, die visitationis Beatae Virginis Mariae 1497 [2 July
1497]
, die natalis Christi 1498 [25 Dec. 1498]
, 1507 on the feast of Saint Luke [18 Oct. 1507]
Dates of the Christian era based on commencement of the year on both
1 January and another date are given as found, with a slash between the
numerals. The date according to the modern calendar may be added,
enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
, 1690/1
, 1690/1691 [1691]
, 2/13 Sept. 1750
When the year of publication, printing, etc., found on the resource is
based on a calendar year that does not begin 1 January and when the
resource is known to have been published in the following year
according to the present calendar, the later year is added enclosed in
square brackets. Julian calendar dates of the month are not amended.
An explanatory note is given in area 7.

147
4 ISBD 2011

Examples
, id. Mart. 1502 [15 Mar. 1503]
Note: Date according to the Julian calendar corresponds
to 15 March 1503 in the Gregorian calendar
, 1641 [1642]
Note: Year of publication given according to Lady Day
dating
4.3.5 When the date that appears on the resource is known to be incorrect or
appears in an alternative form, it is given as it appears and the corrected or alternative
form is given enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
, 1697 [i.e. 1967]
, 1905 [i.e. 1950]-1970
, 1963 [i.e. 1971]
, 1892 [실은 1982]

For older monographic resources:

If a date from the title page has been transcribed as the date of
publication and evidence for a later date of publication appears in a
source other than the title page, that date is supplied enclosed in square
brackets as a correction and an explanatory note is given in area 7 to
indicate that the correction is a differing date of publication and not the
correction of a typographical error.
Example
, 1786 [i.e. 1788]
Note: Dedication and preface both dated 1788
4.3.6 A copyright date is added to the date of publication, production or
distribution if it is different from the date of publication and is considered important to
users of the catalogue.
Examples
, 1969, cop. 1937
, 1972, cop. 1954
, 1995, © 1993

For older monographic resources:

A privilege or copyright date may be given in area 7 if it is considered
important to users of the catalogue.
Example
, 1720
Note: Privilege statement on page 4 dated 1718
4.3.7 When there is no date of publication, production or distribution on the
resource, the copyright date, legal deposit date, or date of printing or manufacture is
given in its place. The type of date is indicated.
148
ISBD 2011 4.3.8

Examples
, © 1969
, 1981 printing
, 1986 manufacture
, 1960 printing-
Editorial comment: Current continuing resource.
, cop. 1970-
Editorial comment: Current continuing resource.
, 1977 印刷
, 1987 제작
, D.L. 2010

For older monographic resources:

When there is no date of publication in the resource, the date of
granting of a privilege to print, or copyright date, if known, is given in
its place enclosed in square brackets. An explanation is given in area 7.
Example
, [1719?]
Note: Privilege to print granted in 1719, according to
privilege statement on page 4

For sound recordings:

“P” (phonogram) dates are transcribed with the sound recording
copyright symbol (℗) if available or with the letter “P” in either upper
or lower case.
, P 1982
, ℗ 1985-
Editorial comment: Current continuing resource.
, p 1975

For multimedia resources and electronic resources:

When there are multiple copyright dates that apply to various aspects in
the production of the resource (e.g. a separate copyright date for the
written program, sound production, graphics, and documentation) and
there is no date of publication, production or distribution on the
resource applying to the resource as a whole, the latest copyright date is
given. It does not matter that the date applies only to one aspect of the
creation of the resource. (See also 4.3.11.)
Example
, cop. 1995
Editorial comment: Date is for the written program; other
earlier copyright dates are for sound and documentation.

149
4 ISBD 2011

4.3.8 When no date of publication, production or distribution, copyright date or

date of printing or manufacture can be ascertained for the resource, an approximate date
of publication, production or distribution is given in square brackets. Unknown digits in
the date may be indicated by a symbol chosen by the cataloguing agency. Any evidence
supporting the approximate date may be given in area 7.
Examples
, [1969?]
, [196-?]
, [1560?]
, [ca 1560]
, [not after 21 Aug. 1492]
, [between 1711 and 1715]
, [1727 or 1760]
, [16..]
, [1969?]-
, [196-]-
, [ca 1835]-
, [1980 혹은 1981]

For older monographic resources:

When no date of publication or printing appears on the resource, but the
date can be determined from internal evidence or from reference works,
such a date is given enclosed in square brackets. The source of the date
is given in area 7. When no date of publication can be ascertained for
the resource, an approximate date of publication, printing, etc., is given
enclosed in square brackets. Any internal evidence or evidence from
reference works supporting the approximate date is given in area 7.
Examples
, [1560?]
, [ca 1580]
, [ca 1580?]
, [not before 1479]
, [not after 21 Aug. 1492]
, [1727 or 1728]
, [between 1711 and 1749]
, [between 1711 and 1749?]
, [167-]
, [167-?]
, [16--]
, [16--?]
, [1795?]
Title proper: The circular letter, to the General Baptist
churches for the year 1795.

150
ISBD 2011 4.3.10.3

4.3.9 The copyright date or date of printing or manufacture may be given after a
supplied or estimated date of publication.
Examples
, [1988], cop. 1927
, [198-?], cop. 1927

4.3.10 Resources published in multiple issues, parts, iterations, etc.

4.3.10.1 Beginning date of publication

The date of publication of the earliest issue, iteration, volume, part or fascicle is given,
followed by a hyphen.
Examples
, 1969-
, 1965-
In area 3: Vol. 5, no. 7 (July 1963)-
Editorial comment: Date of publication differs from date of coverage.

4.3.10.2 Ending date of publication

When describing a completed resource, the dates of publication of the earliest issue,
iteration, volume, part or fascicle and the last issue, iteration, volume, part or fascicle are
given, separated by a hyphen.
Examples
, 1968-1973
, 1513-1524

For updating looseleafs:

The date of the last update is given if available.
Example
, 1990-1995 [last updated 1999]
When the earliest issue, iteration, volume, part or fascicle and the last issue, iteration,
volume, part or fascicle of the resource are published in the same year, the date of
publication is given once.
Examples
, 1962
In area 3: Бр. 1 (17 септ. 1962 г.)-бр. 21 (10 окт. 1962 г.)
, 1989
In area 3: Vol. 1, pt. 1 (Dec. 1989)
Note: No further issues published

151
4 ISBD 2011

4.3.10.3 Uncertain or unknown dates

When the description is being made from issues or parts other than the first and/or last,
the date or dates of publication of the first and/or last issue or part are given as instructed
at 4.3.8. The source of the date or dates may be given in area 7 (see 7.4.1).
, [1969?]-
, [2004]-
Editorial comment: Date inferred from date in area 3.

4.3.10.4 Irregularities
Notes about irregularities in the dates of a resource, such as when the lowest numbered
part is not the part with the earliest date of publication, may be given in area 7.

4.3.11 Resources with multiple dates

For older monographic resources:

When parts of a resource have individual title pages bearing dates that
differ from that of the title page for the whole resource, these dates are
recorded in area 7. However, if one of these dates is a more accurate
reflection of the actual date of publication than the date pertaining to
the whole resource, it should be given as a correction as instructed in
4.3.5.

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, still and moving images, and electronic
resources:
When copyright dates are given for each work brought together in a
resource such as a sound recording or an electronic resource, these
dates are not transcribed in the publication, production, distribution,
etc., area. They may be given either in a note on the publication,
production, distribution, etc., area (see 7.4), or in a contents note (see
7.7); or the multilevel method of description provided in Appendix A
may be utilized.

152
ISBD 2011 4.4.2

4.4 Place of printing or manufacture

4.4.1 The place of printing or manufacture is given when it appears on the
resource and both the place of publication, production or distribution and the name of the
publisher, producer or distributor are unknown.
When the information is taken from outside the resource it is enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1974 (Manchester : Unity Press)
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1980- (Asnières : Kopp et Lahure)
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1960 (Paris : impr. Michard)
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1970 (London : High Fidelity Sound Studios)
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], 1996 (Seattle : Landmark Data Systems)
. — [S.l.] : [s.n.], [1869?] (México : Imp. de Juan Nepomuceno del
Vaele [i.e. Valle])
. — [出版地不明] : [出版者不明], 1963製作 ([東京] :
鹿島研究所出版会)
. — [발행지불명] : [발행처불명], 1997 (서울 : 대광인쇄소)

For older monographic resources:

The place of printing or manufacture is given in those instances where
printer and publisher are grammatically separated or distinct.
The place or places of printing are given when they appear on the
resource, but not on a prescribed source of information for the
publication, production, distribution, etc., area. This information may
be given if it does not appear on the resource, but it is known and
considered important to users of the catalogue.
4.4.2 Optionally, if the place of printing or manufacture appears on the resource,
it may be given in addition to either one or both of the following: the place of publication,
production and/or distribution and the name of the publisher, producer and/or distributor.
Examples
. — Stuttgart ; Zurich : Delphin Verlag, 1973 (Yugoslavia)
. — London : IFLA Committee on Cataloguing, 1975 (London :
Palantype Organisation)
. — Leipzig : Breitkopf & Härtel, 1977 (Jugoslawien)
. — Firenze : Scala, 1969 (Siena : Meini)
. — Urbana, Ill. : University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign,
Laboratory for Advanced Supercomputers, 1995 (Tokyo : Zishi)
. — Paris : Ministère de l'Intérieur, 1979 (Bourges : Tardy Quercy)
. — Buenos Aires : Javier Vergara, 2002 (Barcelona : Liberdúplex)
. — London : Chapman and Hall, 1976 (London : Mercury)

153
4 ISBD 2011

For older monographic resources:

The place or places of printing are given in the same way as the place or
places of publication, production and/or distribution
Examples
. — A Paris : chez Nyon l'aîné, 1781 ([Paris] : de
l'imprimerie de la veuve Thiboust)
Note: Printer named in colophon
. — Francofurti : prostat apud Ionam Rosarn, 1616
([Frankfurt] : [Abraham Scultetus])
Editorial comment: Printer not named in the resource.
. — [Parrhisiis] : venales inveniuntur in vico sancti
Iacobi apud Leonem Argenteum [Johannem Petit],
1508 (Parrhisiis : impressae in Bellovisu [apud]
Johannem Marchant)
Note: Petit's name, the place, date and the statement of
printing are taken from the colophon
. — Venundatur Parrhisiis : in vico sancti Iacobi sub
Leone Argenteo, Jehan Petit, [ca 1509] ([Paris] :
[Jean Marchant])
Note: The last leaf bears the device of the printer. Petit's
name appears in a device on the title page
4.4.3 When multiple places of printing or manufacture are given, the same
punctuation is used as for multiple places of publication, production and/or distribution.

154
ISBD 2011

4.5 Name of printer or manufacturer

4.5.1 The name of the printer or manufacturer is given when it appears on the
resource and both the place of publication, production and/or distribution and the name of
the publisher, producer and/or distributor are unknown.
When the information is taken from outside the resource it is enclosed in square brackets.
For examples, see 4.4.1.

For older monographic resources:

The name of the printer or manufacturer is given in those instances
where printer and publisher are grammatically separated or distinct.
The place or places of printing and the names of the printer or printers
are given when they appear on the resource, but not on a prescribed
source of information for the publication, production, distribution, etc.,
area. This information may be given if it does not appear on the
resource, but it is known and considered important to users of the
catalogue.
4.5.2 Optionally, if the name of the printer or manufacturer appears on the
resource, it may be given in addition to either one or both of the following: the place of
publication, production and/or distribution and the name of the publisher, producer and/or
distributor.
For examples, see 4.4.2.

For older monographic resources:

The name or names of a printer or printers is given in the same way as
the name or names of the publisher, printer, etc.
For examples, see 4.4.2.
4.5.3 When multiple names of printers or manufacturers are given, the same
punctuation is used as for multiple names of publishers, producers and/or distributors.

155
4 ISBD 2011

4.6 Date of printing or manufacture

4.6.1 The date of printing or manufacture may be given either as an element
following the name of the printer or manufacturer or by itself. In the latter case a word or
brief phrase is added to clarify the date.
Examples
. — London : Arts Council of Great Britain, 1976 (Twickenham : CTD
Printers, 1974)
. — Harmondsworth : Penguin, 1949 (1968 printing)
. — Zagreb : Stvarnost, [1977] (Zagreb : Vjesnik, 1976)
. — Budapest : Akadémiai K., 1977- (Debrecen : Alföldi Ny., 1978- )
. — Amiens : Association d'étude et de cartographie régionale, 1975
(Amiens : Yvert, 1976)
, [1980], p 1973 (manufactured 1979)
, 1786 (1788 reprint)
Note: Date of reprinting given in the preface
, 1786 ([1788 reprint])
Note: Date of reprinting taken from the publisher's archives
, cop. 1960 (reprinted 1984)

For older monographic resources:

If the date of reprinting appears on the title page it is recorded as part of
the date of publication element (see 4.3.4).
The date of printing is given as a separate element only when it does
not appear on the prescribed source of information for the publication,
production, distribution, etc., area, and when it differs from that date.
4.6.2 When the date of printing or manufacture is given in place of an unknown
date of publication, production or distribution (see 4.3.7), it is not repeated here.

156
ISBD 2011 5

5 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION AREA

Introductory note
The material description area includes the extent, other physical details, the dimensions,
and the accompanying material statement. The elements are defined in the glossary.
The resource is described as it was issued by the publisher. If it is known or believed that
the resource has been modified (e.g. bound or trimmed) subsequent to publication, the
information given in area 5 is for the resource as published and the information about the
modification is treated as relating to the copy in hand and given in area 7 (see 7.11).

For older monographic resources:

The purpose of the material description is to support identification by
recording the bibliographic format, the total number and order of
sequences of pages or leaves in a resource, and by recording as far as
can be established the number of plates and inserts and accompanying
material belonging to a resource. Further, it is intended to provide an
unambiguous instrument for reference to specific pages or leaves.
The material description is based on the total number of gatherings and
additional leaves in the resource described as it is assumed to have been
issued by the publisher.

Contents
5.1 Extent
5.2 Other physical details
5.3 Dimensions
5.4 Accompanying material statement

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. The statement of other physical details is preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ).
C. The dimensions statement is preceded by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
D. Each accompanying material statement is preceded by a space, plus sign, space ( + ).
E. Extent, other physical details, and dimensions of accompanying material, if given, are
enclosed in parentheses ( ( ) ).
Punctuation patterns
. — Specific material designation (extent) ; dimensions
. — Specific material designation (extent) : other physical details
statement ; dimensions + accompanying material statement
(extent of accompanying material : other physical details of
accompanying material ; dimensions of accompanying material)

For older monographic resources:

The format and/or dimensions statement is preceded by a space,
semicolon, space ( ; ).

157
5 ISBD 2011

Dimensions following the format are enclosed in parentheses (( )).

Prescribed source
The whole resource.

158
ISBD 2011 5.1.2

5.1 Extent
5.1.1 The first element of the material description area names and numbers the
physical unit or units constituting the resource, adding other measures of extent as
appropriate.

5.1.2 Specific material designation

The number of physical units constituting a resource is given in arabic numerals with the
specific material designation. If the resource is still being issued or the number of units is
unknown, the number of physical units is not given. The terms used as specific material
designations are not prescribed and may be given in terms appropriate to the resource
being described and the language of the description. Terms may be abbreviated.
Optionally: for printed texts and certain notated music in one volume, the number of
physical units may be omitted. The extent statement then consists of the pagination of
the volume (see 5.1.4).
Examples
. — 36 slides
. — 3 stereograph reels
. — 1 atlas
. — 2 diagrams
. — 1 map
. — 1 globe
. — 2 scores
. — 4 parts
. — 1 folder
. — 1 broadsheet
. — vol.
. — 3 vol.
. — 2 portfolios
. — 1 computer disk
. — 1 CD-ROM
. — 1 DVD
. — 1 score (37 p.) + 4 parts on 1 CD-ROM
. — 2 electronic tape cassettes
. — 120 no.
. — 2 drawings
. — 10 postcards
. — 3 posters
. — 1 photograph
. — 1 microfilm reel
If the number of physical units does not equal the number of bibliographic units, an
explanation may be given in area 7, unless the numbering of the physically separate units

159
5 ISBD 2011

is given on the second level of a multilevel description (see Appendix A) or in a contents

note (see 7.7).
Examples
. — 5 vol.
Note: Volumes numbered 1, 2A, 2B, 2C, 3
. — 5 vol.
Note: 8 vol. in 5
. — 6 vol.
Note: The title page of the sixth volume bears the designation “Bde 6-
7"
If the specific material designation does not convey an accurate description of the extent
of the physical carriers, a compound statement is given.
. — 3 maps on 1 sheet
. — 1 map on 2 sheets
. — 20 maps on 2 CD-ROMs
. — 1 score in 8 vol.
. — 1 atlas in 2 vol.

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, and still and moving images:
If equipment of a particular technical system or format is required to
use a resource, this information may be recorded in parentheses after
the specific material designation.
Examples
. — 1 sound cassette (Elcaset)
. — 1 videocassette (VHS)
. — 1 videoreel (Ampex 7003)
. — 1 sound disc (Cook binaural)
. — 24 slides (3M Talking Slide)

For updating looseleafs:

An updating looseleaf is described by adding (looseleaf) or an
equivalent term in the language chosen by the cataloguing agency to the
specific material designation.
Examples
. — vol. (looseleaf)
Editorial comment: Publication still in progress.
. — 3 vol. (looseleaf)
Editorial comment: Publication complete.

For multimedia resources:

For multimedia resources, the components are named and numbered in
succession.

160
ISBD 2011 5.1.3

Example
. — 3 filmstrips, 1 map, 13 rocks and minerals, 1
wallchart
Alternatively:
a) multimedia resource may be used as a specific material designation
Example
. — 1 multimedia resource
or
b) a separate material description area may be given for each
component. This method should be used only when the materials are
few in number and a full physical description for each component is
considered important to users of the catalogue.
Example
. — 3 filmstrips (96 fr.) : col. ; 35 mm. — 1 map : col. ;
25 x 25 cm, folded to 10 x 18 cm. — 13 rocks and
minerals ; in container 14 x 9 x 2 cm. — 1 wallchart :
col. ; 48 x 90 cm, folded to 24 x 15 cm

5.1.3 Subunits
The number and type of subunits of a resource (i.e. the number of pages, leaves, sheets,
frames, pieces, etc.), and/or (where applicable) the playing time (see 5.1.5) are given
after the specific material designation and enclosed in parentheses. This statement
follows the guidelines in 5.1.4.
Optionally, for printed texts and certain notated music resources in one volume, the
specific material designation is omitted and the number and type of subunits are given in
its place.
Examples
. — 1 folder (6 p.)
. — 1 portfolio (26 leaves)
. — 1 flipchart (8 sheets)
. — 1 filmstrip (44 fr.)
. — 1 filmstrip (6 double fr.)
. — 4 filmstrips (220 fr.)
. — 1 stereograph reel (7 pairs of fr.)
. — 1 score (329 p.)
. — 1 vocal score (259 p.)
. — 1 part (32 p.)
Editorial comment: A separately published part.
. — 1 miniature score (146 p.)
. — 1 short score (21 leaves)
. — 1 choir book (240 p.)
. — 1 sheet (2 p.)

161
5 ISBD 2011

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, and still and moving images:
No distinction is made between numbered and unnumbered sequences
of sheets, frames, etc. (i.e. numbers supplied by the cataloguing agency
are given without square brackets). For numbered sequences of sheets,
frames, etc., the number on the last numbered sheet, frame, etc., of each
numbered sequence is recorded, irrespective of whether this total
includes any unnumbered sequences (e.g. title frames, end frames and
interspersed non-content frames of a filmstrip).

For transparencies with overlays:

For a set of transparencies with overlays, the presence of overlays is
indicated but their number may be omitted.
Examples
. — 1 transparency (4 unattached overlays)
. — 12 transparencies (with overlays)

For filmstrips:
For a set of filmstrips, the statement of frame characteristics should be
retained where appropriate even though no statement regarding the
number of frames is recorded.
Example
. — 3 filmstrips (double fr.)

For electronic resources:

The extent of a resource available by remote access may be given if the
information is known and considered important to users of the
catalogue.
If readily available, the total file size using the appropriate level (bytes,
kilobytes, megabytes, etc.) may be given. If given, it is enclosed in
parentheses.
Examples
. — 1 website
. — 1 streaming sound file
. — 1 streaming video file
. — 1 online resource
. — 1 map (5.2 MB) on 1 CD-ROM
. — 3 maps (600 kilobytes)
Editorial comment: Remote access.

162
ISBD 2011 5.1.4.1.3

5.1.4 Pagination16

5.1.4.1 Resources in one physical unit

5.1.4.1.1 If the leaves in a resource are numbered on both sides, the extent of the
resource is described in terms of pages. If the leaves are numbered on one side only, the
extent of the resource is described in terms of leaves. If the number of pages or leaves
gives a false impression of the extent of a resource, this may be explained in area 7 (see
7.5.1).
Examples
327 p.
321 leaves
80 p.
Note: Versos of pages blank
56 leaves
Note: Leaves printed on both sides
5.1.4.1.2 If a resource consists of numbered columns instead of pages, the extent is
given in terms of columns. If there are more than two columns to a page, this fact is
stated in area 7.
Example
. — 831 columns

For older monographic resources:

The total number of pages or leaves is given, enclosed in square
brackets, or may be given in area 7.
Example
. — 840 columns on [420] p.
or
. — 840 columns on [210] leaves
5.1.4.1.3 The number on the last numbered page, leaf, column, sheet or frame of
each numbered sequence is given. Numerals, arabic and roman, are recorded as found on
the resource. When the pages or leaves are lettered instead of numbered, the first and last
letters are given and are preceded by the word or abbreviation indicating pages or leaves.
Examples
. — 328 p.
. — iv, 328 p.
. — 16 leaves, 328 p.
. — 328 p., 52 columns
. — 32, 328, 40, 16 p.
. — P. a-h
. — P. A-H

16 The term “pagination” is used to designate any sequence of pages, leaves, columns, sheets,
frames, etc.
163
5 ISBD 2011

. — Leaves A-H
. — P. A-H, 128 p.
When the resource contains more than one numbered or lettered sequence of different
types (e.g. columns and pages) and the second, etc., sequence continues the numbering or
lettering of the preceding sequence, the first and last numbers or letters of the second,
etc., sequence are given preceded by the word or abbreviation for pages, leaves or
columns.
Example
. — 320 columns, p. 321-400
When the numeration in arabic numerals continues that of the roman numerals, the
numeration of the whole sequence is given in arabic numerals.
Example
. — 328 p.
Editorial comment: 16 pages numbered i-xvi and 312 pages numbered 17-
328.

For older monographic resources:

If the numeration in arabic numerals continues that of the roman
numerals, the numeration of the whole sequence may be given in arabic
numerals. Alternatively, both the arabic and roman sequences may be
given.
Example
. — 328 p.
or
. — xvi p., p. 17-328
5.1.4.1.4 When the number of the last numbered page, leaf, column, sheet, frame,
etc., of a sequence is incorrect, it is given as on the resource. The correct number is
given, enclosed in square brackets, with an explanatory note if it is considered important
to users of the catalogue, or the sequences of pagination may be given exactly to indicate
the source of the error.
Examples
. — xiv, 823 [i.e. 328] p.
Note: P. 328 misnumbered 823
. — xiv, 832 [i.e. 848] p.
Note: P. 161-176 are repeated in the numeration
or
. — xiv p., p. 1-176, 161-832
Editorial comment: An alternative to the previous example.
. — 1 filmstrip (64 [i.e. 46] fr.)
5.1.4.1.5 Unnumbered sequences of pages or leaves are given only when they
constitute the whole or a substantial part of the resource (but see 5.1.4.1.8 for leaves of
plates). If unnumbered sequences constitute the whole or a substantial part of the

164
ISBD 2011 5.1.4.1.5

resource, they are given in the terms used for the numbered sequences as arabic numerals
enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
. — 329 p.
Editorial comment: 8 unnumbered pages and 329 pages numbered 1-329.
. — iv, [100] p.
Editorial comment: 4 pages numbered i-iv and 100 unnumbered pages.
If the whole resource is unpaginated or unfoliated, either:
a) leaves or pages are counted together and the total is given in terms of leaves
(if printed on one side) or pages (if printed on both sides) in arabic numerals
enclosed in square brackets
Example
. — [80] leaves
or
b) an estimate of the number of leaves or pages is made, and the total is given as
an approximate number of leaves (if printed on one side) or pages (if printed
on both sides).
Example
. — Ca 400 leaves

For older monographic resources:

Any unnumbered page, leaf or column that forms a part of the resource
as issued and is not counted as part of a sequence of pagination is
counted according to the terms used otherwise to describe the resource.
Both blank and printed pages or leaves are counted. The number of
such pages, leaves or columns is given in arabic numerals enclosed in
square brackets.
Examples
. — [8], 328 p.
Editorial comment: 8 unnumbered pages and 328 pages
numbered 1-328.
Unnumbered pages at the end of a sequence are given in arabic
numerals enclosed in square brackets.
Examples
. — 93, [3] p.
. — xv, [1], 160 p.
When any such unnumbered page, leaf or column is found within a
numbered sequence, the first and last pages, leaves or columns are
given for the surrounding material.
Example
. — 1-200, [8], 201-232 p.

165
5 ISBD 2011

Unnumbered pages in the beginning of a sequence are tacitly inferred.

Examples
. — 16 p.
Editorial comment: 3 unnumbered pages and 13 pages
numbered 4-16
. — 328 p.
Editorial comment: 8 unnumbered pages and 320 pages
numbered 9-328
Blank leaves are included in the pagination statement and noted within
parentheses following the pagination statement when they form part of
the gatherings of the resource being described. Only blank leaves that
have been seen in extant copies may be included in the statement.
Examples
. — iv, [100] p. (p. 99-100 blank)
Editorial comment: 4 pages numbered i-iv and 100
unnumbered pages and the last leaf blank.
. — iv, 96, [4] p. (last two p. blank)
Editorial comment: pages numbered i-iv, 1-96 and an
unnumbered fold of which the last leaf is blank.
When the complete extent cannot be inferred, the extent of imperfect
copies is given by recording the numeration of the pages and/or leaves
according to the provisions of 5.1. However, p. or leaves and a plus
sign are used preceding or following the statement of extent (e.g. 200 +
p.; p. + 41-200), or, in the case of unpaginated or unfoliated resources,
the provisions for such cases are used. In these cases, and when the
extent of a complete copy has been inferred, an explanatory note is
given.
If the whole resource is unpaginated or unfoliated, a note on the
signatures may be given if it is considered important to users of the
catalogue.
5.1.4.1.6 If a resource contains more than three sequences of similarly numbered
pages, leaves or columns, or sequences of similarly numbered pages combined with one
or more major sequences of unnumbered pages, either:
a) The sequences are added up and given as a total followed by the words in
various pagings (or the equivalent in another language).
Example
. — 1000 p. in various pagings
Editorial comment: not: 48, 53, 99, 100, 200, 410, 90 p.
or
b) When one of the sequences is clearly the main sequence, the number of that
sequence is given with the total number in brackets of the other sequences
preceding and/or succeeding as appropriate.

166
ISBD 2011 5.1.4.1.8

Example
. — 400, [98] p.
Editorial comment: not: 400, 18, 10, 22, 28, 20 p.
or
c) The specific material designation and extent of the resource is described as:
Examples
. — 1 vol. (various pagings)
. — 1 score (various pagings)
. — 1 portfolio

For older monographic resources:

If one of the sequences is significantly larger than the others, the extent
of that sequence may be given followed by with various other pagings.
Example
. — 1 vol. (400 p. with various other pagings)
Editorial comment: The sequences are: 400, 18, 12, 28 and
20 numbered pages and 18 unnumbered pages.
5.1.4.1.7 If the pages, leaves, columns, sheets, frames, etc., are numbered as part of a
larger sequence, the numbers on the first and last subunit are recorded preceded by the
word or abbreviation for the type of subunit.
Examples
. — Leaves 81-93
. — P. 713-797
. — 1 filmstrip (fr. 120-143 (double fr.))
If the pages, leaves, columns, sheets, frames, etc., are numbered both internally and as
part of a larger sequence, the internal numbering is recorded, and the numbering from the
larger sequence is given in area 7 (see 7.5).
Examples
. — 1 filmstrip (24 double fr.)
Note: Frames also numbered 120-143.
. — 81 p.
Note: Pages also numbered 321-401
5.1.4.1.8 If a resource contains pages or leaves of plates or other inserts not included
in the numbering of the main sequence of pages or leaves, the number of pages or leaves
of plates or other inserts is given at the end of the sequences of pagination, whether they
are found together or distributed throughout the resource. If the pages or leaves of plates
are unnumbered, the number is given in brackets.
Examples
. — 248 p., 24 leaves of plates
. — x, 32, 74 p., [1] leaf of plates
. — 248 p., 12 p. of plates

167
5 ISBD 2011

. — 248 p., 36 leaves of plates, 24 p. of plates

. — 16 p., 28 p. of maps
. — 24 p., [16] leaves of genealogical tables
. — 1 score (246 p., 24 leaves of plates)
. — 1 score (246 p., 38 leaves of plates, 24 p. of plates)
. — 1 vocal score (246 p., 12 p. of plates)
. — 1 atlas ([2] p., [32] leaves of plates)

5.1.4.2 Resources in more than one physical unit

5.1.4.2.1 Continuous pagination

If a resource consists of more than one unit of the same physical form (i.e. more than one
volume, filmstrip, portfolio, etc.) and the subunits are continuously numbered, the total
number of pages, leaves, sheets, etc., is given as in 5.1.3.
Examples
. — 8 vol. (894 p.)
. — 1 score in 8 vol. (894 p.)
When only the first unit has a separately numbered sequence of preliminary pages, leaves
or columns preceding the continuously paginated, foliated or column numbered main
sequence, the pagination, foliation or column numeration of the preliminary and main
sequences is given.
Example
. — 3 vol. (xx, 804 p.)
Editorial comment: Preliminary sequence in vol. 1 only.
When each unit has a sequence of preliminary pages or leaves preceding the continuously
paginated or foliated main sequence and separately numbered, these sequences are added
up and given as a total enclosed in square brackets.
Example
. — 8 vol. ([47], 894 p.)

For older monographic resources:

When each unit has a separately numbered sequence of preliminary
pages, leaves or columns preceding the continuously paginated, foliated
or column numbered main sequence, a complete record of sequences
may be given in area 7.
Example
. — 3 vol.
Note: Pagination of volumes: vol. 1: xx, 200 p.; vol. 2: xx
p., p. 201-512; vol. 3: xxi, [1] p., p. 513-896

5.1.4.2.2 Several paginations

For resources consisting of more than one physical unit, if the units consist of
individually numbered sequences of subunits (pages, leaves, frames, etc.), the numbers of
168
ISBD 2011 5.1.5.3

subunits may be given, enclosed in parentheses, in addition to the number of units if they
are considered important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
. — 3 filmstrips (60, 52, 58 fr.)
. — 2 flipcharts (6, 8 sheets)
. — 12 filmstrips
. — 5 vol. (31, 33, 49, 37, 18 p.)
. — 2 portfolios (12, 18 leaves)
. — 1 score in 5 vol. (31, 33, 49, 37, 18 p.)
. — 1 vocal score in 2 vol. (x, 210 p.; v, 310 p.)
. — 3 vol. (vi, 310 p.; vi, 434 p.; viii, 492 p.)
. — 3 vol. (vi, 310 p., 20 leaves of plates; viii, 432 p., 32 leaves of
plates; x, 490 p., 52 leaves of plates)
If it is considered necessary to record the presence of plates, but not the pagination of
each volume, these may be given in parentheses.
Example
. — 4 vol. (with 24 leaves of plates)

5.1.5 Playing time

5.1.5.1 The extent of any resource having an inherent durational aspect is recorded
in terms of playing time.
Optionally, for motion pictures and videorecordings, the physical length of the film may
be added to the statement of playing time.
Example
. — 1 film reel (22 min, 577 m)
5.1.5.2 The playing time recorded is normally that of the whole resource. It is
recorded as given on the resource, its container, or accompanying material. When no
indication of duration is given, an approximation of the playing time may be recorded. If
it is impossible to give either a precise statement of playing time or an approximation, the
statement is omitted.
Examples
. — 1 videocassette (U-matic) (ca 60 min)
. — 1 sound reel (37 min, 18 s)
. — 1 sound cartridge (90 min)
. — 1 sound disc (ca 50 min)
. — 1 film loop (4 min, 20 s)
. — 1 DVD-Video (114 min)
. — 1 streaming sound file (14 min)
. — 1 streaming video file (58 min)
5.1.5.3 If a resource consists of more than one unit of the same physical form (i.e.
more than one disc, cassette, etc.), each of which has its own statement of playing time,

169
5 ISBD 2011

the playing times of the individual units are recorded instead of that of the whole
resource.
Examples
. — 3 sound reels (25, 30, 27 min)
. — 2 sound cassettes (30, 90 min)
. — 3 sound discs (50, 55, 50 min)
5.1.5.4 If a resource contains two or more works, the playing times of the
individual works, if given on the resource, are recorded in area 7 (see 7.10.1). Such a
note may be combined with the contents note (see 7.7). When the playing times of
individual works are recorded in area 7, the playing time of the whole resource may be
omitted from the material description area.

5.1.6 Resources issued in fascicles

If a resource is issued in fascicles intended to be bound into one or more physical units,
the number of pages, leaves and/or volumes is given in terms appropriate to its final
form, with a note indicating that it was issued in fascicles.

170
ISBD 2011 5.2.3.3

5.2 Other physical details

5.2.1 The second element of the material description area is a statement of other
physical characteristics of the resource, such as method of production, colour, material
from which the resource is made, etc. Any characteristic implicit in the specific material
designation may be omitted; for example, the presence of sound for a sound recording or
the presence of illustrations for a visual resource may be omitted.
The specifications constituting other physical details are presented as appropriate in the
following order.

5.2.2 Composition of material

A word or phrase indicating the material of which the resource is composed may be
given.
Examples
. — 1 globe : wood
. — 1 sound reel (27 min) : paper
. — 1 diorama : various materials
. — 1 microfilm reel : diazo
. — 1 film reel (11 min) : nitrate
. — 1 map : transparency

5.2.3 Presence of illustrations

5.2.3.1 When a resource is illustrated, the abbreviation ill. (or its equivalent in
another language) may be given after the specific material statement. Minor illustrations
may be disregarded.
Example
. — 8 vol. : ill.

5.2.3.2 Particular types of illustrations

Particular types of illustration (e.g. maps, plans, facsimiles, portraits, music) may be
specified after the abbreviation ill. (or its equivalent).
Examples
: ill., maps
: ill., facs.
When particular types of illustrations are specified and these are the only illustrations in
the resource, the abbreviation ill. (or its equivalent) is omitted.
Examples
: maps, plans
: facsim.

5.2.3.3 Number of illustrations

The number of illustrations, or of a particular type of illustration, may be given.

171
5 ISBD 2011

Examples
: 31 ill.
: ill., 17 facs.
: 12 maps
When a resource consists mainly or entirely of illustrations, this may be noted in the
illustration statement.
Examples
: all ill.
: chiefly maps
: chiefly ill.

5.2.4 Presence of colour

5.2.4.1 Texts with illustrations

When some or all of the illustrations are coloured, this may be noted. If only some of the
illustrations are in colour, this information may be given in parentheses.
Examples
: col. ill.
: ill., 31 col. maps
: ill. (some col.)
: 31 maps (some col.)

5.2.4.2 Visual resources

The colour characteristics of a visual resource are given as appropriate. The
abbreviations col. or b&w (or their equivalents in another language) are used, or not more
than three specific colours are given. A resource having both colour and black and white
sequences is so described. Brief explanatory phrases may be inserted in parentheses after
the statement. For microscope slides the presence of staining is indicated.
Examples
: col.
: b&w
: wood, blue and white
: transparency, col.
: stained
: col. with b&w sequences
: col. and b&w
: col. (Ektachrome)
: col. (PAL)

5.2.4.3 Electronic resources

If a resource displays in two or more colours or is known to produce two or more colours,
the abbreviation col., or its equivalent in another language, is given.

172
ISBD 2011 5.2.7.2

Examples
. — 2 electronic tape cassettes : col.
. — 1 CD-I : col., sd.
. — 1 CD-ROM : col. and b&w

5.2.5 Reduction ratio (Microforms)

5.2.5.1 An indication of the reduction ratio is given for microforms. Where
possible the ratio is expressed numerically.
Examples
. — 1 microfilm reel : diazo, 14x
. — 6 microfiches : silver halide, 150x
5.2.5.2 The terms low reduction (up to 15x), high reduction (31x–60x), very high
reduction (61x–90x) and ultra-high reduction (91x and upwards) or their equivalents in
another language or script are used in cases where the reduction ratio cannot be specified
exactly.

5.2.6 Presence or absence of sound

5.2.6.1 The abbreviations sd. (for sound) or si. (for silent) (or their equivalents in
another language) are given as appropriate for materials that include sound as an integral
feature and for which the presence of sound is not implicit in the specific material
designation.
Examples
. — 1 film reel (20 min) : b&w, si.
. — 1 videocassette (U-matic) (30 min) : col., sd.
. — 1 electronic disk : sd.
5.2.6.2 Brief explanatory phrases may be inserted in parentheses after the
statement sd.
Example
. — 1 videocassette (Beta) (120 min) : col., sd. (Beta HiFi)
5.2.6.3 Optionally, for materials (e.g. slides) that include integral sound only as an
exception, the absence of sound may be indicated with si.

5.2.7 Other technical specifications

5.2.7.1 Frame alignment

For microfilm reels, microfilm slips, and filmstrips a statement of frame alignment is
given.
Examples
. — 1 microfilm reel : cine mode
. — 3 microfilm slips : diazo, comic mode
. — 1 filmstrip (42 double fr.) : comic mode

173
5 ISBD 2011

5.2.7.2 Process or method of reproduction

Any details on the process or method of reproduction of a still image may be given.
Example
. — 1 engraving : drypoint, aquatint

5.2.7.3 Playing speed

The playing speed of a resource is given in appropriate terms.
Examples
. — 1 sound disc : 33 1/3 rpm
. — 1 sound reel (100 min) : 19 cm/s
. — 2 videodiscs (24 min) : 1500 rpm

5.2.7.4 Recording method

The recording method of an analogue sound disc is given if known.
Example
. — 1 sound disc : 78 rpm, acoustic

5.2.7.5 Groove direction

The groove direction of an analogue sound disc is given if known.
Examples
. — 1 sound disc : 78 rpm, vertical

5.2.7.6 Groove size

The groove size of an analogue sound disc is given if known.
Examples
. — 1 sound disc : 33 1.3 rpm, coarse

5.2.7.7 Number of tracks

The number of tape tracks is given.
Example
. — 1 sound reel (100 min) : 19 cm/s, 2 tracks

5.2.7.8 Track configuration

The track configuration of a sound reel recorded on four or more tracks is specified.
Example
. — 1 sound reel (90 min) : 19 cm/s, 4 tracks, adjacent

5.2.7.9 Number of sound channels

The number of sound channels is given.

174
ISBD 2011 5.2.7.11

Examples
. — 1 sound disc : 33 1/3 rpm, mono
. — 1 sound reel (50 min) : 38 cm/s, 2 tracks, stereo

5.2.7.10 Equalization
The equalization employed may be given if known.
Examples
. — 1 sound reel (45 min) : 19 cm/s, 4 tracks, NAB

5.2.7.11 Noise reduction

The noise reduction employed may be given if known.
Example
. — 1 sound cassette (60 min) : Dolby processed

Table of Technical Specifications and Industry Norms for Sound

Recordings
This table indicates which specifications apply to each type of sound recording.
Specifications that are applicable are marked A, those that are not applicable are marked
N/A. If there is a norm for a specification and type of recording it follows the letter A.
Applicable specifications shown in the table are given in the order in which they appear
below. However, if an industry norm is listed in the table, the specification is given only
if it differs from that norm.

Analogue disc
78 rpm Other Digital
Specification speeds disc Reel Cassette Cartridge
Speed A A 1.4 A A: 4.76 A: 9.5
m/s cm/s cm/s
Recording A: A: N/A N/A N/A N/A
method electric electric
Groove direction A: A: N/A N/A N/A N/A
lateral lateral
Groove size A: A: N/A N/A N/A N/A
coarse micro
No. of tracks N/A N/A N/A A A A: 8
Track N/A N/A N/A A: N/A N/A
configuration alter-
nate
No. of sound A: A A A A A: stereo
channels mono
Equalization N/A N/A N/A A A A: 50μs
system
Noise reduction N/A N/A N/A A A A
system

175
5 ISBD 2011

5.2.8 Resources available in different formats

When the resource is available in alternative formats differing in terms of the other
physical details element, the physical details in question are omitted from the material
description area and given in area 8 or in area 7 (see 7.5).
Example
. — 1 microfilm reel : comic mode
Note: Available on diazo or silver halide film

176
ISBD 2011 5.3.1.1

5.3 Dimensions
The third element of the material description area is a statement of the dimensions of the
resource.
The dimensions may consist of one dimension only or (as in the case of a film or folded
map) may be more complex.

5.3.1 Statement of the dimensions

If the dimensions of the resource are given, they are given in terms of centimetres
rounded up to the next whole centimetre. Exception: the gauge of a film or width of a
tape is given in millimetres (see 5.3.1.1).
Example
; 18 cm
Editorial comment: the height of the resource is 17.2 centimetres.

5.3.1.1 Choosing the dimensions to measure

For printed textual and notated music resources:

The height of the resource, measured parallel to the spine, is given.

For cartographic resources:

The dimensions of two-dimensional resources, other than circular
resources, are given in the form of height x width. The dimensions of
three-dimensional resources other than globes and sections of spheres,
are given in the form of height x width x depth. The dimensions of
globes, sections of spheres and circular two-dimensional resources are
given in terms of the diameter.
The dimensions given for two-dimensional resources, if not otherwise
specified, are the dimensions within the neat line. If there is no neat
line, the dimensions given are those of the part of the resource carrying
the geographic detail.
Examples
; 65 x 40 cm
; 45 x 35 x 2 cm
; 23 cm (diam.)
Additional dimensions such as the dimensions of a map when folded, or
the dimensions of individual sheets of a collectively described group, or
the individual dimensions of mounted sheets, may be given. When
more than one set of measurements is given, the whole material
description area should be given in a clear and unambiguous fashion;
that is, when it is not clear to which part or parts the dimensions apply,
this is specified in the description. (For units of different dimensions
see 5.3.1.5.)

177
5 ISBD 2011

Examples
; on sheets 60 x 40 cm
; 9 x 30 cm, on sheet 40 x 60 cm, folded to 21 x 10 cm
; on sheets 90 x 50 cm or smaller, folded in cover 25 x
16 cm
; double hemisphere, each 6 cm (diam.), on sheet 21 x
15 cm

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, and still and moving images:
The dimensions of two-dimensional resources (wallcharts, microfiches,
slides, transparencies, pictures, etc.) are given in the form height x
width. For circular two-dimensional resources (with the exception of
sound discs and videodiscs) the diameter is given, followed in
parentheses by the abbreviation diam. or its equivalent in another
language. For oval two-dimensional resources the length of the vertical
axis is given, followed in parentheses by oval or its equivalent.
Dimensions relate to the sheet or other surface, but when there is a
significant difference between the dimensions of the sheet and the
dimensions of the printed area, the latter may be given in area 7 (see
7.5).
Examples
; 24 x 48 cm
; 5 x 5 cm
; 36 cm (diam.)
; 9 cm (diam.)
For a folded sheet, two dimensions statements are given.
Example
; 48 x 90 cm, folded to 24 x 15 cm
The dimensions of three-dimensional resources (dioramas, etc.) are
given in the form height x width x depth, or when this is inappropriate,
height alone. Very complex dimensions statements may be given in
area 7 (see 7.5) or omitted.
Examples
. — 1 diorama : various materials, col. ; 9 x 30 x 20 cm
For resources requiring the use of equipment (e.g. discs, cassettes, reels
of tape or motion pictures), the principal dimensions given are those of
the resource itself, irrespective of the external dimensions of any
container such as an album or sleeve (for the treatment of a container
for a set of resources, see 5.3.1.3).
Examples
. — 1 sound disc (53 min) : 33 1/3 rpm, stereo ; 30 cm

178
ISBD 2011 5.3.1.1

. — 1 sound reel (100 min) : 19 cm/s, 4 track, mono ; 13

cm
. — 1 CD (60 min) : stereo ; 12 cm
For resources whose dimensions are implicit in other parts of the
description (e.g. cassettes and cartridges of a standard type), the
statement of dimensions may be omitted.
These standard dimensions are:
sound cassette 10 x 6.4 x 1.2 cm
sound cartridge 13.5 x 10 x 2.2 cm
videocassette 18.8 x 10.4 x 2.5 cm
For resources employing film or magnetic tape, the gauge of the film or
width of the tape is given. Measurements that are implicit in other parts
of the description (e.g. tape width for a standard sound cassette or
cartridge) may be omitted.
These standard widths are:
sound reel 6.3 mm
sound cassette 3.8 mm
sound cartridge 6.3 mm
Examples
. — 6 microfilm reels : Kalvar, cine mode ; 35 mm
. — 1 sound reel (45 min) : 19 cm/s, 2 tracks, mono ; 13
cm, 6 mm tape
. — 1 film loop (4 min, 10 s) : col. ; Super 8 mm

For electronic resources:

The dimensions of the physical carrier itself are given, irrespective of
the external dimensions of any container (for the treatment of a
container for a set of resources see 5.3.1.3).
The diameter is given for a disk/disc or a tape reel. The length and
width of the tape of a reel may be given.
Examples
. — 1 electronic tape reel ; 27 cm
. — 1 CD-ROM ; 12 cm
. — 1 electronic tape cassette : col. ; 19 x 9 cm, 7 mm
tape
The height of the face of a chip cartridge is given.
Example
. — 1 electronic chip cartridge : col., sd. ; 9 cm

179
5 ISBD 2011

5.3.1.2 Unusual dimensions

For printed textual and notated music resources:

When the dimensions or shape of the resource are unusual (e.g. when
the width is greater than the height), other dimensions may be given
after the height.
Examples
; 21 x 30 cm
; 38 cm, folded to 10 cm

For sound discs:

When a sound disc is of a non-standard shape (e.g. when the playing
surface has an irregularly shaped surround), the diameter of the playing
surface is given in the material description area. A statement regarding
the external dimensions of the resource is given in area 7 (see 7.5).
Example
. — 1 sound disc (11 min) : 45 rpm, mono ; 18 cm
Note: Disc impressed on rectangular surface, 20 x 20
cm

5.3.1.3 Resources issued in a container

For resources issued in a container, with or without accompanying material, the
dimensions of the container may be given. Alternatively, the phrase in container (or its
equivalent in another language) may be used, or the statement may be omitted.
When an integral container or mounting is included in the description, two dimensions
statements may be given. Alternatively, the dimensions of the whole resource, including
container or mountings, may be given alone.
Examples
. — 1 diorama : col. ; in glazed case 35 x 60 x 24 cm
. — 4 electronic tape cassettes : sd., col. ; in container 12 x 36 x 20
cm
. — 1 laboratory kit (various pieces) ; in container 12 x 36 x 20 cm
. — 5 sound discs (256 min) : 33 1/3 rpm, stereo ; 30 cm, in container

5.3.1.5 Physical units of different sizes

For continuing resources and multipart monographic

resources:
If the dimensions of a continuing resource or a multipart monographic
resource change, the smaller or smallest size and the larger or largest
size, separated by a hyphen, may be given in area 5, or a note that the
dimensions of the issues or parts or of the iterations vary may be given
in area 7 (see 7.5).

180
ISBD 2011 5.3.2.1

Example
; 20-30 cm

For cartographic resources, multimedia resources, sound

recordings, videorecordings, and still and moving images:
When the resource consists of a set of two-dimensional units and the
individual units vary in size, the dimensions of the largest are given
followed by or smaller (or its equivalent in another language).
Alternatively, the dimensions of all the units may be given in area 7 (see
7.5).
Examples
. — 6 wallcharts : col. ; 60 x 98 cm or smaller
. — 1 map on 365 sheets : col. ; sheets 60 x 90 cm or
smaller
. — 1 map on 25 sheets : col. ; sheets 90 x 50 cm or
smaller, folded in cover 25 x 16 cm

5.3.2 Bibliographic format and dimensions (Older monographic

resources)
5.3.2.1 The bibliographic format of the resource is given in a standard designation
as chosen by the cataloguing agency, e.g. 1o, 2 o, 4 o, 8 o, 12 o, etc.
If the gatherings are made up of half sheets or other fractions of sheets, or if the
gatherings are composed of more than one sheet, this may be recorded within parentheses
following the format or in a collation statement.
Examples
; 2 o (6s)
Broadsheets and half sheets may be recorded by the respective term, discarding the
format designation, or as 1 leaf and the proper format designation.
Examples
1 broadsheet
or
1 leaf ; 1 o
1 half sheet
or
1 leaf ; 1/2:o
Dimensions may be given in area 5 if it can be established that the resource being
described is in a standardized publisher’s binding or in publisher’s wrappers. The height
of the outer case, measured parallel to the spine, or of the resource when it is not bound,
is given in parentheses following the format, rounded up to the next whole centimetre.
Examples
; 4 o (18 cm, publisher’s wrappers)
Editorial comment: A publication in quarto in publisher’s wrappers that
measures 17.2 centimetres.
o
; 12 (14 cm, publisher’s binding)
181
5 ISBD 2011

Otherwise, dimensions are treated as copy specific information and may be given,
together with any other relevant evidence, in area 7.
Example
. — Copy x in collection y cropped at foot, measures 17.2 centimetres
When the printed lines run parallel to the longer side of the paper, the designation oblong
may be given in parentheses following the format.
Examples
; 4 o (oblong)
o
; 2 (oblong)
5.3.2.2 When the dimensions or shape of the resource are unusual an explanation
may be given in area 7.
5.3.2.3 When the format cannot be determined, the assumed format followed by a
question mark is given in area 5. Dimensions may also be given in area 7 with an
explanation.
Example
; 48 o (?)
Note: Gathered in eights, measures 4 x 3 cm, uncut
5.3.2.4 When in a multivolume monographic resource the volumes are of differing
formats, all formats are given in repeated material description areas, if they are
considered important to users of the catalogue. If the resource being described is in
standardized publisher’s binding or in publisher’s wrappers, dimensions may be given,
but when the resource is entirely in one format, only the least and greatest dimensions are
recorded.
The format and/or dimensions of individual parts may be given in area 7, on the “second
level” of a multilevel description (see Appendix A) or in a contents note (see 7.7).
Examples
. — 4 v. ; 4 o (18 cm, publisher’s binding). — 3 v. ; 8 o (16 cm,
publisher’s binding)
Note: Vols. 1-4 are 4 o (18 cm); vols. 5-7 are 8 o (16 cm)
Editorial comment: 7-vol. set with varying dimensions and format.
; 2 o (33-37 cm, publisher’s binding)

182
ISBD 2011 5.4.3

5.4 Accompanying material statement

The fourth element of the material description area is the accompanying material statement.
The term accompanying material denotes any physically separable part of the resource
not so far specified in the material description area that is issued (or intended to be
issued) at the same time and intended to be used with the resource that is being described.

5.4.1 Description of accompanying material

An accompanying material statement may be given either in the terms in which it appears
in the resource described, by a word or phrase indicating the nature of the material, or by
means of an appropriate specific material designation.
Examples
. — 96 p. ; 8º (16 cm, publisher’s binding) + 1 price list
. — 1 map : col. ; 108 x 73 cm, folded to 30 x 21 cm + 1 memoir
. — 1 globe : col. ; 23 cm (diam.) + 1 gazetteer
. — 271 p. : ill. ; 21 cm + 1 list of works
. — 1 filmstrip (43 fr.) : col. and b&w ; 35 mm + teacher's notes
. — 1 wallchart : col. ; 65 x 97 cm + chart notes
. — 1 sound disc (55 min) : 33 1/3 rpm, mono ; 30 cm + 1 pamphlet
. — 2 electronic disks ; 14 cm + 1 pamphlet
. — 180 p. : ill. ; 23 cm + 1 wallchart + 3 maps
. — 20 maps on 1 CD-ROM : sd., col. ; 12 cm + 1 sound cassette
. — vol. : ill. ; 31 cm + weekly price list
. — 1 score (92 p.) ; 31 cm + 4 parts
. — 1 score (329 p.) ; 34 cm + 25 parts + 1 libretto

5.4.2 Short physical description

A short physical description of the accompanying material may be given after the word or
phrase characterizing the material. The material is described according to the provisions
of 5.1 to 5.3.
Examples
. — 47 slides : col. ; 5 x 5 cm + 1 sound cassette (25 min : mono)
. — 1 map on 4 sheets ; sheets 25 x 38 cm + 1 manual (10 p. ; 30 cm)
. — vol. : ill. ; 28 cm + electronic disks (sd., col. ; 9 cm)
. — 47 vol. : ill., maps ; 27 cm + 114 microfiches (11 x 15 cm)
. — 271 p. : ill. ; 21 cm + 3 microfiches (diazo ; 11 x 11 cm)
. — 2 electronic disks ; 9 cm + 1 user manual (110 p. ; 23 cm)

5.4.3 Alternative description of accompanying material

Alternatively, accompanying material may be described by
a) describing it independently (i.e. in a separate description);

183
5 ISBD 2011

or
b) describing it in a note (see area 7);
or
c) describing it by the multilevel method of description (see Appendix A).

184
ISBD 2011 6

6 SERIES AND MULTIPART MONOGRAPHIC RESOURCE AREA

Introductory note
The series and multipart monographic resource area includes the title proper of a series or
multipart monographic resource, parallel title of a series or multipart monographic
resource, other title information of a series or multipart monographic resource, statement
of responsibility relating to a series or multipart monographic resource, international
standard number of a series or multipart monographic resource, and numbering within a
series or multipart monographic resource.
The series area is used when the resource being described belongs to a larger
bibliographic resource: series or multipart monographic resource.
Especially important to note is the explanation of the terms common title and dependent
title that states that these terms, as used in the stipulations, cover the following situations:
(a) a common title with a section title, (b) a main series with a subseries, and (c) a
common title with a dependent title of a multipart monographic resources.
When a resource belongs to more than one larger bibliographic resource, area 6 contains
more than one series statement. The order of the statements is determined by the order of
preference of the sources for the area; if these are of equal value, the order follows the
sequence of information found on the chosen source.
A continuing resource or a multipart monographic resource may be part of a larger series.

Contents
6.1 Title proper of a series or multipart monographic resource
6.2 Parallel title of a series or multipart monographic resource
6.3 Other title information of a series or multipart monographic resource
6.4 Statement of responsibility relating to a series or multipart monographic
resource
6.5 International standard number of a series or multipart monographic resource
6.6 Numbering within a series or multipart monographic resource

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. Each series statement is enclosed in parentheses ( ( ) ).
C. A second and each subsequent series statement is preceded by a space.
D. Each parallel title or other parallel statement is preceded by a space, equals sign,
space ( = ).
E. Each statement of other title information is preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ).
F. The first statement of responsibility is preceded by a space, diagonal slash, space ( / ).
G. Each subsequent statement of responsibility is preceded by a space, semicolon, space
( ; ), unless the statements are considered to form a single phrase.
H. The international standard number is preceded by a comma, space (, ).
I. Numbering within a series or multipart monographic resource is preceded by a space,
semicolon, space ( ; ).

185
6 ISBD 2011

J. The section or subseries designation or dependent title following a common title is

preceded by a point, space (. ).
K. The dependent title following a section or subseries designation is preceded by a
comma, space (, ).
Punctuation patterns
. — (Title proper of first series) (Title proper of second series)
. — (Title proper of series = Parallel title of series)
. — (Title proper of series / statement of responsibility relating to
series ; numbering within series)
. — (Title proper of series : other title information of series / statement
of responsibility relating to series ; numbering within series)
. — (Title proper of series, ISSN ; numbering within series)
. — (Common title. Section, subseries or multipart monographic
resource designation, Dependent title)
. — (Common title. Dependent title = Parallel common title. Parallel
dependent title)
. — (Title proper of series, ISSN ; numbering within series = parallel
numbering within series)
. — (Title proper of series, ISSN ; numbering within series = Parallel
title of series ; parallel numbering within series)
. — (Title of series. Title of subseries ; numbering within subseries)
. — (Title of series. Title of subseries / statement of responsibility
relating to subseries, ISSN of subseries ; numbering within
subseries)
. — (Title proper of multipart monographic resource, ISBN ; numbering
within multipart monographic resource)

Prescribed sources

For printed textual and notated music resources:

Series title page, analytical title page, first page of music, other
preliminaries, cover, colophon, the rest of the resource

For older monographic resources:

Series title page, analytical title page, title-page substitute, colophon

For printed cartographic resources, multimedia resources,

sound recordings, videorecordings, still and moving
images, and electronic resources:
The resource itself, container, accompanying material
The preferred source of information is the series title page or the title page for the
multipart monographic resource. If there is no such title page, the preferred sources of
information for continuing resources and multipart monographic resources given in A.4.2
are used.

186
ISBD 2011

Information taken from a source other than one of the prescribed sources is given in
square brackets.

187
6 ISBD 2011

6.1 Title proper of a series or multipart monographic resource

Mandatory if available
The title proper of a series or multipart monographic resource corresponds to the title
proper in the bibliographic description of the larger bibliographic resource if it were
described as a serial or multipart monographic resource according to the provisions of
area 1. It is transcribed exactly as to wording, but not necessarily as to capitalization and
punctuation. Typographical errors are not corrected. If not all parts of a serial or multipart
monographic resource are in the same larger bibliographic resource, an indication may be
given of which parts of the resource are in each larger bibliographic resource.
Examples
. — (Pepys series)
. — (Great newspapers reprinted)
. — (Interactive digital computer teaching models)
. — (Acta Universitatis Carolinae. Philologica)
. — (Viewmaster science series. 4, Physics)
. — (Problems and progress in development)
Editorial comment: Subseries with distinctive title; main series:
Commonwealth and international library (see 7.6.2)
. — (Bibliothèque française et romane. Série B, Éditions critiques de
textes)
Editorial comment: Subseries with dependent title.
. — (Archives Blaise Cendrars)
Editorial comment: Subseries with distinctive title; main series: Archives des
lettres modernes (see 7.6.2)
. — (Atlas ethno-linguistique. 2e série, Monographies)
. — (Plan Guide Blay)
. — (JRO-Panoramakarte)
. — (Guides et plans Edicart's)
. — (L'enseignement moderne du saxophone)
. — (Neue Musik für Solo-Instrumente)
. — (Collection Trésors classiques)
. — (Beatrix Potter jigsaw puzzles)
. — (Interactive digital computer teaching models)
. — (Canadian travel surveys)
. — (The lord of the rings ; part 3)
. — (Selected works of Rudyard Kipling ; vol. 2)
. — (Carte géologique de la France à 1:50 000 ; IV-19)
. — (Collected works of Muzio Clementi ; vol. 2)
. — (L'arte in diapositive ; no 1)
. — (Dune ; vol. 4)

188
ISBD 2011

6.2 Parallel title of a series or multipart monographic resource

6.2.1 When the title proper of a series or multipart monographic resource appears
in more than one language and/or script, the parallel series title or titles may be given.
Parallel titles are given if they are necessary for identification or otherwise considered
important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
. — (Modern cinema = Cinéma moderne)
. — (Статистические про блемы управления = Statistical problems
of control)
. — (Материалы к познанию фауны и флоры СССР =
Contributiones pro fauna et flora URPSS = Contributions à la
connaissance de la faune et la flore de l’URSS = Proceedings on
the study of the fauna and flora of the USSR)
. — (International map of the world 1:1 000 000 = Carte internationale
du monde au 1:1 000 000)
. — (Travaux de recherche en science sociale = Research
monographs in the social sciences)
. — (Corpus iuris sueo-gotorum antiqui = Samling af Sweriges gamla
lagar)
. — (現代日本音楽選 = The galaxy of contemporary Japanese music)
6.2.2 If the title proper is made up of a common title and a dependent title or
titles, the parallel common title or titles and the parallel dependent title or titles, if given,
are transcribed following the common title and dependent title.
Example
. — (Sounds of the theatre. Music = Voci del teatro. La musica)

189
ISBD 2011

6.3 Other title information of a series or multipart monographic

resource
6.3.1 Other title information or parallel other title information relating to a series
or multipart monographic resource is given when it appears on the prescribed source of
information and if it is necessary for identification of the larger bibliographic resource or
otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
. — (Die Reihe : Delikte, Indizien, Ermittlungen)
. — (Words : their origin, use, and spelling)
. — (English linguistics, 1500-1750 : a collection of facsimile reprints)
. — (Collection I.P.N. : les industries, leurs productions, leurs
nuisances)
. — (Old Ordnance Survey maps : the Godfrey edition)
. — (Die Gitarre : Stücke europäischer Meister)
. — (Introduction to technology : medieval to modern times)
6.3.2 When the title proper consists of a common title and a dependent title,
other title information relating to the dependent title, may be given following the
dependent title. Other title information relating to the common title is omitted or may be
given in area 7.
Examples
. — (Pricing and buying. Module 5, Patterns : automobile prices)
. — (Enquêtes et recherches statistiques. Canada)
Editorial comment : Other title information relating to common title: Travaux
en cours
6.3.3 An edition statement relating to a series or subseries is given as other title
information when necessary for identification of the series. It is given according to the
provisions of area 2.
Examples
. — (Sammlung Göschen : 2. Ausg.)
. — (National atlas : separate sales ed.)
. — (Computer simulation models : 2nd ed.)

191
ISBD 2011

6.4 Statement of responsibility relating to a series or multipart

monographic resource
6.4.1 If the title proper of a series or multipart monographic resource is a generic
term, the first statement of responsibility is given. In other cases, the first and subsequent
statements of responsibility are given if they are necessary for identification of the larger
bibliographic resource or otherwise considered important to users of the catalogue.
Parallel statements of responsibility may be given.
Examples
. — (Map supplement / Association of American Geographers)
. — (Research monographs / Institute of Economic Affairs)
. — (Sämtliche Werke / Thomas Mann)
. — (Collected software / American University, English Language
Institute)
. — (Technical report / Forest Engineering Research Institute of
Canada = Institut canadien de recherches en génie forestier)
. — (Miscellaneous report / Geological survey of Canada = Rapport
divers / Commission géologique du Canada)
. — (Dzieła wszystkie = Complete works / Fryderyk Chopin)
. — (Research reports / Canadian Transport Commission, Research
Branch = Commission canadienne des transports, Direction de la
recherche)
. — (交響曲全集 / ベートーヴェン)
. — (연구총서 / 한국교회연구소)
6.4.2 When the title proper consists of a common title and a dependent title, the
statement or statements of responsibility, if given, are given according to 1.4.5.12.

193
ISBD 2011

6.5 International standard number of a series or multipart

monographic resource
Mandatory if available
6.5.1 An international standard number relating to a series or multipart
monographic resource of which a resource is a part is given when it is known, preceded
by its customary label.
Examples
. — (Graeco-Roman memoirs, ISSN 0306-9222)
. — (Transactions of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, ISSN 0080-4568)
. — (Actualités scientifiques et industrielles, ISSN 0365-6861)
. — (Elsevier's interactive anatomy, ISSN 0929-2225)
. — (Manuskripte des Geographischen Instituts der FU Berlin, ISSN
0170-6268)
. — (Spiritualités vivantes. Série Christianisme, ISSN 0291-9044)
. — (Historia de España, ISBN 978-84-413-2761-0)
6.5.2 When the title proper of the series or multipart monographic resource
consists of a common title or main series and a dependent title, the international standard
number of the common title or main series is omitted in area 6 and may be given in area 7
(see 7.6.1).
Examples
. — (Dunántúli tudományos gyüjtemény. Series historica, ISSN 0475-
9923)
Note: ISSN of main series: ISSN 0475-9915
. — (Classic orators. Europe, ISSN 0082-927X)
Note: ISSN of main series: ISSN 0081-1236
. — (Der Landkreis. Ausgabe Hessen, ISSN 0340-3246)
Note: ISSN of main series: ISSN 0342-2259

195
6 ISBD 2011

6.6 Numbering within a series or multipart monographic resource

6.6.1 The numbering of the resource within a series or multipart monographic
resource is given in the terms in which it appears on the source of information. Standard
abbreviations may be used. Arabic numerals are given in place of other numerals or
spelled-out numbers. When the numbering of the resource contains both roman and
arabic numerals, the numerals are transcribed as they appear.
Examples
. — (Historic instruments at the Victoria and Albert Museum ; 4)
. — (Russian titles for the specialist, ISSN 0305-3741 ; no. 78)
. — (Труды Московского общества испытателей природы ; т. 41)
. — (Studia islandica ; 13. hefti)
. — (La bibliothèque bleue entièrement refondue & considérablement
augmentée ; no 3)
. — (Collection des plans anciens de Paris ; 1)
. — (Plan net ; S75)
. — (Carte de la Région Ile-de-France ; X-3)
. — (Eulenburg general music series ; 705)
. — (Musik alter Meister ; Heft 1)
. — (Forsytesagaen ; 1)
. — (A Sunday Times guide to Shakespeare's characters ; 7)
. — (At-a-flash time line cards ; set 2)
. — (Beatrix Potter jigsaw puzzles ; no. 1)
. — (Multimedia learning series ; vol. 2)
. — (Visit Canada series ; vol. C)
. — (Computer simulation games ; module 5)
. — (Liederblätter deutscher Jugend, ISSN 0342-4820 ; Heft 22)
. — (合唱名曲コレクション ; D 11)
. — (일론의 땅 시리즈 ; 3탄)
. — (文科紀要 / 東北大学教養部, ISSN 0495-7210 ; 10集)
. — (우리문학연구 총서, ISSN 1229-7429 ; 2)
6.6.2 When the title proper of the larger bibliographic resource consists of a
common title and a dependent title or subseries, the numbering of the common title is
omitted and the numbering of the dependent title or subseries is given after the dependent
title or subseries. The numbering of the common title may be given in area 7.
Examples
. — (Publications of the University of Manchester. Administration
series ; no. 1)
Note: Numbering in the main series: 244
. — (Geological research reports. Map series ; no. 3)
Note: Numbering in the main series: 135

196
ISBD 2011

. — (Das Erbe deutscher Musik. Abteilung Oper und Sologesang ; Bd.

8)
Note: Numbering in the main series: 68
. — (Arte moderna straniera. Serie C, Disegnatori ; n. 1)
Note: Numbering in the main series: n. 8

6.6.3 Multipart monographic resource within a series

When the parts of a multipart monographic resource within a series are numbered within
the series, the numbering of the first and last parts is given and connected by a hyphen
when the numbering is continuous. In other cases, the numbering of each part is given,
separated by commas.
Examples
; vol. 11-15
; vol. 131, 145, 152
; 4-7
; 2, 6, 13
; A-F
; vol. 10-13
; A, C, M
; 2051-2059
6.6.4 If the numbering appears in more than one language, it is given following
the title proper or parallel title in that language, as appropriate.

6.6.5 Serial within a series

6.6.5.1 When all issues or parts of a serial within a series or subseries have the
same series number, this number is given in the series statement.
Example
. — (Public Health Service publication ; no. 1124)
Editorial comment: Each issue of the annual Bibliography on smoking and
health has the same series number.
6.6.5.2 If each issue or part of a serial within a series has different numbering, the
numbering is not given in area 6. The numbering may be explained in area 7.

197
ISBD 2011 7

7 NOTE AREA

Introductory note
The note area contains any descriptive information that has not been given in other areas
of the description but that is considered to be important to users of bibliographic records.
Notes qualify and amplify the description in the other areas and can deal with any aspect
of a resource. Notes may also give the bibliographic history of the resource and indicate
relationships to other resources.
In making reference to another resource in a note, enough information must be given to
identify the resource. This may vary depending on the resource and the context of the
note. For continuing resources, the citation may consist of the key title and ISSN. In
other cases, it may consist of the title proper along with a statement of responsibility or
other bibliographic details.
Notes, by their nature, cannot be enumerated exhaustively, but can be categorized in
terms of the areas of the ISBD. In addition to notes relating to these areas, there may be
notes relating to the description of the resource that do not correspond to any specific
ISBD area.
Except where otherwise indicated, notes and their order of presentation are optional.
Two or more notes may be combined into a single note when considered appropriate by
the cataloguing agency.

Contents
7.0 Notes on the content form and media type area and for special types of
materials
7.1 Notes on the title and statement of responsibility area
7.2 Notes on the edition area and the bibliographic history of the resource
7.3 Notes on the material or type of resource specific area
7.4 Notes on the publication, production, distribution, etc., area
7.5 Notes on the material description area
7.6 Notes on the series and multipart monographic resource area
7.7 Notes on the contents
7.8 Notes on the resource identifier and terms of availability area
7.9 Notes on the issue, part, iteration, etc., that forms the basis of the description
7.10 Other notes
7.11 Notes relating to the copy in hand

Prescribed punctuation
For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2. Each note is separated from the
next one by a point, space, dash, space (. — ). When each note is given in a separate
paragraph, these punctuation marks are omitted, or replaced by a point at the end of the
note.
Within notes it is recommended, where appropriate, that the prescribed punctuation of
areas 1-6 be followed; for example, a title is separated from a statement of responsibility
by a space, slash, space ( / ). The areas of description of a resource within a note are
separated by a point and a space.

199
7 ISBD 2011

When the key title and ISSN of a serial or ongoing integrating resource are given in the
note area, they are connected by a space, equals sign, space ( = ); when the title proper
and the ISSN are given, the ISSN is preceded by a comma, space (, ).

Prescribed source
Any source

200
ISBD 2011 7.0.3

7.0 Notes on the content form and media type area and for special
types of material

7.0.1 Notes on the content form and media type area

Notes on the content form and media type area may be given if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue.17

7.0.2 Bibliographic reference note (Older monographic resources)

A bibliographic reference note is given as the first note. The note contains a citation,
given in a standard and abbreviated form, to a description of the resource in a list
describing older monographic resources. The note may contain more than one citation.
Examples
. — Schramm, A., Bilderschmuck, v. 4, p. 10, 50, and ill.
. — ESTC S126474
When the information is available, the note should always be given for incunabula, and
preferably given in the description of any early printed book.

7.0.3 Frequency statement (Continuing resources)

A note of the frequency of a serial or the frequency of updates to an integrating resource
is given when the frequency is not stated in area 1.
Examples
. — Bimonthly
. — Irregular
. — Monthly (July-August issues combined)
. — Continuously updated
. — Four times each term
. — Triweekly during the academic year
. — Updated weekly
When the frequency is stated in area 1, it may be repeated in area 7 if it is necessary to
convey some additional information.
Example
. — Weekly (10 issues each semester)
Title proper: The Mac weekly
When the frequency of a continuing resource is unknown, a note Frequency unknown is
given.
Changes in the frequency of a serial or the frequency of updates to an integrating resource
may be given in the note.
Example
. — Quarterly as from 1975, no. 1-

17 Examples of such notes may be added as experience with the new area is gained.
201
7 ISBD 2011

7.0.4 System requirements (Electronic resources)

A note on system requirements for use of the resource is given as the first note for all
direct-access electronic resources when appropriate.
These requirements may include one or more technical specifications, usually given in
the following order, and preceded by System requirements: (or its equivalent in another
language): name, model and/or number of machine or machines; amount of memory;
name of the operating system or systems; software requirements (including programming
language); peripherals; hardware (internal) modifications; character code. Each
requirement, other than the first, is preceded by a semicolon.
When the resource consists of two or more different physical carriers (e.g. a multimedia
resource consisting of an electronic disk and a videodisc), a separate system requirements
note may be made to highlight distinctive system features associated with each physical
carrier. Alternatively, the cataloguing agency may choose to make a single system
requirements note for both physical carriers.
Examples
. — System requirements: Macintosh; at least 1 MB; System 6.0.5 or
later; HyperCard version 1.0 or later; hard disk drive; videodisc
player (Pioneer 2200, 4200, 6000A, 6010A, 8000); RS232 cable
connector (from Macintosh to videodisc player)
Editorial comment: Single system requirements note for different physical
carriers (electronic disk and videodisc).
. — System requirements for electronic disk: Macintosh; at least 1 MB;
System 6.0.5 or later; HyperCard version 1.0 or later; hard disk
drive; connector cable (from Macintosh to videodisc player)
Editorial comment: Separate system requirements note for different physical
carrier.
. — System requirements: Requires BinHex 4.0 to convert binary file
. — System requirements: 386SX processor or higher; 2 MB RAM (4
MB recommended); Windows 3.0 or higher; hard disk with 8 MB
free space; VGA adapter; col. monitor; mouse
. — System requirements: UNIX workstation with Mosaic software
. — System requirements: Philips Interactive compact disc (CD-I)
player with monitor
. — System requirements: No information available
. — Character code: UTF-8
. — Character code: Japanese (ISO-2022-JP)

7.0.5 Mode of access (Electronic resources)

A note relating to mode of access is given for all remote-access electronic resources.
Mode of access is given as the first note unless a system requirements note (see 7.0.4) is
present. It is preceded by Mode of access: (or its equivalent in another language).
Examples
. — Mode of access: Lexis system. Requires subscription to Mead
Data Central, Inc.
. — Mode of access: World Wide Web. URL: http://www.un.org
. — Mode of access: Mikenet
202
ISBD 2011 7.1.1.2

7.1 Notes on the title and statement of responsibility area

7.1.1 Notes on the title proper

7.1.1.1 Source of the title proper

When the source of the title proper of a printed resource is other than the title page, the
source is given in a note.
Examples
. — Title from cover
. — Title from caption
. — Title from publisher's catalogue
. — Title from A list of maps of America / P.L. Phillips, p. 502
. — Title supplied by cataloguer

For multimedia resources, sound recordings,

videorecordings, and still and moving images:
When the source of the title proper is other than a source permanently
associated with the resource, the source is given in a note.
Examples
. — Title from container
. — Title from descriptive insert

For electronic resources:

The source of the title proper is given in all cases.
Examples
. — Title from title screen
. — Title from codebook
. — Title from disc label
. — Title from first display of information
. — Title from TEI header
. — Title from printout of title screen
. — Title from subject line of email header
. — Title from homepage

7.1.1.2 Notes giving variant titles

Notes on variant titles are given if they are considered important to users of the catalogue.
Examples
. — Title on spine: Oliver!
. — Title proper romanized: Zolotoj telenok
. — Title on sleeve: William Shakespeare, 1564–1964
. — Title in left margin: Ville de Aix-les-Bains, Savoie
203
7 ISBD 2011

. — Title on cover: Schweinfurt Stadtplan

Title proper on map: Stadt Schweinfurt
. — Sheets for 1921–1924 have title: Official road map of metropolitan
district; 1930–1941: Greater metropolitan district; 1950–1963,
Official road map New York and vicinity
Editorial comment: Most recent sheets have title: New York City and
vicinity.
. — Title on codebook: New Democratic Party of Ontario, 1967
. — Title on container: Interactive cells
. — Title on added title page: To the English gentrie
. — File name: DUB.1
. — Title on second title screen: Personal finances and other
applications
. — Title on disc label: Journal of the U.S. House of Representatives
Title proper: Journal of the House of Representatives of the United
States
. — At head of title: Bizmap navigator
Title proper: Singapore yellow pages with electronic maps.
. — Some issues have also title in German: Hobbes OS/2 archiviert
Title proper: Hobbes archived OS/2.
. — Title bar title: Antarctic Meteorology Research Center home page
. — Title on engraved title page: Dittionario italiano
. — At head of title: "Un professionnel de l'auto vous dit ... "
Title proper: “Je roule sans accident!“

7.1.1.3 Expansion of initialisms, acronyms, and numbers in title proper

When the title proper consists of or includes an initialism or an acronym (see 1.1.3.3) and
the expanded form of the initialism or acronym is not given in area 1 (see 1.3.3), the
expanded form may be given in a note.
Examples
. — Expanded form of title proper: Interrogation recording and location
system
Title proper: IRLS
. — Expanded form of title proper: Kantoor en efficiency
Title proper: K. en E.
When the title proper consists of or includes numbers (see 1.1.3.5), the expanded form
may be given in a note.
Example
. — Expanded form of title proper: Le zéro un
Title proper: Le 01

204
ISBD 2011

7.1.1.4 Changes to the title proper

7.1.1.4.1 Serials
Major changes to the title proper of a serial require a new description (see A.2.6). For
notes on major changes to the title proper of a serial resulting from or leading to changes
in its bibliographic history, see 7.2.
Notes on minor changes to the title proper that occur after the first or earliest issue or part
are given together with the numbering of the respective issues or parts, if they are
necessary for identification of the serial or otherwise considered important to users of the
catalogue. Alternatively, a note that the title proper varies is given. A general note may
be given when scattered issues or parts have a different title proper.
Examples
. — Issues for 1999- have title: Annual report on pipeline safety
Title proper of earliest issue: Annual report of pipeline safety
. — Issues for Jan. 1928-July 1952 have title: The magazine antiques;
issues for Aug. 1952-Feb. 1971 have title: Antiques; issues for Mar.
1971- have title: The magazine antiques
Title proper of earliest issue: Antiques
. — Some issues have title: Viet-Nam bulletin
Title proper of earliest issue: Vietnam bulletin
. — Some issues have title: SLIS newsletter
Title proper of earliest issue: Newsletter
. — Vols. for 1995- have title: Tax strategies for corporate
acquisitions, dispositions, spin-offs, joint ventures, financings,
reorganizations, and restructuring (varies slightly)
Title proper of earliest issue: Tax strategies for corporate acquisitions,
dispositions, spin-offs, joint ventures and other strategic alliances
. — Issues for Oct./Dec. 1995- have title: African woman & health
Title proper of earliest issue: African women & health
. — Title varies slightly

7.1.1.4.2 Integrating resources

Notes are made on titles appearing on earlier iterations of the same integrating resource.
Examples
. — Title history: Australian industrial safety, health & welfare, 1979-
Mar. 1996
. — Former titles: Euroinfo international (viewed on May 10, 1998);
Telephone directories international (viewed on Sept. 9, 1999)

7.1.1.4.3 Multipart monographic resources

If the title proper of a multipart monographic resource changes on a part or parts after the
one chosen as the basis of the description, the new title is given in a note.

205
7 ISBD 2011

Example
. — Title on vols. 4- : Histoire de la Grande-Bretagne
Title proper: Histoire de l’Angleterre

7.1.2 Notes on the nature, scope, form, purpose or language of the

resource
7.1.2.1 If the nature, purpose, scope, or literary, artistic or musical form cannot be
inferred from other elements of the description, a note may be given.
Examples
. — Play in 3 acts
. — Poems
. — Thesis (doctoral)–Freie Universität Berlin, 1973
. — Computer game
. — Computer program
. — Programme of performances for the season
Title proper: City Theatre
. — English madrigals
. — Two pieces for guitar
. — For string orchestra or string quartet
. — For 4-6 voices
. — Originally for piano
. — Documentary production
. — Historical time-chart
. — Interactive adventure game
. — Spreadsheet, with word processing and graphics capabilities
. — Simulation model of the U.S. economy structured after the
Wharton Econometric Model
. — Combined time series analysis and graph plotting system
. — Gray-scale image processing program
. — Internet news service
. — "Not for navigation"
. — Shows dioceses
. — Shows names of owners of buildings and other real estate
. — Shows radial distances from City Hall
. — Also shows mineral deposits
Editorial comment: Map has title “Road map ... ”
. — Shows southernmost extent of the midnight sun

7.1.2.2 Notes on language

A note on language is necessary only if the linguistic content is significant and the
language of the content cannot be inferred from other elements of the description.

206
ISBD 2011 7.1.3

Examples
. — Legend in English, French and German
. — Legend in 12 languages
. — Text in Greek, English and German; place names in Greek and
romanized Greek
. — Text in English and French
. — Preface in Danish and English
. — Screen displays in French and English
. — Parallel Italian and French texts
. — Papers in English or Japanese; summaries in English
. — Text in German; summaries and tables of contents in Russian and
French
. — In Azerbaijani (Cyrillic)
. — French dialogue, English subtitles
. — Dubbed into English
. — Closed-captioned

7.1.3 Notes on parallel titles and parallel other title information

Parallel titles and parallel other title information may be given in a note when they are not
recorded in area 1.
Examples
. — Issues for July/Aug. 1962-Sept./Oct. 1966 have title also in Chinese:
Wen hua
. — Issues for Oct. 1975- have title in English: The half-yearly law
review
Editorial comment: English parallel title on earlier issues: Law quarterly
review.
. — Title in four additional languages
. — French title from title screen: Les techniques de la prévision à
court terme
. — Title on added title page: Introduction à la langue française
. — English title from container: The four seasons
. — Other title information from container: Songs of redemption

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

Information on parallel titles or parallel other title information
appearing on later parts of a serial or multipart monographic resource
may be given in a note together with the numbering of the respective
issues or parts if it is considered important to users of the catalogue.
Alternatively, a note that parallel titles and/or parallel other title
information vary may be given (see 1.2.5.6, 1.3.4.9).

207
7 ISBD 2011

For integrating resources:

Information on parallel titles or parallel other title information
appearing on earlier iterations of an integrating resource (including the
lack of a parallel title or titles on earlier iterations) may be given in a
note if it is considered important to users of the catalogue (see 1.2.5.6,
1.3.4.9).

7.1.4 Notes on the statements of responsibility

Notes on the statements of responsibility may include:
 statements of responsibility taken from outside the resource, its container or
accompanying textual matter;
 notes on variant or expanded forms of names of persons or corporate bodies, notes
on pseudonyms, notes on persons or corporate bodies connected with the work
that cannot be included in other areas of the description (because, for example,
their function is not specified);
 statements of responsibility relating to appendices and other supplementary matter
appearing on the resource but not on a prescribed source of information (see
1.4.4.4);
 notes on the staging, instrumentation, etc., of performed works;
 notes on persons or bodies connected with the technical production, administrative
and consulting functions of the work.
Examples
. — Attributed to Jonathan Swift
. — By Voltaire
. — Drawings by Gordon Davey
. — Full name of author: Mignon Good Eberhart
. — Full name of the institute: Professional Institute of the Public
Service of Canada
Title proper: Journal of the Professional Institute
. — At head of title: Dept. of Defence
. — Issues [1]– compiled by: Truong Ky
. — Attributed to Blaeu by C. Koeman in: Atlantes Neerlandici, vol....,
p...
. — Prepared by State Highway Dept. 1925–1948; prepared by
General Drafting Co. 1949–1955; prepared by Engineering
Services 1965; prepared by National Survey 1961–1962; prepared
by State Highway Dept. 1963–1969; prepared by Dept. of
Transportation 1970-
. — "Ground control was supplied by U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey"
. — "Plotted ... by G. Petrie and D.P. Nicol, University of Glasgow,
1965. Field reconnaissance, 1962, and geomorphological
interpretation by R.J. Price as part of Project No. 1469 of the
Institute of Polar Studies, the Ohio State University"
. — Drawings by Inigo Jones
. — Real name of author: Alexander Wolcott
208
ISBD 2011 7.1.4.1

. — Label on container reads: The Schools Council

. — Data collected in collaboration with Christiane Klapisch, École
pratique des hautes études, Paris
. — Animated by Gary Simski ; consultation provided by Micro
Industries
. — Systems designer, Henry Letow ; sound, LF Acoustics
. — Label on container reads: Arizona Arts and Science Council
. — Content developed by Charles Lytle and William Surver ;
videodisc and HyperCard stack design by J. Mark Turner ;
HyperCard stack programming by Helen Brooks
. — Presenter and essayist: Alan Rich
. — Programmer, Leslie Olfson ; reference manual, Jean Fakourey
. — Played on an 1841 Erard concert grand
. — Adaptation, Louis Daquin and André Cerf ; dialogue, Roger
Vaillant ; music, Jean Wiener ; sound, Lucien Legrand ; decor,
Paul Bertrand ; Madeleine Robinson (Julie Moret), Albert Préjean
(Léon Bouquinquant), Roger Pigaut (Pierre Bouquinquant), Jean
Vilar (The Priest)
. — René Forest, violoncello (1st-2nd works) ; Anton Hammer, horn
(3rd work) ; RIAS-Sinfonietta Berlin ; David Atherton (last 2 works),
Jiri Starek (remainder), conductors

7.1.4.1 Changes in statements of responsibility

For multipart monographic resources:

If there is a change to the statement of responsibility after the first or
earliest part of a multipart monographic resource and the new
information is necessary for identification or otherwise considered
important to users of the catalogue, a note is given.

For serials:
If there is a change to the statement of responsibility on later issues of a
serial that does not require a new description (see A.2.7) and it is
necessary for identification of the serial or otherwise considered
important to users of the catalogue, a note is given.

For integrating resources:

If an earlier statement of responsibility that is no longer present on the
current iteration, or that appeared in a different form on an earlier
iteration, is considered important to users of the catalogue, a note is
given. If the changes have been numerous, a general note may be
given.
Examples
. — Former editor: Matija Babić
. — Editor varies

209
7 ISBD 2011

7.1.4.2 Source of statement of responsibility

If a statement of responsibility has been transcribed from a source other than the
preferred source of information, the source of the statement may be given in a note.
Example
. — Author statement taken from title page verso

For older monographic resources:

If the statement of responsibility does not appear directly after the title
statement on the preferred source of information, its position is
described in a note. Statements of responsibility taken from outside the
resource are given in a note with the source of such information.
Example
. — Author's name at head of title page
. — By Ezechiel Spanheim. Source: Deutsches
Anonymen-Lexikon / Michael Holzmann und Hanns
Bohatta, Bd. 1, S. 409, Nr. 11863

210
ISBD 2011 7.2.3

7.2 Notes on the edition area and the bibliographic history of the
resource

7.2.1 Source of the edition statement

Notes on the source of the edition statement or the statement of responsibility relating to
the edition may be given.

For older monographic resources:

When edition information has been obtained from a source other than a
prescribed source of information or from part of the preferred source of
information preceding the title and statement of responsibility, the
source from which such information has been obtained is given in a
note.
Example
. — Edition statement from colophon

For electronic resources:

If the edition statement of an electronic resource is taken from a source
different from the source of the title proper, the source of the edition
statement is given in a note.
Examples
. — Edition statement from booklet
. — Edition statement from disk label

7.2.2 Changes to the edition area

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

Changes in edition statements that occur after the issue or part used as
the basis of description and do not require a new description are given
in a note if they are considered important to users of the catalogue.

For integrating resources:

Earlier edition statements that are no longer present on the current
iteration or that are in a different form on an earlier iteration and do not
require a new description (see A.2.7.2) are given in a note if they are
considered important to users of the catalogue.

7.2.3 Bibliographic history of the resource

Notes relating to the edition being described or the bibliographic history of the work may
be given.
Examples
. — Originally published: London : J. Tonson, 1747
. — Originally issued in 1965

211
7 ISBD 2011

. — Previously published as: The players of Null-A. London : Dodson,

1970; originally published as: The pawns of Null-A. New York :
Street and Smith, 1948
. — Formerly available as: CAS 675
. — Reprint of the second edition: London : [s.n.], 1760
. — Offprint from: Physical review ; 2nd series, vol. 70, no. 5-6,
September 1 & 15, 1946
. — Reproduced from the map published by Nicolas Berey in Paris
1663
. — Reproduction of: Johannis Hevelii Uranographia totum coelum
stellatum. Gedani, 1690
. — Facsimile reproduction of the first edition: St. Omer : [s.n.], 1610
. — Facsimile reproduction from a ms. original in the National Map
Collection, Public Archives of Canada
. — Based on the book of the same title by Ludwig Bemelmans
. — Based on: The treasure of Franchard / by Robert Louis Stevenson
. — Adaptation of: Draculus. 1994
. — Revised version of the filmstrip issued in 1969 under title: Maps
and atlas survey
. — Edited version of 1972 motion picture entitled: The miracle of Bali :
a recital of music and dancing
. — "Information from official map reproduced under Government
Printer's Copyright No. 4219 on 9/10/69"
. — Copy of original in Archivo General de Indias, Sevilla
. — Program first issued by Educational Software in 1994
. — Electronic version of the print publication issued in 1989
. — Digital reproduction of the publication issued in 1522
. — Earlier parts of text published in 1984 and 1987 are digitised and
made available online
. — Replicates survey conducted in 1993 by author
. — On container: Multimedia master version of the original 1985 two
videodisc version
. — Resource copied Oct. 1996 from local area network
. — Revised edition of: Mental capacity : medical and legal aspects of
the aging. 1977
. — "Map based on uncontrolled aerial photography flown 1972. Map
field checked 1973"
. — Originally issued in Environmental science series
. — Recorded in London, Abbey Road, No. 1 studio, August 1965

7.2.4 Relationships to other resources

7.2.4.1 Translations
When the work contained in the resource is known to be a translation, the original title of
the work, or, where appropriate, the key title and ISSN, is given in area 7 (see also 1.2.4).
When the translation is known to be a translation of a particular edition of a work with its
212
ISBD 2011 7.2.4.2

own title, this title is given first and may be followed by the title of the original work
translated. When the resource contains several individual works, the translation notes
may be included in the contents note.
For notes on the language of the title, see 7.1.2.2.
For editions of a resource appearing simultaneously in different languages, see 7.2.4.3.
Examples
. — Translation of: La muerte de Artemio Cruz
. — Originally published as: Five on Kirrin Island again
. — Translation of: Gulliver's travels
. — Original title: Dissertatio physica de natura et remediis fulminum
. — Original title: North Land footprints, or, Lives on Little Bent Tree
Lake; translated from the French
Editorial comment: Original English text translated first into French, then
into Croatian.
. — Original title: Kira kira hikaru; translated into Finnish from the
English translation: Twinkle twinkle
. — Translation of: Radiohimiâ = ISSN 0033-8311
Title proper: Soviet radiochemistry

7.2.4.2 Reproductions
When the resource is an exact reproduction of another resource (for example, a facsimile
reproduction or other photographic (or micro-) reproduction of a printed title, a sound
cassette copy of a sound disc, a videotape reproduction of a motion picture, a digitisation)
a note is given that the resource is a reproduction (see A.2.5). The title of the original
resource (when different from the title of the reproduction) and its publication details are
given; the frequency of the original resource may also be given.
Examples
. — Reproduction of the monthly publication, Paris : Librairie
Rouquette
Areas 1-5: Le banquet. — Reprod. [en fac-sim.]. — No 1 (mars 1892)-
no 8 (mars 1893). — Genève : Slatkine, 1971. — 23 cm
. — Reproduction of the monthly, later bimonthly, publication, Paris :
H. Lemoine
Areas 1-5: Le pianiste : [journal spécial, analytique et instructif]. —
[Reprod. en fac-sim.]. — 1 (1833/34)-2(1834/35). — Genève :
Minkoff, 1972. — Portr. ; 31 cm
. — Facsimile reproduction. Originally published: London : R. Walton,
[1654]
Area 4: London : London Topographical Society, 1898
. — Micrographic reproduction. Originally published: Porto : Tércio de
Miranda, 1910-1932
Area 4: Lisboa : Biblioteca Nacional, 1986-1988
. — Digital reproduction. Originally published: Impressa Romae : per
B[ernardinum de] V[italibus], 1522
Area 4: Nacionalna i sveučilišna knjižnica, 2005
. — Microform reproduction. Original edition: xiv, 624 p.

213
7 ISBD 2011

7.2.4.3 Resources with different editions

When the resource is one of two or more simultaneously published editions differing in
partial content and/or language, the name of the other edition or editions is given. If the
name of the other edition or editions is not readily available, a general note is made. If a
resource is published in more editions than can be named conveniently, a general note is
made.
Examples
. — Also published in Early edition, 2-star edition, and 3-star edition
Area 2: Final edition
. — Also published in National edition
Area 2: City edition
. — Edition statement applies to program listings
Editorial comment: Published in multiple editions with identical editorial
material; program listings apply to specific geographic areas.
. — Numerous editions
. — Also appears in French and German
. — English edition of: Bulletin critique du livre français = ISSN 0007-
4209
Title proper: New French books

7.2.4.4 Resources with supplements, inserts, etc.

When the resource being described has one or more supplements and/or inserts, a note of
the title or the key title and ISSN of the supplement and/or insert may be given.
Examples
. — Supplement: Journal of the Royal Numismatic Society = ISSN
0307-8019
Title proper: Numismatic chronicle
. — Supplement: Das kleine Blatt
Title proper: Der Kreis
. — Includes text describing the geology of the area covered, in
English and French
. — Includes an index of populated places and distance table
When these supplements are numerous, a general note about their existence may be
given.
Examples
. — Eighth-10th eds. updated by quarterly and annual cumulative
supplements
. — Numerous supplements

7.2.4.5 Supplement to or insert in

When the resource is a supplement to or insert in another resource, a note of the title or
the key title and ISSN of the main resource is given.

214
ISBD 2011

Examples
. — Supplement to: Philosophical magazine = ISSN 0031-8086
Title proper: Advances in physics
. — Supplement to: La lettre du maire = ISSN 0395-0182
Title proper: La lettre du maire (Paris). Textes et documents
. — Supplement to: Der Kreis
Title proper: Das kleine Blatt
. — Insert in: Transport public = ISSN 0249-5643
Title proper: Action transport

7.2.4.6 Other relationships

Notes on other relationships between the resource being described and other resources may
be given, provided that the nature of the relationship, the titles or the key titles and ISSNs
of the other resource or resources are specified.
When two or more resources are published together, each resource is described
separately; a note is given with each description stating that the resource has been
published with another.
Examples
. — Published with: Sugar industry abstracts
Title proper: La sucrerie belge ...
. — Published with: La sucrerie belge
Title proper: Sugar industry abstracts ...
. — Vol. 4, no. 1- published in: Driftwood Public Library gazette
Title proper: Newsletter / Friends of Driftwood Public Library
Editorial comment: Earlier issues published separately.
. — Issued with: Gamla Testament. Stockholm : Rumstedt, 1812; Nya
Testament. 4th ed., Stockholm : Rumstedt, 1811. Both also issued
separately

7.2.4.7 Relationships between continuing resources

7.2.4.7.1 Continuation
If a continuing resource is the continuation of another continuing resource, the title or key
title and ISSN of the previous resource is given in a note introduced by the word
Continues: (or the equivalent in another language).
Example
. — Continues: Monthly Scottish news bulletin = ISSN 0307-5273
Title proper: Pointer
If a continuing resource is continued by another continuing resource, the title or key title
and ISSN of the subsequent resource is given in a note introduced by the words
Continued by: (or the equivalent in another language).

215
7 ISBD 2011

Example
. — Continued by: Annual report of the General Manager - Transport
Department, Glasgow Corporation = ISSN 0308-4140
Title proper: Report of the General Manager for the year ... / presented
to the Glasgow Corporation Transport Committee

7.2.4.7.2 Merger
If a continuing resource is the result of a merger of two or more other continuing
resources, the titles or key titles and ISSNs of the previous continuing resources are given
in a note introduced by the words Merger of: (or the equivalent in another languge).
Examples
. — Merger of: British abstracts. B 1, Chemical engineering, fuels
metallurgy, applied electrochemistry and industrial inorganic
chemistry = ISSN 0365-8740; and of: British abstracts. B 2,
Industrial organic chemistry = ISSN 0365-8929
Title proper: Journal of applied chemistry. Abstracts
. — Merger of: Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja A = ISSN 0359-2510; and of:
Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja B = ISSN 0359-2529
Title proper: Nordia tiedonantoja / Oulun yliopiston maantieleen laitos
. — Merger of: Emmenthaler Blatt; and of: Neue Berner Zeitung
Title proper: Berner Zeitung
If a continuing resource has merged with one or more continuing resources to form a new
continuing resource, the title or key title and ISSN of each of the other continuing
resources is given in a note introduced by the words Merged with:, followed by the words
to become: (or the equivalent in another language) and the title of the new resource.
Examples
. — Merged with: Journal of the British Ceramic Society = ISSN 0524-
5133; to become: Transactions and journal of the British Ceramic
Society = ISSN 0307-7357
Title proper: Transactions / British Ceramic Society
. — Merged with: Gran vía; to become: Revista Gran vía de
actualidades, artes y letras
Title proper: Revista de actualidades, artes y letras
. — Merged with: Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja B = ISSN 0359-2529; to
become: Nordia tiedonantoja (1995) = ISSN 1238-2078
Title proper: Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja A
. — Merged with: L’exportation en pratique; to become: Commerce
extérieur Suisse
Title proper: Euro centre Suisse

7.2.4.7.3 Split or separation

If a continuing resource is a new resource resulting from the split of a continuing
resource into two or more continuing resources, the title or key title and ISSN) of the
previous continuing resource from which it split is given in a note introduced by the
words Continues in part: (or the equivalent in another language).

216
ISBD 2011 7.2.4.7.4

Example
. — Continues in part: Proceedings - Institution of Mechanical
Engineers = ISSN 0020-3483
Title proper: Proceedings / Institution of Mechanical Engineers. Part 2
Details of other continuing resources resulting from the split may also be given.
If a continuing resource splits into two or more continuing resources, the titles or key
titles and ISSNs of the subsequent continuing resources are given in a note introduced by
the words Split into: (or the equivalent in another language).
Examples
. — Split into: Comparative biochemistry and physiology. A,
Comparative physiology = ISSN 0300-9629; and into: Comparative
biochemistry and physiology. B, Comparative biochemistry = ISSN
0305-0491
Title proper: Comparative biochemistry and physiology
. — Split into: Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja A = ISSN 0359-2510; and
into: Nordia tiedonantoja. Sarja B = ISSN 0359-2529
Title proper: Nordia tiedonantoja / Pohjois-Suomen maantieteellinen
seura
If a continuing resource has separated from another continuing resource, the title or key
title and ISSN of the continuing resource from which it separated is given in a note
introduced by the words Separated from: (or the equivalent in another language).
Example
. — Separated from: Boekengids
Title proper: Jeugdboekengids

7.2.4.7.4 Absorption
If a continuing resource has absorbed one or more continuing resources while retaining
its own title, the title or key title and ISSN of each absorbed continuing resource is given
in a note introduced by the word Absorbed: (or the equivalent in another language).
Examples
. — Absorbed: Annals of philosophy = ISSN 0365-4915
Title proper: Philosophical magazine
. — Absorbed: Panorama congiunturale
Title proper: Notizie economiche UBS
If a continuing resource has been absorbed by another continuing resource, the title or
key title and ISSN of the absorbing continuing resource is given in a note introduced by
the words Absorbed by: (or the equivalent in another language).
Examples
. — Absorbed by: Quarterly review of marketing = ISSN 0307-7667
Title proper: Marketing forum
. — Absorbed by: Journal d’agriculture suisse
Title proper: Le cultivateur de la Suisse romande
The date the absorption occurred is included in the note if it is considered important to
users of the catalogue.

217
7 ISBD 2011

Examples
. — Absorbed in 1827: Annals of philosophy = ISSN 0365-4915
Title proper: Philosophical magazine
. — Absorbed in 1975 by: Quarterly review of marketing = ISSN 0307-
7667
Title proper: Marketing forum

7.2.4.7.5 Series with subseries

If a serial has subseries with independent titles, the title or key title and ISSN of each of
the subseries may be given in a note.
Example
. — Subseries: Cuadernos de geohistoria regional; Cuadernos de
investigación social
Title proper: Documentos de la Facultad de Filosofía, Letras y Ciencias
When these subseries are numerous, a general note about their existence may be given.
Example
. — Numerous subseries

7.2.4.7.6 Subseries
When the serial being described is a subseries, details of the main series are given in area
6 and not in area 7.

218
ISBD 2011 7.3.1.3

7.3 Notes on the material or type of resource specific area

7.3.1 Mathematical data (Cartographic resources)

Mathematical or cartographic data additional to, or elaborating on, that given in Area 3
may be given in a note.
Examples
. — "This map is constructed by using a special projection system that
gives a perspective effect while the immediate lake area remains in
scale"
. — Scale of original ca 1:1 300
Editorial comment: For an enlargement of an aerial photograph.
. — Oriented with north to the right
. — Prime meridians: Ferro and Paris
. — Scale departure graph: "Statute miles Mercator projection”
. — Relief shown by contours, shading and gradient tints
. — Relief and depths shown by contours
. — Relief shown pictorially and by shading. Depths shown by
soundings and contours
. — "Ekvidistance 50 m"
. — Soundings in fathoms
7.3.1.1 For celestial charts, the first note related to the mathematical data area is
the note on magnitude. The term limiting magnitude or its equivalent in another language
is followed by a number that may reach a maximum of 22.
Example
. — Limiting magnitude 3.5
7.3.1.2 For photography and remote-sensing imagery, the first note related to the
mathematical data area is the note pertaining to this type of resource.
Examples
. — f6.016 inches, alt. (orig.) 8 000 ft
Editorial comment: For an enlargement of an aerial photograph.
. — f5.944 inches, alt. 12 000 ft
. — MSS Bands 3 and 4
Editorial comment: For a remote-sensing image.

7.3.1.3 Digital cartographic resources

Information not included in area 3 such as on digital graphic representation may include
details of digital graphic representation method, e.g. indirect reference method (i.e. types
of geographic features, addressing schemes, or other means through which locations are
referenced) and topology level, geospatial reference data (coordinate system, geodetic
datum) with additional information on its data quality, layer structure, format of delivery,
geodesy, etc.

219
7 ISBD 2011

The data type (e.g. raster, vector, point), the object type (e.g. point, line, polygon, pixel),
the number of objects used to represent spatial information and the format name (e.g.
digital transfer information) may be given for an electronic resource.
Data type. The direct reference method (i.e. the system of objects) used to represent
space in an electronic resource (e.g. raster, vector, point) is identified.
Object type. The specific type of point, raster, and/or vector object types used in an
electronic resource is indicated. Multiple types are separated by a comma.
Object count.
Point/vector count. The number of point or vector objects or each type of object
used in an electronic resource is given.
Raster object count. The number of rows x columns x voxels (vertical) in a raster
electronic resource is given. Row and column count are used for rectangular raster
resources. Voxels are used with rectangular volumetric raster resources.
Format. The format name and version in which an electronic resource is stored is
indicated.
Examples
Point : entity point
Vector : network chains, non-planar graph
Raster : pixel
Raster : pixel ; TIFF
Vector : point, line, polygon ; ARC/INFO export, version 1.0
Vector : edge (70)
. — Location reference: 100-year floodplain boundary; 500-year
floodplain boundary
. — Geographic system: coordinates ; decimal degrees
. — North American datum of 1927 : ellipsoid: Clarke 1866 (semi-
major axis: 6378206.4 ; denominator of flattening ratio: 294.98)
. — Format of delivery: SUF2, DGN (microstation format), DXF, DWG
(AutoCad format); 9 inch magnetic reel tape, Exabite (8 mm
cassette); small files on disk
. — Deliverable on 31-12-1992: Sheet 9W, 9O, 14W, 14O, 15W, 19W,
19O, 20W (excl. Texel); delivery per sheet or part thereof
. — Structure: All line-segments are noded and, when they have an
identity of their own, fitted with their own coding; the polygons
(objects) that are created are coded with a centroid
The resolution for electronic resources may be recorded, expressed as the size in metres
of the smallest feature that is discernable in the data (usually pixel size or vertex spacing).
Examples
. — Resolution: 1 pixel = 20 m
. — Resolution: minimum adjacent vertex spacing: 5 m ground
distance

220
ISBD 2011

7.3.2 Music format statement (Notated music)

Notes on the music format statement may include peculiarities or variations among the
different parts of a resource.
Example
. — Lute tablature and staff notation on opposite pages

7.3.3 Numbering (Continuing resources)

7.3.3.1 Details of numbering that have not been given in area 3 or an explanation
for the omission of such details (e.g. an unnumbered series) may be given in a note.
Examples
. — Suspended 1939–1945
. — Unnumbered series
7.3.3.2 When the description is made from an intermediate issue or part of the
serial, a note on the numbering of the first issue or part may be given if the information is
available from other sources. If the serial has ceased publication, but the last issue or part
is not available at the time the description is made, a note on the numbering of the last
issue or part may be given (see 3.3).
Examples
. — Began with: Vol. 1, no. 1 (1972)
. — Ceased with: Vol. 1, no. 6 (Oct. 1974)
. — Began with: No. 1, published in 1968
. — Ceased with vol. for 1982
. — Began with: Vol. 1, no. 1 (May 1974); ceased with: Vol. 1, no. 6 (Oct.
1974)
. — Began in 1962 and ceased in 1975
7.3.3.3 When describing a supplement or insert dependent on the main serial, a
note on the numbering of the main serial may be given.
Example
. — No. 1 (1983) of the supplement corresponds to 10. évf., 1. sz.
(1983) of the main publication
Title proper: Külpolitika. English-language supplement
7.3.3.4 Notes are also made on any complex or irregular numbering not given in
the numbering area, or on any other numbering peculiarities if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue (see 3.3).
Examples
. — Vol. 29, no. 3-vol. 39, no. 2 omitted in numbering
. — Numbering begins with no. 1 each year

221
ISBD 2011 7.4.1

7.4 Notes on the publication, production, distribution, etc., area

7.4.1 Notes on the publication, production, distribution, etc., area may include
details of other publishers, producers, distributors, etc., of the resource; notes on variant
publication, production or distribution, etc., information; irregularities; and additional
dates.
Examples
. — Also published in Colombo by Ceylon University Press
. — Publisher named in privilege statement as Sulpice Sabon
. — Colophon bears the date 1723
. — The date is given in the form of a chronogram
. — Entered in the Stationers' Register, 22 July 1587
. — Vol. 4 published in 1939, vol. 5 in 1946
. — Original imprint covered by label which reads: C.F. Peters,
Frankfurt, London, New York
. — Distributed in the UK by EAV Ltd., London
. — Publication information on label attached to container: Taftville
(Conn.) : MCD Software Associates
. — User's manual distributed by the American Political Science
Association, Washington, D.C.
. — Disk label has date: cop. 1992
. — Manual dated 1994
. — The place of publication “Cosmopoli” is fictitious; identified as
Frankfurt a.M., according to Die falschen und fingirten Druckorte /
E.O. Weller, Bd. 1, p. 285
. — Place of publication conjectured by cataloguer based on
typographic evidence
. — Volume 1 published 1561; vol. 2: 1564; vol. 3: 1562; vol. 4: 1560
In area 4: , 1560-1564
. — No. 1 published 2006; date of publication from no. 2
In area 4: , 2005-

For older monographic resources:

When publication, production, distribution, etc., information has been
obtained from a source other than a prescribed source of information,
the source from which such information has been obtained is given in a
note.
Example
. — Publisher's name from colophon
. — Thomas Saint active in Newcastle upon Tyne from
ca 1769 to ca 1788. Source: Dictionary of the
printers and booksellers who were at work in
England, Scotland and Ireland from 1726 to 1775 /
H.R. Plomer, 3, p. 221

223
7 ISBD 2011

7.4.2 Changes to information in the publication, production,

distribution, etc., area

For serials and multipart monographic resources:

Changes in the place of publication and/or the name of the publisher
that occur after the first or earliest issue or part are given in a note,
together with the numbering of the respective issues, if they are
considered important to users of the catalogue. Where numerous
changes have occurred, a general statement may be given (see 4.1.15,
4.2.13).
Examples
. — Published: Redwing [sic] (Minn.), 1864-1865; Le
Sueur, Minn., 1865
. — Publication statement varies

For integrating resources:

Earlier places of publication and/or names of publishers that are no
longer present on the current iteration, or that appeared in a different
form on earlier iterations, are given in a note, if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue (see 4 .1.15, 4.2.13).
Example
. — Published: New York : McGraw-Hill, 1974-1975;
South Hackensack, N.J. : F.B. Rothman, 1976-1978

224
ISBD 2011 7.5.1

7.5 Notes on the material description area

7.5.1 Additional physical details

Notes on the material description area may include additional physical description of the
resource supplementing the formal statement given in area 5 and statements on particular
physical peculiarities. Notes may also be made on accompanying material or on earlier
physical details of an integrating resource.
Examples
. — Versos of leaves blank
Editorial comment: Leaves numbered on both sides.
. — Leaves printed on both sides
Editorial comment: Leaves numbered on one side only.
. — Volumes numbered: 1, 2A, 2B, 2C, 3
. — Pages also numbered 321-401
. — Map on lining paper
. — Illustrations coloured by hand
. — Printed on acid-free paper
. — Title page printed in black and red
. — Watermark: C & I Honig
. — In envelope, with title on flap
. — Optional cello part included
. — Disc impressed on rectangular surface, 20 x 20 cm
. — Container: 32 x 36 x 16 cm
. — Sheets measure 24 x 48 cm, 16 x 42 cm, 16 x 28 cm
. — Printed area measures 30 x 46 cm
. — Height when mounted: 114 cm
. — Animated transparencies for use with the Photo Motion Activator
. — Visible using an incandescent bulb
. — Projected by means of a laser beam
. — Electronically adapted to simulate stereo
. — Synchronized to USPEC 2 standard
. — Synchronized by means of Philips N2209/LFD3442 pulses
. — Text of the poems printed on sleeve
. — Leaves of plates in aquatint or copperplate engravings
. — Issued in 2 vol., 8th ed.-10th ed.; in 3 vol., 11th ed.-15th ed.; in 4
vol., 16th ed.-20th ed.; in 5 vol., 21st ed.-
. — Resource size: master (113 776 KB) ; use copy (5 631 KB)
. — Digital and analog tracks in English and German
. — Still images compressed using JPEG

225
7 ISBD 2011

. — Documentation: Comprehensive occupational health nursing

preparation / principal investigator, Daniel Murphy. Houston, TX :
Data Health Nursing Publishers, cop. 1994. ISBN 0-87301-605-6
Editorial comment: Accompanying material for a remote-access electronic
resource.

For older monographic resources:

Leaves of plates or inserts that are included in the numbering of pages
or leaves of the resource may be given.
Example
. — 12 leaves of plates included in the pagination
or
. — 12 leaves of plates included in the pagination as p.
5-6, 11-12, 19-20, 29-30, 39-40, 49-50, 59-60, 69-
70, 79-80, 89-90, 99-100, 109-110
The number of lines to the page and the type used are given if these aid
identification of the printer or are considered important to users of the
catalogue.
Example
. — 24 lines per p.; type 24G
Physical description of the resource, including a list of signatures is
given, if it is considered important to users of the catalogue. A full
collation following the notation in a standard reference source (see
Appendix C) may be given. The copy or copies on which the collation
is based may be specified.
Examples
4
. — Signatures: A-K
. — Collation: 8vo: A-H4; 32 leaves: p. [1-2] 3-62 [63-
64]; $3(-H3) signed. H4 blank
. — Collation: a2 A-L4 M2 . Based on copy x in collection
y

7.5.2 Other physical formats available

If a resource is available on different physical carriers or different formats, a note may be
given.
. — Issues 46– also available online
. — Available in 8 mm or 16 mm versions
. — Also issued as glass slides
. — Also issued for IBM PC and PC compatibles
. — Available in ASCII and PostScript versions
. — Available in PDF and HTML formats
. — Also available online: http://www.iuee.eu/pdf-
publicacio/180/1xoiv6WP3Aakx4Ey2ic6.PDF

226
ISBD 2011

7.6 Notes on the series and multipart monographic resources area

7.6.1 Notes on the series and monographic resources area may include notes
giving information about a series or multipart monographic resource in which a resource
has been issued (see area 6) and notes on series editors.
Examples
. — Main series numbered 244
. — Editor of the series: Samuel Johnson
. — Each issue numbered 10, 20, 30, etc., in the series

For older monographic resources:

When series information has been obtained from a source other than a
prescribed source of information, the source from which such
information has been obtained is given in a note.
Example
. — Series statement from verso of title page
7.6.2 If a resource is published within a subseries with a distinctive title that is
given in area 6, the title and the ISSN of the main series may be given in a note.
If a resource is published within a subseries with a dependent title that is given in area 6
with its main series, the ISSN of the main series may be given in a note (see 6.5.2).
Example
. — Main series: Department of State publication
. — ISSN of main series: ISSN 0342-2259
7.6.3 If the key title of a series or subseries differs from the title proper of the
series or subseries, a note may be given.

227
ISBD 2011 7.7.2

7.7 Notes relating to the contents

7.7.1 Notes relating to the contents may include the list of contents and notes on
other inclusions, such as indexes, inserts, bibliographies, discographies, etc.
For audiovisual resources, if the durations of individual works are given in the contents
note, they are placed immediately after the bibliographic description.
For general notes on the nature and scope of the contents of a resource, see 7.1.2.

7.7.2 List of contents

The titles and other details of the works contained in a resource with a collective title
(see 1.1.4.3) may be given in a note.
Examples
. — Contents: The homecoming / by Harold Pinter. Chips with
everything / by Arnold Wesker. Marching song / by John Whiting
. — Contents: The L-d's address to K.G.II. The K-'s answer. A new
ballad
. — Contents: Voluntary I and Te Deum ; Voluntary and Jubilate
. — Contents: Trap and guess ; Bumblebug ; Hidden treasures
. — Contents: CD-ROM data (1:29) ; The young person's guide to the
orchestra (16:27) ; Extra audio examples (55:43)
. — Contents: Les secteurs sanitaires ; Ensemble des médecins
spécialistes libéraux par secteur sanitaire au 1.1.1979 ; Evolution
de la densité des médecins libéraux par secteur sanitaire du
1.1.1976 au 1.1.1979
. — Contents: The fourth millenium / Henry Brant (9 min). Music for
brass quintet / Peter Phillips (14 min)
. — Contents: Getting ahead of the game (81 fr.) ; Decisions,
decisions (55 fr.) ; Your money (72 fr.) ; How to be a loser (65 fr.) ;
The law and your pocketbook (70 fr.) ; The all-American consumer
(63 fr.)
. — Contents: Klarinettenquintett A-Dur, KV 581 / Wolfgang Amadeus
Mozart (29 min). Klarinettenquintett B-Dur, op. 31 / Carl Maria von
Weber (24 min, 14 s)

For multipart monographic resources:

The list of contents may include the designations, titles, statements of
responsibility, statements of extent, etc., of the separate physical units
constituting a multipart monographic resource.
Examples
. — Contents: Vol. 1, A midsummer night's dream ; Vol.
2, Henry IV
. — Contents: Pt. 1, The fellowship of the ring ; Pt. 2,
The two towers ; Pt. 3, The return of the king

229
7 ISBD 2011

. — Contents: Cohort file 1, Mature men (45-59 yrs.) ;

Cohort file 2, Mature women (45-59 yrs.) ; Cohort
file 3, Young boys (14-24 yrs.) ; Cohort file 4, Young
girls (14-24 yrs.)
. — Contents: 1, Mixmatch / J. Broady and L.M. Tiems.
Ollie the otter / Dana Brynner. 2, Capture the play /
Paul Edelstein. Winner take all / Jennifer Drake.
. — Contents: 1, 1985-1989 ; 2, 1990-1995
. — Contents: Pt. 1, The cause of liberty (24 min) ; Pt. 2,
The impossible war (25 min)
For multilevel description, see Appendix A.

7.7.3 Notes on other inclusions

Notes may be made on bibliographies, indexes, and other parts of a resource if they are
considered important to the users of the catalogue.
Examples
. — Includes the text of the Gaming Act 1913
. — Includes references to summaries on U.S. demographic data
. — Also includes newsfilms on Trooping the Colour
. — Bibliography: p. 291
. — Discography: p. 291
. — List of films: p. 323-327
. — Includes: Bibliography of Northwest materials
. — Includes a list of works for further study
. — Includes index
. — Includes index of songs
. — Indexes: Vols. 1-25 (1927-1951) in vol. 26, no. 1
. — Summary in English: p. 143-146

For cartographic resources:

Descriptions of insets, illustrations, sections and similar representations
may be given in a note.
Examples
. — Insets: three maps: Structural regions ;
Topographical regions ; Erosional and depositional
regions. Scale 1:170 000 000 approx. 10 x 24 cm
each
. — North polar and South polar regions on polar proj. 8
cm diam. each, in left and right bottom corners
. — Illustrations: Decorative text cartouche in top left
corner; peoples of the world and allegorical
representations for Europe, Asia, Africa and America
form the borders of the map

230
ISBD 2011

. — Includes descriptive index, text, colour illustrations

describing types of buoys, ships, lighthouses, fishes,
birds, seaweed, sea anemones, and coral, and 9
local maps
. — Insets at 1:50 000: Paris, Madrid, Bern, Amsterdam,
London
. — Insets with indexes: Plant City, Brandon Area,
Apollo Beach, Del Webb's Sun City Center
. — Includes insets of the Liverpool and Nottingham
regions, 3 suggested tourist itineraries, distance
chart, text, and advertisements
. — Cross sections A-B; C-D; and E-F along bottom
margin
. — Includes block diagram of area covered by map
. — Includes an index map to adjacent sheets
. — On verso: New map of South Hadley, Mass. Scale
1:15 000
. — Maps of 18 ”Interchange layouts in Mahoning
County” and maps of Craig Beach, Sebring, Beloit,
Canfield, Poland, New Middletown, Washingtonville,
Lowellville, Stouthers, Campbell, and Youngstown,
with street index, on verso
. — Text, indexes, colour illustrations, list of tourist
facilities and radio stations, route mileage log,
controlled access highway map, pictorial map,
historic places map, and local route maps, on verso
of some sheets

231
ISBD 2011

7.8 Notes on the resource identifier and terms of availability area

7.8.1 Notes relating to the resource identifier and terms of availability

Notes relating to the resource identifier and terms of availability may include notes of
limited print run, issues or limited distribution.
Examples
. — 250 copies printed
. — Limited edition of 20 signed and numbered copies
. — An edition of 75 copies, not for sale
. — Limited demonstration package
. — Public domain software

7.8.2 Notes relating to binding

Notes on the binding as issued by the publisher may be given. For notes on individual
bindings, see 7.11.
Example
. — First 25 copies bound in leather

233
ISBD 2011 7.9

7.9 Notes on the issue, part, iteration, etc., that forms the basis of
the description
Notes on the issue, part, iteration, etc., that forms the basis of the description may be
given.
If the description of a serial or multipart monographic resource is not based on the first
issue or part published, the issue or part that forms the basis of the description is given in
a note.

For serials:
The numbering is recorded in the form it would have if recorded in area
3.
Example
. — Description based on: Vol. 3, no. 3 (May/June 1975)
If the numbering of the last issue or part is not given in area 3 (see
3.3.7), a note on the latest issue or part consulted may be given.
Example
. — Latest issue consulted: Nr. 43 (Mai 2001)

For unnumbered monographic series:

If a description is made for an unnumbered monographic series itself, a
note is given of the earliest analytic consulted and its date of
publication, production, distribution, etc. If other analytics also have
been consulted and the latest analytic can be identified, that analytic
and its date of publication are also given.
Examples
. — Description based on: The wood demon / by Anton
Pavlovich Chekhov ; translated by Nicholas
Saunders and Frank Dwyer, 1993
. — Latest volume consulted: Ibsen : four major plays /
translated by Rick Davis and Brian Johnson, 1995

For integrating resources:

If the description is not based on the first iteration, a note is given on
the latest iteration consulted in preparing the description.
Example
. — Description based on: 1994 ed., through update 10

For remote-access electronic resources:

The issue or iteration that forms the basis of the description of a remote-
access electronic resource is given in a note, along with the date on
which it was viewed.

235
7 ISBD 2011

Examples
. — Description based on the iteration viewed on Oct.
12, 2006
. — Description based on: No. 3 (2004) viewed on Feb.
2, 2005
. — Description based on version dated: Oct. 4, 1997
13:22:11
. — Description based on home page (viewed on Feb.
28, 2003, last updated Jan. 8, 2002)

236
ISBD 2011 7.10.3

7.10 Other notes

7.10.1 Any other notes that are particular to the specialized material or considered
important to users of the catalogue may be given.

For notated music resources:

Examples
. — Duration: 123 min
. — Keyboard tablature
. — Graphic notation
. — Tonic sol-fa notation

7.10.2 Notes providing a summary

The summary provides a factual, non-evaluative account of the subject coverage. In
content and expression the note may draw upon statements found on the resource, its
container or accompanying textual matter. Information on the use of special techniques
or processes may also be included.
Examples
. — Pictures the highlights of the play Julius Caesar using
photographs of an actual production
. — Uses animation techniques to describe cycloidal curves and their
applications, and to show how their properties can be used to
explain the design of the Wankel rotary engine
. — Uses time-lapse photography to illustrate the growth of crystals
. — Uses shopping situations in a supermarket and a department store
for the purpose of illustrating basic math concepts, including
addition, subtraction, multiplication and division. Provides user
exercises and drills to reinforce the concepts
. — Gives information on higher civil servants in U.S. federal agencies,
including personal characteristics, educational background, and
occupational mobility
. — An interactive multimedia tool for studying the human anatomy.
Users can select anterior, posterior, medial, or lateral views, each
with dozens of layers, as well as specify gender and ethnic
appearance

7.10.3 Notes relating to use or audience

Notes relating to use or audience, normally taken from statements on or in the resource,
provide non-evaluative information as to the potential or recommended use of the
resource and/or the intended audience. These notes may also specify restrictions on use
of the resource.
Examples
. — For ages 3-6
. — Restricted to municipal law enforcement personnel

237
7 ISBD 2011

. — Designed for those with a professional interest in analyzing spatial

data (geographers, planners, meteorologists, etc.)
. — Intended for senior high school students with knowledge of
algebra
. — Resource closed until Jan. 2010
. — For use by library staff only

7.10.4 Notes on numbers

Numbers or identifiers associated with the resource but not given in area 8 may be given
in a note.
Examples
. — Additional no. on label: A-096
. — On container: M1 527
. — ICPSR study no. 0003
. — ISRC FR-Z03-91-01231

238
ISBD 2011

7.11 Notes relating to the copy in hand

Notes on the copy being catalogued may be given. These may include notes relating to
the physical characteristics of the copy, notes relating to “bound with” copies, provenance
notes, and action notes.
Examples
. — Ms. notes by author
. — Signed by the composer
. — Imperfect copy: missing cover and title page
. — This copy hand tinted
. — Number 11 of 50 signed and numbered copies
. — Imperfect: Eastern portion and southwest corner wanting
. — Illustrations coloured by hand
. — Bound in boards with a spine label reading: Poems of Gay
. — In a tooled vellum binding
. — Leaves I5-6 bound between h3 and h4
. — Imperfect: wanting leaves 12-13 (b6 and cl); without the blank last
leaf (S8)
. — Bound with: The Boston Ebenezer. Boston : printed by B. Green &
J. Allen, for Samuel Phillips, 1698; The cure of sorrow. Boston :
printed by B. Green, 1709
. — Bound with: The whole booke of Psalms … 1635 (STC 2661.5);
The booke of common prayer … 1633 (STC 16395)
. — Bound as no. 2 in a pamphlet volume with 16 other titles
. — Inscription on inside of front cover: Theodorinis ab Engelsberg
. — Title page with repaired tear

For electronic resources:

Notes may be given on a locally assigned file name or on the date when
the content of the resource was copied from or to another source.
Examples
. — Local data set name: RBBIT.1
. — Local file name: MENSAT
. — Resource copied Oct. 1996 from local area network

239
ISBD 2011 8

8 RESOURCE IDENTIFIER AND TERMS OF AVAILABILITY AREA

Introductory note
The resource identifier and terms of availability area includes the resource identifier, the
key title, and the terms of availability. The elements are defined in the glossary.
A resource identifier is any number or alphanumeric designation associated with and
identifying a resource according to an international standard, such as an International
Standard Book Number or an International Standard Serial Number, or a designation
assigned by a publisher.
When a resource has more than one identifier and it is considered important to users of
the catalogue to record more than one identifier, the area may be repeated. The resource
may have more than one identifier for various reasons, for example, (a) because it is
issued in more than one format or medium or by more than one publisher, producer,
distributor, etc., or (b) because it has an identifier for the individual part and also an
identifier for the whole group of which it is a part.
In both cases, the identifier that specifically identifies the resource being described is
given first. Other identifiers (e.g. for other formats, for the whole group, for other
publishers) are given next, as repetitions of the area.
Identifiers appearing on the resource that relate to its bibliographic history (e.g. ISBNs
for earlier editions, the label name and issue number of a previous issue of a sound
recording) are not given in area 8. They may be given in area 7 if they are considered
important to users of the catalogue.

Contents
8.1 Resource identifier
8.2 Key title (Continuing resources)
8.3 Terms of availability

Prescribed punctuation
A. For punctuation before areas of description, see A.3.2.
B. The key title is preceded by a space, equals sign, space ( = ).
C. Terms of availability are preceded by a space, colon, space ( : ).
D. A qualification added either to an identifier or to the terms of availability is enclosed in
parentheses ( ( ) ). Multiple qualifiers are separated by a space, semicolon, space ( ; ).
E. Each subsequent identifier and terms of availability statement is preceded by a point,
space, dash, space (. — ) unless the areas are clearly separated by paragraphing,
typography or indentation, in which case the point, space, dash, space may be omitted or
replaced by a point given at the end of the preceding area.
Punctuation patterns
. — ISBN
. — ISBN (qualification). — ISBN (qualification) : terms of availability
. — ISBN (qualification) : terms of availability. — ISBN (qualification) :
terms of availability
. — ISBN (qualification ; qualification)
241
8 ISBD 2011

. — ISBN : terms of availability (qualification)

. — ISBN : terms of availability
. — Terms of availability
. — ISSN = Key title
. — ISSN = Key title : terms of availability
. — ISSN = Key title : terms of availability (qualification)
. — Plate number (qualification) : terms of availability
. — Publisher's number (qualification) : terms of availability
. — ISMN
. — ISMN (qualification). — ISMN : terms of availability
. — Label_name catalogue_number (qualification) : terms of
availability

Prescribed source
Any source

242
ISBD 2011 8.1.3

8.1 Resource Identifier

8.1.1 An identifier is given if it is known and considered important to users of
the catalogue.
8.1.2 A standard identifier is recorded in accordance with its relevant standard, as
appropriate. The standard identifier is preceded by its customary label, such as ISBN, ISSN,
ISMN.
Examples
. — ISBN 978-952-92-0267-6
. — ISBN 0-7131-1646-3
Editorial comment: Old-style 10-digit ISBN.
. — ISSN 0075-2363
. — ISMN 979-0-3217-6543-6
. — URN:NBN:se:uu:diva-4321
. — doi:10.1000/1
. — URL: http://purl.oclc.org/OCLC/RSPD
Editorial comment: Persistent Uniform Resource Locator for OCLC Research

For notated music resources:

The publisher's number of a notated music resource is given when
known. The publisher's number is preceded by the term Publ. no. or its
equivalent in another language.
Example
. — Publ. no.: Z 1309
The plate number may be given following the ISBN and/or the
publisher's number and any qualifications that relate to either. The plate
number is preceded by the term Pl. no. or its equivalent in another
language.
Examples
. — ISBN 83-224-2458-2. — Pl. no.: PWM-8601
. — Publ. no.: Z 1309. — Pl. no.: 9538
When there is no other number, the plate number may be given alone.
Example
. — Pl. no.: A.F. 539

8.1.3 Qualification to identifier

A brief statement that qualifies, explains, or corrects the identifier, such as the type of
binding in which the resource is issued, may be given in parentheses following the
identifier to which it is related. Standard abbreviations in the language chosen by the
cataloguing agency may be used. An identifier may have more than one qualification.
Examples
. — ISBN 978-0-85020-025-6 (cloth)
243
8 ISBD 2011

. — ISBN 978-0-330-23591-4 (paperback)

. — ISBN 978-3-525-52139-7 (Lw.)
. — Publ. no.: Z 1039 (cloth)
. — ISBN 978-0-86325-016-3 (looseleaf)
If a resource has more than one identifier, each identifier may be given with an
appropriate qualification.
Examples
. — ISBN 978-0-379-00550-9 (set). — ISBN 978-0-379-00551-6 (vol.
1)
. — ISMN 979-0-3217-6543-6 (score). — ISMN 979-0-3217-6544-3
(vocal score). — ISMN 979-0-3217-6545-0 (set of parts)
. — ISBN 978-2-204-02821-9 (Cerf). — ISBN 978-2-222-04155-9
(CNRS ; broché)
. — CBS M-34129 (disc). — CBS MT 35158 (cassette)
. — Warner Bros. K 56334 (stereo). — Warner Bros. K 56334M
(mono)
If there is no identifier, a statement of binding, format, etc., may be given as the first
statement in the area, enclosed in parentheses.
Example
. — (Paperback)
Terms identifying the source of the number may be added in parentheses following the
number.
Examples
. — FSM Toccata: 53 617 toc (on container)
. — ED 76C34Z (in slide publisher's catalogue)
When a standard identifier is incorrectly printed on the resource being described, the
correct standard identifier is given if known, and the term corrected or its equivalent in
another language is added enclosed in parentheses. The invalid number is given as it
appears, with the qualification invalid (or its equivalent in another language) enclosed in
parentheses.
Examples
. — ISBN 978-0-340-16427-3 (corrected). — ISBN 978-0-340-16427-2
(invalid)

8.1.4 Label names and catalogue numbers

8.1.4.1 Whether or not a commercially issued sound recording, videorecording,
etc., has a standard identifier, the label name and all catalogue numbers supplied by the
issuing company are given. The catalogue number is preceded by a label name and can
include a numerical symbol alone or a symbol composed of letters and numbers; spaces
and marks of punctuation are transcribed exactly as they appear on the source of
information.

244
ISBD 2011

Examples
. — Telefunken 6.35368
. — Pathé 2C 066-16.130
. — Sandak Set no. 782
Editorial comment: Number for a commercially-issued slide set.
8.1.4.2 When the resource consists of two or more parts numbered consecutively,
the catalogue number may be given as an inclusive figure.
Example
. — La voix de son maître AN 133-134
When the numbering is not consecutive, the numbers are transcribed in full.
Example
. — HMV XQD 1784, NQD 1003-1004
When there is a catalogue number for the whole resource and also numbers for the
individual parts, the catalogue number for the whole resource is given. The numbers of
the individual parts may be given in parentheses following the number for the whole
resource.
Example
. — Erato ERA 9156 (9157-9162)

8.1.5 Fingerprint (Older monographic resources)

The fingerprint system was developed from experiments to extract identifying
information from older monographic resources. It has been considered as a substitute for
a standard number for older resources.
The fingerprint consists of a number of characters drawn from a number of uniform
places in the text of the resource. A definitive formula for fingerprint has yet to be
determined by international agreement. Until such an agreement is made, various forms
of fingerprint will be considered acceptable in this area.18
Example
. — Fingerprint:163704 - b1 A2 ,$en : b2 I2 a,$
Editorial comment: Fingerprint for: I.V. Vondels Gysbreght van Aemstel,
d'ondergang van zijn stad en zijn ballingschap : trevrspel. — Amsterdam : W.
Blaev, 1637. — 4°: A-I4.

18 Fingerprints = Empreintes = Impronte (Paris: Institut de recherche et d'histoire des textes,

1984). 2 vol., reproduced at http://edit16.iccu.sbn.it/web_iccu/info/it/Impronta_regole.htm
(viewed 23 Nov. 2009), supplemented by the periodical: Nouvelles des empreintes =
Fingerprint newsletter. – No. 1 (1981)- (Paris: Institut de recherche et d'histoire des textes,
1981-), reproduced at http://edit16.iccu.sbn.it/web_iccu/info/it/Impronta_notiziario.htm.
P.C.A. Vriesema, “The STCN-fingerprint”, in: Studies in bibliography 39 (1986), p. 93-100;
“The STCN-fingerprint”, available online at
http://www.koninklijkebibliotheek.nl/stcn/vingerafdruk-en.html (viewed 23 Nov. 2009).
245
8 ISBD 2011

8.2 Key title (Continuing resources)

The key title assigned by the ISSN Network is given even when it is identical to the title
proper of the continuing resource. However, a key title is given only if the ISSN to
which it applies is given.
Examples
. — ISSN 0308-1249 = Medicos (Nottingham)
. — ISSN 0028-5390 = The new Hungarian quarterly

246
ISBD 2011

8.3 Terms of availability

8.3.1 A statement of the terms of availability, which consist of the price if the
resource is for sale or a brief statement of other terms if the resource is not for sale, may
be given. It is recommended that the price of the resource be given with the international
standard code for the currency as in ISO 421719.
Examples
: GBP 2.05
: EUR 950
: not for sale
: for hire
: free to educational institutions
: USD 325.00
: DKK 500
: EUR 35
: free loan
8.3.2 Qualifications to the terms of availability are enclosed in parentheses.
Examples
: GBP 1.00 : GBP 0.50 (to members)
: GBP 8.16 : GBP 6.25 (until 1 January 1977)
: C$25.00 (National Film Board of Canada)
: USD 129.00 : USD 100.00 (for colleges and universities)
: USD 49.00 : USD 59.00 (with workbook)
: GBP 4 (annual subscription)
: EUR 1,20 (per issue) : EUR 20 (p.a.)

19 ISO 4217:2008. Codes for the representation of currencies and funds. 7th ed. Codes also
available at:
http://www.iso.org/iso/support/faqs/faqs_widely_used_standards/widely_used_standards_other
/currency_codes/
ISBD 2011

APPENDICES
ISBD 2011 Appendix A

APPENDIX A: MULTILEVEL DESCRIPTION

Multilevel description is one of a number of choices for the bibliographic descriptions of
parts.
Other methods for describing a resource consisting of parts include:
a) a description showing as the title proper the title common to the parts, with
the titles of individual parts given in a contents note (see 7.7);
b) a description of each part showing as the title proper the title of each
individual part, with the title common to the parts given in the series area (see
6.1);
c) a description of each part showing as the title proper a combination of (a) the
title common to the parts and (b) the title of each individual part (see 1.1.3.7,
1.1.5.3);
d) descriptions showing component part analysis (see the IFLA Guidelines for
the Application of the ISBDs to the Description of Component Parts20).
Multilevel description is based on the division of descriptive information into two or
more levels. The first level contains information common to the whole or main resource.
The second and subsequent levels contain information relating to the individual separable
units. The process is carried out for as many levels as are required to describe fully the
resource and its units.
At each level the elements of the description are given in the same order and with the
same punctuation as for unitary resources. Some elements may be recorded at more than
one level.
Multilevel description may be applied to:
a) physically separate units of a multipart resource;
Example
Text (visual) : unmediated
Remembrance of things past / Marcel Proust ; translated by C.K. Scott
Moncrieff. — London : Chatto and Windus, 1957- . — Translation of: A
la recherche du temps perdu
Vol. 1, Swann's way / illustrated by Philippe Jullian. —
Translation of: Du côté de chez Swann. — This translation
originally published 1922
Part 1. — 1957 (1973 reprint). — 303 p., 4 leaves of plates :
ill. ; 19 cm. — ISBN 0-7011-1048-1 : GBP 1.75
b) physically separate resources supplementary to, or accompanying, another
resource (see 5.4, 5.4.3, 7.5);

20 Guidelines for the application of the ISBDs to the description of component parts (London:
IFLA Universal Bibliographic Control and International MARC Programme, 1988). Available
online at:
http://www.ifla.org/files/cataloguing/isbd/component-parts.pdf
251
Appendix A ISBD 2011

Example
Text (visual) : unmediated
A history of Hampshire and the Isle of Wight. — Westminster :
Constable, 1900-1912. — 5 vol. : ill. (some col.), maps, ports. ; 32 cm.
— (The Victoria history of the counties of England)
Index to the Victoria history of Hampshire and the Isle of Wight.
— London : Constable, 1914. — 135 p. ; 32 cm
c) The description of physically separate units of a multimedia resource.
Example
Text (visual) : unmediated + Spoken word : audio
Minnesota politics and government : a history resource unit /
Educational Services Division, Minnesota Historical Society. — [St.
Paul : Minnesota Historical Society, 1976]. — 2 cases in 1 ; 34 cm
People serving people / Judy A. Poseley. — 30 p. : ill. ; 28 cm
Voices of Minnesota politicians. — 1 sound disc : 33 1/3 rpm,
mono ; 30 cm

When it is known from the outset or in the course of publication that the place of
publication and name of publisher change for each part of a multipart monographic
resource, this is indicated at the first level by [Various places] : [various publishers] or
their equivalents in another language, and the individual places and names of publishers
are given at a second or subsequent level.

When all parts of a multipart monographic resource have been published, the first and
last dates are given at the first level (see 4.3.10 and punctuation pattern F of area 4). The
dates of each part are given at a second or subsequent level.
When the multipart monographic resource is in the course of publication, the date of the
first part published, regardless of the numeric designation of the part, is given at the first
level (see 4.3.10). The dates of each part are given at a second or subsequent level.
A statement of extent is given at any level representing a single part or representing
multiple parts when all parts have been published and described.

252
ISBD 2011 Appendix B

APPENDIX B: BI-DIRECTIONAL RECORDS

Bi-directional records are multiscript records in scripts written from left to right and
scripts written from right to left.
Unless the direction of the script changes within an element, each change of script begins
on a new line of the description at the appropriate margin. Prescribed punctuation is
given at the start of the new element in the style required by the script, except for the
prescribed point, comma or semicolon that are given at the end of the previous element in
the style required by the script (see also A.3.2). Thus the point of the point, space, dash,
space (. — ) ends the previous element and the dash begins the following element on a
new line at the appropriate margin.

‫ تأليف متري ٳلياس‬/ ‫عربي‬-‫ فرنسي‬،‫القاموس الحديث‬

= Dictionnaire moderne, français-arabe / par Mitri Elias.
‫ منقحة ومزيدة‬، 4.‫— طبعة‬
= 4e édition, revue et augmentée.
‫ المطبعة المصرية‬: ‫— القاھرة‬
= Le Caire : Elias' Modern Press, 1974.

(Arabic data transcribed first)

____________________________________

Dictionnaire moderne, français-arabe / par Mitri Elias

.‫ تأليف متري ٳلياس‬/ ‫عربي‬-‫ فرنسي‬،‫= القاموس الحديث‬
— 4e édition, revue et augmentée.
.‫ منقحة ومزيدة‬، 4.‫= طبعة‬
— Le Caire : Elias' Modern Press
.1974 ،‫ المطبعة المصرية‬: ‫= القاھرة‬
(French data transcribed first)

253
ISBD 2011 Appendix C

APPENDIX C: BIBLIOGRAPHY

International standards
IFLA Study Group on the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records,
Functional Requirements for Bibliographic Records: Final Report. München: K.G. Saur,
1998. Also available at:
http://www.ifla.org/en/publications/functional-requirements-for-bibliographic-records
International Conference on Cataloguing Principles. Report. London: International
Federation of Library Associations, 1963.
International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions. Guidelines for the
application of the ISBDs to the description of component parts. London: IFLA Universal
Bibliographic Control and International MARC Programme, 1988. Available online at:
http://www.ifla.org/files/cataloguing/isbd/component-parts.pdf
International Federation of Library Associations and Institutions. IFLA Cataloguing
Principles: the Statement of International Cataloguing Principles (ICP) and its Glossary
in 20 Languages. Ed. by Barbara B. Tillett and Ana Lupe Cristán. München: K.G. Saur,
2009. Also available at:
http://www.ifla.org/en/publications/statement-of-international-cataloguing-principles
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 2108:2005, Information and
documentation – International standard book number (ISBN)
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 3297:2007, Information and
documentation – International standard serial number (ISSN)
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 3901:2001, Information and
documentation – International Standard Recording Code (ISRC)
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 4217:2008, Codes for the
representation of currencies and funds.
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 10957:2009, Information and
documentation – International standard music number (ISMN)
International Organization for Standardization. ISO 80000-3:2006, Quantities and units.
Part 3, Space and time. Revises ISO 31-1:1992.

Other sources consulted or referenced

Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. 2nd ed. Chicago: American Library Association,
1978, and subsequent revisions.
Bowers, Fredson. Principles of Bibliographical Description. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton
University Press, 1949.
Delsey, Tom. The Logical Structure of the Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules. 1998–
1999. Available at: http://www.rda-jsc.org/docs.html
Descriptive Cataloging of Rare Materials (Books). Washington, D.C.: Cataloging
Distribution Service, Library of Congress, 2007.

255
Appendix C ISBD 2011

Fingerprints = Empreintes = Impronte. Paris: Institut de recherche et d'histoire des

textes, 1984. 2 vol., reproduced at:
http://edit16.iccu.sbn.it/web_iccu/info/it/Impronta_regole.htm, supplemented by the
periodical: Nouvelles des empreintes = Fingerprint newsletter. — No. 1 (1981)– Paris:
Institut de recherche et d'histoire des textes, 1981–, reproduced at
http://edit16.iccu.sbn.it/web_iccu/info/it/Impronta_notiziario.htm
Gaskell, Philip. A New Introduction to Bibliography. Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1972.
RDA/ONIX Framework for Resource Categorization. 2006. Available at:
http://www.rda-jsc.org/working2.html#chair-10
Reitz, Joan M. ODLIS—Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science,
http://www.abc-clio.com/ODLIS/about.aspx. Also available in print, Westport, Conn.:
Libraries Unlimited, 2004.
Updike, D. B, Printing Types: Their History, Forms and Use. Cambridge: Harvard
University Press, 1937.
U.S. Defense Mapping Agency, Hydrographic/Topographic Center. Glossary of
Mapping, Charting, and Geodetic Terms. 4th ed. 1981. Reprint, Honolulu, Hawaii:
University Press of the Pacific, 2005.
Vriesema, P.C.A. “The STCN-fingerprint”, in: Studies in bibliography 39 (1986), p. 93-
100; “The STCN-fingerprint”, available online at
http://www.koninklijkebibliotheek.nl/stcn/vingerafdruk-en.html

256
ISBD 2011 Appendix D

APPENDIX D: ABBREVIATIONS
The following abbreviations and symbols are recommended but not prescribed for use in
English-language records. Other abbreviations as used in ISO 80000-321 are
recommended for use throughout the ISBD (see A.6.4).
b&w black and white
CD compact disc (sound recordings)
CD-I compact disc-Interactive
CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
cm/s centimetres per second
col. colour, coloured
cop. copyright
diam. diameter
fr. frame or frames
ill. illustrations
in. inch or inches
ips inches per second
m/s metres per second
mono monophonic/monaural
p. pages
p or P phonogram (sound recording copyright) date
photo CD photo compact disc
quad quadraphonic
rpm revolutions per minute
sd. sound
si. silent
stereo stereophonic
vol. volume or volumes

21 International Organization for Standardization. ISO 80000-3:2006. Quantities and Units—

Part 3: Space and time.
257
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

APPENDIX E: GLOSSARY
Definitions are given for those terms used in the ISBD in a special sense, or in one of
several senses in general use. Some terms used in the normal bibliographic sense are also
defined. Sources for some definitions are identified after the definition. Full citations are
given in the bibliography (Appendix C).
 AACR2 = Anglo-American Cataloguing Rules, 2nd edition
 DCRM(B) = Descriptive Cataloging of Rare Materials (Books)
 ODLIS = Joan M. Reitz, Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science
(used by permission)
 USDMA = U.S. Defense Mapping Agency
absorption
the incorporation of one or more continuing resources into another continuing resource,
with the absorbed continuing resources typically losing their separate identities
access
see direct access; remote access
accompanying documentation
see documentation
accompanying material
any material issued with the resource that is being described, and intended to be used
with it (see also documentation; insert)
accompanying material statement
a brief description of accompanying material
acronym
a word formed from the initial letter or letters of each of the successive parts or major
parts and/or each of the successive words or major words of a compound term, such as
the name of a corporate body or a title (see also initialism)
alternative title
the second part of a title proper that consists of two parts (each of which has the form of
an independent title), joined by a word such as or or its equivalent in another language,
e.g. Moby-Dick, or, The Whale
analytical title page
the title page of a monograph within a monographic series or of a separately-titled part of
a multipart monographic resource
antiquarian
relating to older monographic resources
area
a major section of the bibliographic description, comprising data of a particular category
or set of categories
art reproduction
a mechanically reproduced art work in a commercial edition

259
Appendix E ISBD 2011

ascension
see right ascension
audiovisual resource
a resource in a medium that combines sound with visual images, for example, a motion
picture or videorecording with soundtrack, or a slide presentation synchronized with
audiotape [ODLIS]
avant-titre
other title information introducing the title proper, and occurring above the title proper on
the prescribed source of information for the title and statement of responsibility area
back-to-back
a form of binding in which two texts are bound together, each beginning at one of the
covers, with the pages in the same orientation relative to the spine, e.g. a French and
Arabic text bound together (see also tête-bêche)
bibliographic description
a set of bibliographic data recording and identifying a resource
bibliographic format
see format <older monographic resources>
bibliographic resource
see resource
bound with
a designation used for a printed resource contained in a volume with one or more other
resources that have been arranged and bound subsequent to publication (see also issued
with). It is used in copy-specific information
broadsheet
a separately published sheet, printed on one side only and intended to be read unfolded;
usually intended to be posted, publicly distributed, or sold, e.g. proclamation, handbill,
ballad-sheet, news-sheet
broadside
see broadsheet
caption title
a title of a resource given at the beginning of the first page of the text
carrier
see physical carrier
cartographic resource
representation, in whole or in part, of the Earth or any celestial body at any scale, such as
two- and three-dimensional maps and plans; aeronautical, nautical and celestial charts;
globes; block-diagrams; map sections; aerial, satellite and space photographs; remote-
sensing imagery; atlases; bird's-eye views

260
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

cartridge
a permanently encased single reel of film or magnetic tape whose ends are joined
together to allow continuous playback without rewinding, used for recording
microreproductions of text and/or images (microfilm cartridge), or for playing sound
(sound cartridge), motion pictures (film cartridge) or video (videocartridge). Usually
designed to be inserted into a display or playback device
cassette
a permanently encased film or magnetic tape storage device, incorporating both supply
and take-up reels into a removable unit, and used for recording microreproductions of
text and/or images (microfilm cassette), or for playing sound (sound cassette), motion
pictures (film cassette) or video (videocassette). Usually designed to be inserted into a
display or playback device
catalogue number
an identification number a record label assigns to a recording
chief source of information
see preferred source of information
chorus score
notated music for a work for voices and instruments that gives only the choral music in
score form without the music for the instruments
cine mode
arrangement of successive images on microfilm and filmstrips with the base of each
frame perpendicular to the edges of the film (see also comic mode)
close score
notated music giving all the parts on a minimum of staves, normally two
collation
a list of the signatures of a book, indicating the number of leaves in each
collective title
a title for a resource that consists of two or more individual works that applies to the
resource as a whole
colophon
a statement usually at the end of a resource giving information about its publication or
printing, and in some cases, other bibliographic information, including the title.
Particularly in fifteenth- and sixteenth-century books, and in Asian books until the
twentieth century, the colophon may give information generally found on the title page in
later books (see also title page; title-page substitute)
coloured illustration
an illustration containing any colour; black, white, and shades of grey are not to be
considered colours
comic mode
arrangement of successive images on microfilm and filmstrips with the base of each
frame parallel to the edge of the film (see also cine mode) [ODLIS]

261
Appendix E ISBD 2011

common title
that part of the title that is carried by a group of related resources in addition to their
different section titles. The common title serves to indicate this relationship and together
with the section title identifies a given resource. The common title may also be common
to a main resource and its supplement or supplements and to a main series and its
subseries when the supplement or supplements or subseries have a dependent title or
titles
condensed score
notated music giving only the principal musical parts on a minimum of staves, usually
organized by instrumental sections
conductor part
see piano (violin, etc.) conductor part
container
any housing for a resource, a group of resources, or a part of a resource, that is physically
separable from the material being housed; the sleeve, album or a slipcase, box, or folder
for a set of discs/disks is a container; a cassette or cartridge is not a container (see also
physical carrier)
content form
the fundamental form or forms in which the content of a resource is expressed
content qualification
the type of content, presence or absence of motion, dimensionality, or sensory nature of a
resource
content standard
a detailed set of rules for preparing bibliographic records to describe and represent
resources added to a library or archival collection. A content standard is established to
maintain consistency within the catalogue and between the catalogues of libraries or
archives using the same standard. The word content refers to the content of the
bibliographic or descriptive record, not the content of the resource being described
continuing resource
a resource that is issued over time with no predetermined conclusion. A continuing
resource is either a serial or an ongoing integrating resource
coordinates
<cartographic resources> the quantities of latitude and longitude that define the position
of a point on the surface of the Earth or other celestial sphere [USDMA, under
geographic coordinates]
corporate body
any organization or group of persons and/or organizations that is identified by a particular
name. This includes named occasional groups and events, such as meetings, conferences,
congresses, expeditions, exhibitions, festivals and fairs. Typical examples of corporate
bodies are associations, institutions, business firms, nonprofit enterprises, governments,
government agencies, religious bodies and conferences (see also issuing body)
cover
the outer covering of a resource, of whatever material

262
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

cover title
the title printed on the (original) front cover of a resource
data set name
see file name
date of publication, production, and/or distribution
the date on which a resource is officially offered for sale or distribution to the public,
usually given in the form of a year; differs from dates relating to intellectual
responsibility, such as dates of composition [ODLIS, under publication date]
declination
the angular distance to a body on the celestial sphere measured north or south through
90° from the celestial equator along the hour circle of the body; comparable to latitude on
the terrestrial sphere [USDMA]
dependent title
a title that by itself is insufficient to identify a resource and that requires the addition of
the common title, or the title of the main resource or the title of the main series.
Examples are section titles, some titles of individual sheets of a map series, some
supplement titles and some titles of subseries and the titles of some parts of a multipart
monographic resource (see also section title)
dependent title designation
numbering that alone or in conjunction with a dependent title serves to distinguish one of
two or more related resources having a common title (see also section designation;
subseries designation)
dimensions
the linear measurements (height, width, depth) of a resource and/or, for resources that
require equipment for their use, dimensions relevant to the use of the resource
diorama
a three-dimensional representation of a scene, created by placing objects, figures, etc., in
front of a two-dimensional painted background
direct access
the use of an electronic resource by use of a physical carrier, such as a disk/disc, cassette
or cartridge, designed to be inserted into a computer or other electronic device or a
peripheral device
docket title
a title written, typed, or printed on a document, or on a label affixed to the document,
briefly indicating its contents or subject; usually found perpendicular to the main text, on
an otherwise blank page (e.g. the verso of the last leaf), on a document designed to be
folded for filing [DCRM(B)]
document
see resource
documentation
information issued by the publisher, creator, etc., with the resource, normally in the form
of manuals or guides (sometimes electronic) describing how to initiate, operate, and
maintain the resource (see also accompanying material)
263
Appendix E ISBD 2011

edition
all copies of a resource produced from substantially the same original input and issued by
the same agency or group of agencies or a person. For older monographic resources, all
copies of a resource printed at any time from substantially the same type-pages (see also
facsimile reproduction, impression, issue <printed monographic resources>, state <older
monographic resources>, type-forme, type-page, variant copy)
edition statement
a word or phrase, or a group of characters, indicating that a resource belongs to an edition
electronic resource
a resource consisting of materials that are computer-controlled, including materials that
require the use of a peripheral (e.g. a CD-ROM player) attached to a computer; the
resources may or may not be used in an interactive mode. Included are two types of
resources: data (information in the form of numbers, letters, graphics, images and sound,
or a combination thereof) and programs (instructions or routines for performing certain
tasks including the processing of data). In addition, they may be combined to include
electronic data and programs (e.g. educational software with text, graphics and
programs).
This definition of electronic resources is taken as applying for the most part to resources
that are generally available, and includes those accessed via telecommunications.
Resources produced and/or generated for limited distribution, for fee on demand, or on a
made-to-order basis are, however, included. A resource residing in permanent memory in
a computer (ROM) is understood to be part of the device in which it is stored, and, if
catalogued, would be treated as a resource requiring remote access. Programmed toys,
calculators, and other programmed objects are considered to be outside the intended
scope of the ISBD
element
a word or phrase, or a group of characters, representing a distinct unit of bibliographic
information and forming part of an area of the bibliographic description
epoch
<cartographic resources> an arbitrary moment in time to which measurements of
position for a body or orientation for an orbit are referred [USDMA]
equinox
<cartographic resources> one of two points of intersection of the ecliptic and the
celestial equator, occupied by the sun when its declination is 0° [USDMA]
extent
the number of units and/or subunits making up a resource, e.g the volumes and/or pages
of a printed text, the frames in a filmstrip, the duration or playing time of an audiovisual
resource
facsimile reprint
see facsimile reproduction
facsimile reproduction
a new edition of a resource in which the main part is reproduced exactly from the original
pages of an earlier edition. This is normally made by a different publisher from that of
the original and often has its own title page and other introductory matter

264
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

fascicle
a division of a printed resource that, for convenience in printing or publication, is issued
in small installments, usually incomplete in themselves; they do not necessarily coincide
with any formal division of the work into parts, etc. Usually the fascicle is protected by
temporary paper wrappers. It may or may not be numbered. A fascicle is distinguished
from a part by being a temporary division of a work rather than a formal component unit.
[AACR2]
file name
a name, usually consisting of a maximum number of alphanumeric characters that are
used to identify either a data resource or a program to the computer. Also known as data
set name
film cartridge
see cartridge
film cassette
see cassette
film reel
see reel
film loop
a length of film with the ends spliced together for continuous play, usually in the form of
a cartridge utilizing 8 mm film and having a maximum running time of 4 1/2 minutes
[ODLIS]
filmstrip
a roll of film, usually 16 mm or 35 mm, containing a succession of images designed to be
viewed frame by frame, with or without integral sound. If the shorter side of the frame
runs parallel to the sprocket holes, the filmstrip is described as single frame; if the longer
side of the frame runs parallel to the sprocket holes, it is described as double frame
fingerprint
<older monographic resources> a group of characters derived from a resource with the
purpose of identifying the edition uniquely. The fingerprint consists of a number of
characters drawn from a number of uniform places in the text of the resource, followed
by a number indicating the source of one or more of the characters, and/or a letter
indicating the direction of the chain-lines, and/or the date as it appears in the publication,
production, distribution, etc., area
flash card
a card or other opaque material printed with words, numerals or pictures and designed for
rapid display
flip chart
a set of subject-integrated data sheets, hinged together at the top or side and designed for
presentation on an easel
form/forme
see type-forme
format
in general, refers to the particular physical presentation of a resource
265
Appendix E ISBD 2011

format
<electronic resources> the manner in which data are arranged in a medium of input,
output or storage (see also medium; physical carrier)
format
<notated music> see music format
format
<older monographic resources> the designation of the number of type-pages in each type-
forme. In a folio (2o, 2:o, etc.), there are two type-pages in each forme; in a quarto (4o,
4:o, etc.), there are four; in an octavo (8o, 8:o, etc.) eight, and so on
former title
an earlier title of a continuing resource that has continued under another title (in whole or
in part), or has merged with another continuing resource under another title or titles, or
has been absorbed by another continuing resource (in whole or in part) under another title
frequency
the intervals at which the issues or parts of a serial or the updates to an integrating
resource are issued, such as daily, weekly, monthly, annually
game
a set of materials designed for use according to prescribed rules in play and/or instruction
gathering
<older monographic resources> a number of folds arranged within each other. Normally,
one sheet forms one gathering, but if the type-pages are imposed in half-sheets or in other
fractions of a whole type-forme, the printed sheet may form more than one gathering.
More than one sheet can also be arranged in one gathering. A folio (2o, 2:o, etc.) may be
gathered, or quired, in fours (two sheets per gathering) or in sixes, etc.
generic term
(1) a general term indicating the kind, form or genre and/or periodicity of a resource;
terms such as Abhandlungen, annales, annual report, bulletin, cahiers, compte rendu des
séances, circular letter, journal, newsletter, occasional paper, proceedings, report,
transactions, and their equivalents in other languages, are considered to be generic terms;
(2) for music, a term indicating a musical form or genre
geographic coordinates
see coordinates
graphic
a two-dimensional image (or set of images) produced in its original form by such
techniques as drawing, engraving, painting or photography. Graphics are normally
accessible to the naked eye, though in one instance (stereographs) special viewing
equipment is needed for their use
half title
the title of a book as printed, in full or in brief, on the recto of a leaf preceding the title
page, usually in a smaller size of the font in which the title proper is printed on the title
page [ODLIS]
hologram
a three-dimensional image made by a process based on the principle of light interference
266
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

illustration
a diagrammatic, pictorial or other graphic representation occurring within a resource
impression
(1) all copies of an edition produced at one time or in one operation;
(2) all copies of the sheets of a resource printed in one print run from the same setting of
type-pages (see also edition, issue <printed monographic resources>, state <older
monographic resources>, variant copy)
independent title
a title that by itself is sufficient to identify a resource
initialism
the initial letters of the name of an organization or other entity or of any group of words
(see also acronym)
insert
a resource that is issued with another resource by being inserted into it, either loose or
fixed, either regularly or occasionally. Any printed material, such as a map, illustration,
subscription blank, advertising supplement, etc., slipped loose (unbound) into a book or
periodical, which is not an integral part of the publication. [ODLIS] (see also
accompanying material; common title; dependent title)
inset
<older monographic resources> any leaf or gathering printed with letterpress in a separate
process, not forming an integral part of the regular gatherings of leaves, but issued with
the resource. In bookbinding, a section of two or more leaves placed within another
section in such a way that the back folds of both are sewn in the same pass of the thread.
The inset section can wrap around the outside of the main section ("outsert") or be placed
in its center or at some intermediate location within it. Insetting is used to include plates
without having to go through the time-consuming process of tipping them in. [ODLIS]
Also refers to a small diagram, map, or illustration printed within the area of a larger map
or illustration, usually enclosed in a border of ruled lines. [ODLIS]
integrating resource
a resource that is added to or changed by means of updates that do not remain discrete
and are integrated into the whole. Integrating resources can be finite or ongoing.
Examples of integrating resources include updating looseleafs and updating web sites
ISBN (International Standard Book Number)
a number that uniquely identifies a book or book-like product as defined in international
standard ISO 2108
ISMN (International Standard Music Number)
a number that uniquely identifies a publication of printed music as defined in
international standard ISO 10957
ISRC (International Standard Recording Code)
a code that uniquely identifies a sound recording or music videorecording as defined in
international standard ISO 3901

267
Appendix E ISBD 2011

ISSN (International Standard Serial Number)

an eight-digit number assigned to a continuing resource by the ISSN Network, as defined
in international standard ISO 3297
issue
<printed monographic resources> those copies of an edition that constitute a planned
publishing unit, distinguishable from other copies of that edition by one or more
differences (e.g. a new title page or colophon that expressly identifies the copies as a
discrete unit) (see also facsimile reproduction; impression; reissue; state <older
monographic resources>; variant copy)
issue
<serials> one of the successive parts of a serial
issued with
a designation used for a resource as arranged and issued by a publisher together with one
or more other, different resources (generally with separate title pages and separate
pagination) (see also bound with)
issuing body
a corporate body under whose auspices a resource may be published. The body may or
may not be intellectually responsible for the resource, and may or may not be the
publisher
iteration
an instance of an integrating resource, either as first published or after it has been updated
key title
the unique name assigned to a continuing resource by the ISSN Network and inseparably
linked with its ISSN. The key title may be the same as the title proper; or, in order to
achieve uniqueness, it can be constructed by the addition of identifying and/or qualifying
elements such as name of issuing body, place of publication, edition statement (see also
ISSN)
kit
see multimedia resource
label name
the brand or trademark name associated with all or some of the products of a publisher or
production company, particularly for sound recordings
leaf
one of the units into which the original sheet or half sheet of paper, parchment, etc., is
folded to form part of a book, pamphlet, journal, etc.; each leaf consists of two pages, one
on each side, either or both of which may be blank [AACR2]
local access
see direct access
logo
an emblem or graphic design used in publications and on promotional materials by a
company, organization, agency, or institution as a trademark or symbol of its identity
[ODLIS]

268
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

looseleaf
see updating looseleaf
main series
a series that contains one or more subseries
map projection
see projection
map series
a number of related but physically separate and bibliographically distinct cartographic
units intended by the producer or producers or issuing body or bodies to form a single
group. For bibliographic treatment, the group is collectively identified by any commonly
occurring unifying characteristic or combination of characteristics including a common
designation (e.g. collective title, number, or a combination of both); sheet identification
system (including successive or chronological numbering systems); scale; publisher;
cartographic specifications; uniform format; etc.
masthead
a statement of title, ownership, editors, etc., of a newspaper or periodical; although its
location is variable, for newspapers it is commonly found on the editorial page or at the
top of the front page, and, for periodicals, on the contents page
media type
the type or types of carrier used to convey the content of a resource; generally reflects the
format of the storage medium and housing of a carrier in combination with the type of
intermediation device required to render, view, run, etc., the content of a resource
medium
the physical substance or material (paper, film, magnetic tape, optical disc, etc.) that
carries or communicates information content (see also format <electronic resources>;
multimedia resource; physical carrier)
merger
<continuing resources> the coming together of two or more continuing resources to form
a new continuing resource, with the merged resources typically losing their former
separate identities
microfiche
a rectangular sheet of film carrying a set of microphotographs in two-dimensional array.
Microfiches usually include a title and other bibliographic data that can be read without
magnification
microfilm cartridge
see cartridge
microfilm cassette
see cassette
microfilm reel
see reel
microfilm slip
a short length of microfilm not contained on a reel

269
Appendix E ISBD 2011

microform
a resource with images too small to be read by the unaided human eye; intended to be
magnified for use
microopaque
a rectangular opaque card carrying a set of microphotographs in two-dimensional array
miniature score
a score reduced in size and not intended primarily for performance; sometimes known as
a “pocket score” or “study score”
monographic resource
a resource that is complete in one part, or intended to be completed within a finite
number of parts
monographic series
see series
motion picture
a length of film, with or without a magnetic or optical sound track, bearing a sequence of
images that create the illusion of movement when projected in rapid succession
multilevel description
a method of bibliographic description based on the division of descriptive information
into two or more levels. The first level contains information common to the whole or
main resource. The second and subsequent levels contain information relating to the
individual part or other unit
multimedia resource
a resource comprising two or more distinct media or differing forms of the same medium,
no one of which is identifiable as being of primary importance. Usually intended for use
as a unit (see also medium)
multipart monographic resource
a monographic resource in a finite number of physically separate parts known to have
been conceived or published as a unit; the separate parts may have their own titles and
statements of responsibility. No single part is identifiable as being of primary importance
multipart resource
a resource composed of discrete parts conceived, created, realized or arranged as a unit.
A multipart resource can be a multipart monographic resource or a serial
music format
the physical form in which a notated music resource is presented in the resource (e.g.
score, parts); also known as musical presentation format
music part
see part
neat line
<cartographic resources> a line, usually grid or graticule, that encloses the detail of a
map

270
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

newspaper
a serial issued at frequent intervals, usually daily, weekly or semiweekly, that reports
events and discusses topics of general current interest
notated music
a music resource in readable form, reproduced by printing methods, by photocopying, by
offset printing methods, digitalisation, etc. Notated music resources include music
intended for performance, tutors, studies, exercises and facsimile editions of music
manuscripts
numbering
the identification of each of the successive issues or parts of a resource. The numbering
can include a numeral, a letter, any other character, or the combination of these, with or
without an accompanying word (volume, number, etc.), and/or a chronological
designation
older monographic resource
a resource produced prior to the introduction of machine printing in the nineteenth
century; includes those published for the market as well as those printed in few, or even
single copies, for private or limited distribution
other title information
a word or phrase, or a group of characters, appearing in conjunction with, and
subordinate to, the title proper of the resource. Other title information also occurs in
conjunction with, and subordinate to, other titles (e.g. parallel titles, titles of individual
works contained in the resource, titles in series/subseries statements). Other title
information qualifies, explains or completes the title to which it applies, or is indicative
of the character, contents, etc., of the resource or the works contained in it, or is
indicative of the motive for, or the occasion of, the resource’s production. The term
includes sub-titles and avant-titres, but does not include other titles (e.g. spine titles,
container titles, sleeve titles, other forms of the title proper) found on the resource but not
on the prescribed sources of information for the area being described
output medium
see medium
pagination
the sequential numbering of the pages of a printed text; for the purposes of the ISBD, the
term includes the numbering of leaves, columns, etc.
parallel title
a title presented on the preferred source of information for the resource as an equivalent
in another language or script of the title proper of the resource or of an individual work in
a resource with no collective title
part
<notated music> music printed for one of the performers in an ensemble (see also piano
(violin, etc.) conductor part)
part designation
<multipart resources> numbering following the common title that alone or in conjunction
with a part title serves to distinguish one part from another part

271
Appendix E ISBD 2011

Phonogram (“P”) date

a date appearing with the sound recording copyright symbol ℗; it has variant meanings
under different copyright conventions and laws but generally indicates the first date of the
sound recording
photograph
an opaque print produced by the action of light on sensitive film
physical carrier
the physical medium on or in which data, sound, images, programs, etc., may be stored.
For certain categories of material, the physical carrier consists of a storage medium (e.g.
tape, film) sometimes encased in a plastic, metal, etc., housing (e.g. cassette, cartridge)
that is an integral part of the resource (see also container; medium)
piano (violin, etc.) conductor part
performance part to which cues have been added to enable the performer to function also
as conductor; sometimes called “piano (violin, etc.) conductor score”
place of publication
the geographic location in which a resource is issued, usually given on a source of
information as the name of a city [ODLIS]
plate
a leaf containing illustrative matter, with or without explanatory text, that does not form
part of either the preliminary or the main sequences of pages or leaves or does not form
an integral part of a gathering of leaves of text. For older monographic resources, plates
are always leaves that are printed with some technique other than letterpress. Plates may
include leaves that contain no printing other than engraved text (see also illustration)
plate number
<notated music> the number that was given to the original plates, which now appears at
the foot of a page of notated music, identifying the plates from which an edition was
printed. A plate number can consist of a combination of numbers, letters and symbols;
the name of a publisher may be included
poster
a bill or placard intended for public display
preferred source of information
the source of bibliographic data to be given preference as the source from which a
bibliographic description (or portion thereof) is prepared; it contains the title and is
usually the fullest source of information about the resource; it is chosen according to an
order of preference depending on the type of resource
preliminaries
the title page or pages (or the title-page substitute) together with the verso of the title
page or pages (or the title-page substitute) and any pages preceding the title page or pages
(or the title-page substitute)
prescribed punctuation
punctuation supplied by the cataloguing agency according to the requirements of the
ISBD to precede or enclose an element or area of the bibliographic description

272
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

prescribed sources of information

the source or sources from which information is taken for each element or area of
bibliographic description; information taken from outside the prescribed sources for an
area is enclosed in square brackets
print
an etching, engraving, lithograph, etc., in a limited artist's edition
printed resource
a resource in eye-readable form or in an embossed form for use by the visually impaired,
including a resource published for limited distribution or for sale on demand
printer
a person or firm that prints a printed resource, as distinct from the publisher that issues
the resource and the bookseller that offers it for sale; in early printed books, the printer
and publisher were often the same [ODLIS]
producer
<electronic resources> a person or corporate body with the financial and/or
administrative responsibility for the physical processes whereby an electronic resource is
brought into existence. Specific responsibilities may relate in varying degrees to the
creative and technical aspects of a particular work, including collecting data and
converting data into a computerized form
producer
<motion pictures> a person who has overall responsibility for bringing a motion picture
into existence. Specific responsibilities may relate in varying degrees to the creative and
technical aspects of a particular production
producer
<sound recordings> a person who has technical responsibility for making a sound
recording. A producer may also be responsible in varying degrees for the creative and
other aspects of a sound recording.
production company
<motion pictures> a company responsible for the financial, technical and organizational
management of the creation of a motion picture
production company
<sound recordings> a company responsible for making a sound recording or its mass
reproduction (e.g. pressing of discs or replication of tape copies)
projection
<cartographic resources> a systematic drawing of lines on a plane surface to represent the
parallels of latitude and the meridians of longitude of the Earth or a section of the Earth
or other celestial sphere [USDMA, under map projection]
publication
see resource

273
Appendix E ISBD 2011

publisher
a person or corporate body that prepares and issues a resource for public sale or
distribution, normally on the basis of a legal contract in which the publisher is granted
certain exclusive rights in exchange for assuming the financial risk of publication and
agreeing to compensate the author, usually with a share of the profits; in older books, the
publisher and printer are often the same, but since the mid-19th century, the two functions
have been performed by separate entities [ODLIS]
publisher's number
<notated music> a list number that can be given by music publishers, usually appearing
on the title pages of their notated music resources, intended to identify that resource and
facilitate ordering and distribution. The name of a publisher may be included
quire
see gathering
record (verb)
to make a description from information derived or obtained from a resource rather than
copying the exact textual information (see also transcribe)
recording company
see production company <sound recordings>
reel
a flanged circular holder with a hole running from end to end onto which a roll of film or
magnetic tape is wound, and used for recording microreproductions of text and/or images
(microfilm reel), or for playing sound (sound reel), motion pictures (film reel) or video
(videoreel). Usually designed to be inserted into a display or playback device
reissue
a named or otherwise identified batch of copies of a resource produced from the same
master copy as an earlier issue, in the same physical form, and emanating from the same
publishing or production agency (see also edition)
remote access
the use of an electronic resource stored on a server through a computer network
remote sensing
the measurement or acquisition of information of some property of an object or
phenomenon by a recording device that is not in physical or intimate contact with the
object or phenomenon under study; sometimes restricted to the practice of data collection
in the wavelengths from ultraviolet to radio regions [USDMA]
representative fraction
the scale of a map or chart expressed as a fraction or ratio [USDMA]
reprint
(1) a new edition reproducing the text of an earlier one as exactly as possible;
(2) a new impression made, or derived from, the same master as an earlier one
resolution
<graphic resources> the smallest measuring unit used to register data for a computer
image, expressed as dots per inch, pixels per line, or lines per millimetre. It indicates the
amount of detail found in one pixel of the image
274
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

resolution
<cartographic resources> the accuracy at which a given map scale can depict the location
and shape of geographic features. The larger the map scale, the higher the possible
resolution. As a map scale decreases, resolution diminishes and feature boundaries must
be smoothed, simplified, or not shown at all, e.g. small areas may have to be represented
as points. An image with one-metre resolution means that each pixel in the image
represents one square metre on the ground
resource
an entity, tangible or intangible, that comprises intellectual and/or artistic content and is
conceived, produced and/or issued as a unit, forming the basis of a single bibliographic
description. Resources include text, music, still and moving images, graphics, maps,
sound recordings and video recordings, electronic data or programs, including those
issued serially (see also whole resource)
resource identifier
a number or alphanumeric designation associated with and identifying a resource
according to an international standard, such as an International Standard Book Number or
an International Standard Serial Number, or a designation assigned by a publisher
right ascension
the angular distance measured eastward on the Equator from the vernal equinox to the
hour circle through the celestial body, from 0 to 24 hours [USDMA]
scale
<cartographic resources> the ratio of distances on the resource to the actual distances
they represent
score
notated music consisting of a series of staves showing all the parts of a musical work in
vertical alignment, so that the parts may be read simultaneously; a work for one
instrument or one voice cannot be rendered in score (see also chorus score; close score;
condensed score; miniature score; vocal score)
section
<continuing resources> one part of a group of related resources having a common title.
The section is normally devoted to a specific subject category and is identified by the
common title of the group and a section title and/or a section designation. There can be
two or more hierarchical levels of sections (subsections)
section designation
numbering following the common title, that alone or in conjunction with a section title
serves to distinguish one part of a group of related resources having a common title (see
also subseries designation)

275
Appendix E ISBD 2011

section title
the title specific to a section that serves to distinguish one part of a group of related
resources having a common title. The section title is dependent on the common title for
identification of a resource whether distinctive or not. A designation such as Series C or
Second series is considered a section title or subseries title when there is more than one
simultaneous section or the subseries is unnumbered. If the designation represents a
change in numbering, it is considered part of the numbering of the serial or series (see
also dependent title)
serial
a continuing resource issued in a succession of discrete issues or parts, usually bearing
numbering, that has no predetermined conclusion. Examples of serials include journals,
magazines, electronic journals, continuing directories, annual reports, newspapers, and
monographic series
series
(1) a serial consisting of a group of separate resources issued in succession, numbered or
unnumbered, each bearing, in addition to its own title proper, a collective title applying to
the group as a whole, i.e., the title of the series; (2) a numbered sequence of issues or
parts within a serial (e.g. Notes and queries, 1st series, 2nd series, etc.)
series statement
a statement identifying a series or multipart monographic resources to which a resource
belongs, including any numbering of the resource within the series or multipart
monographic resource
series title page
an added title page bearing the series title proper and usually, though not necessarily,
other information about the series (e.g. statement of responsibility, numeric designation,
data relating to publication, title of the resource within the series)
sheet
as used in the material description area, a single piece of paper other than a broadsheet
with printed matter on one or both sides
sheet
<older monographic resources> a piece of paper or other material manufactured in a size
to cover the type-forme of the printing press
signature
<older monographic resources> one or more letters and/or symbols and/or numerals
usually printed at the foot of the first and some subsequent recto pages of each gathering
of a resource and used to ensure the correct printing, folding and assembly of a resource
slide
a two-dimensional image on film or other transparent material, mounted in a frame and
designed for use in a projector or viewer
sound cartridge
see cartridge
sound cassette
see cassette

276
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

sound disc
(1) a disc of plastic or other material on which sound vibrations are registered;
(2) an optical disc on which sound is digitally encoded on a metallic surface protected by
plastic polycarbonate
sound recording
a recording on which sound vibrations have been registered by mechanical or electrical
means so that the sound may be reproduced [AACR2]
sound reel
see reel
sources of information
see preferred source of information; prescribed sources of information
specific material designation (SMD)
a term indicating the specific class of material (usually the class of physical object) to
which a resource belongs
split
the division of a continuing resource into two or more new and separate continuing
resources
state
<older monographic resources> a variation within a resource that distinguishes it from
other copies within the same impression or issue in any respect that the publisher has not
identified as representing a discrete publishing effort (see also edition; impression; issue)
statement of responsibility
a statement, transcribed from the resource being described, relating to persons
responsible for the intellectual or artistic content of the resource, to corporate bodies from
which the content emanates, or to persons or corporate bodies responsible for the
performance of the content of the resource [AACR2]
stereograph
slides or pictures, mounted in pairs, designed to produce a three-dimensional optical
effect when used with a stereoscopic viewer. Stereographic images may also be printed
on an opaque surface for use with a hand viewer consisting of bicoloured lenses mounted
in a card frame; this type of stereograph usually appears as a book illustration
storage medium
see medium
study print
a picture accompanied by questions or explanations, which are often printed on the verso
study score
see miniature score
subseries
a series that appears as part of a main series. The subseries may or may not have a title
dependent on that of the main series. The subseries may or may not be numbered (see
also common title; dependent title)

277
Appendix E ISBD 2011

subseries designation
numbering following the title of the main series, that can stand alone or in conjunction
with the title of the subseries (see also section designation)
supplement
a resource, usually issued separately, that complements the main resource by bringing it
up-to-date or otherwise continuing it or containing a special feature not included in it. A
supplement may or may not have a title dependent on that of the main resource (see also
common title, dependent title)
tête-bêche
a form of binding in which one text begins at the “front” and another text at the “back”,
with the texts being inverted with respect to one another, e.g. an English and a French
text bound together (see also back-to-back)
terms of availability
the conditions under which a resource may be obtained, e.g. the price of a resource
offered for sale or a statement that a resource is available for hire or for free
title
a word or phrase, or a group of characters, usually appearing on a resource, that is the
name of the resource or the work (or any one of a group of individual works) contained in
it. A resource may contain titles in several places (e.g. on the preferred source of
information, elsewhere on the resource, on the container, or on accompanying material),
and these titles may be identical or may differ from one another (see also common title;
dependent title)
title page
a page normally at the beginning of a printed resource presenting the fullest information
about the resource and the work or works contained in it. It contains a title and, usually,
although not necessarily, the fullest title information, a statement of responsibility and the
whole or part of the publication statement. (see also colophon)
title-page substitute
a page, portion of a page or other component part of a printed resource that includes the
information usually found on a title page, and that, in the absence of a title page, is used
as the preferred source of information (e.g. cover, caption, masthead, editorial pages, first
page of music, colophon) (see also colophon)
title proper
the chief name of a resource, i.e. the title of a resource in the form in which it appears on
the preferred source of information for the resource. The title proper includes any
alternative title, but excludes parallel titles and other title information. In the case of a
section or some supplements and some titles of subseries or parts, the title proper can
consist of two or more components: the common title (or the title of the main series or of
the multipart monographic resource), the dependent title and the dependent title
designation. For resources containing several individual works the title proper is the
collective title. Resources containing several individual works and lacking a collective
title are considered not to have a title proper. A series or subseries also has its own title
proper (see also common title; dependent title; dependent title designation)

278
ISBD 2011 Appendix E

title screen
<electronic resources> a display of data that includes the title proper and usually, though
not necessarily, the statement of responsibility and the data relating to publication
[AACR2]
trademark name
see label name
transcribe
to make a description copying the exact textual information for the area being described
as found on the resource, except for punctuation or captitalization (see also record)
transparency
a sheet of transparent material, which may be mounted in a card frame, bearing an image
and designed for use with an overhead projector or light box; a single transparency may
be furnished with overlays
type-forme
the combination of type-pages, arranged and locked in a frame, used to print on one side
of a sheet
type-page
the arrangement of movable type in the shape used to print a page on a sheet
updating looseleaf
an integrating resource that consists of one or more base volumes updated by separate
pages that are inserted, removed and/or substituted
variant copy
a copy showing any bibliographically significant difference from one or more other
copies of the same edition. The term may refer to an impression, issue or state
variant title
a title that has not been selected as the title proper or other title information for a resource
videocartridge
see cartridge
videocassette
see cassette
videodisc
a laser- or stylus-readable random-access circular disc that contains both audio and video
signals recorded in an analogue form (e.g. laserdisc format) or a digital form (e.g. DVD
format) that can be played on a television set or a computer
videorecording
a recording of visual images, usually in motion and with sound accompaniment, designed
for playback via a television or other electronic device
videoreel
see reel

279
Appendix E ISBD 2011

visual resource
a resource whose content is conveyed principally through images, still or moving,
projected or non-projected, e.g. graphics, motion pictures, videorecordings
vocal score
notated music for a work for voices and instruments that gives the vocal parts in score
form but the instrumental parts in a keyboard reduction
wallchart
an opaque sheet designed for display and exhibiting data in graphic or tabular form
whole resource
the entity that includes the resource itself, its container, documentation and other
accompanying material as it was produced and/or issued as a unit and that forms the basis
of a single bibliographic description (see also resource)

280
ISBD 2011 Index

INDEX

Abbreviations A.6, Appendix D other title information 1.3.4.2

in Edition statements 2.1.2 parallel title 1.2.5.1
in Physical descriptions Appendix series or subseries title 6.1
D title proper 1.1.5.1
in Publishers’ names 4.2.7 Changes to edition statement
in Qualification to identifier 8.1.3 see Edition statement—changes to
in Series or subseries numbering Changes to name of publisher, producer
6.6.1 and/or distributor
in Statement of projection 3.1.2.2 see Publisher, producer and/or
in Title A.2.7.1 distributor—change of
see also Acronyms and initialisms Changes to statement of responsibility
Abridgements A.6 see Statement of responsibility—
in Resources with no title proper changes
1.1.5.4 Changes to title proper
in Other title information 1.3.4.2 see Title proper—changes
in Statement of responsibility Chronological designation
1.4.5.3 see Numbering data
in Title proper 1.1.5.1 Collation (Older monographic
Absorption notes 7.2.4.7.4 resources) 7.5.1
Accompanying material statement 5.4 see also Material description area
in Multi-level description Collective title 1.1.4.3
Appendix A collective title proper lacking
Acronyms and initialisms A.6.5 1.1.4.4, 1.1.5.2
in Other title information 1.1.4.1.1, edition statement 2.1.4.2
1.3.3.1 Colour specifications 5.2.4
in Statement of responsibility Common title 1.1.3.7, 6
1.4.5.4 transcription 1.1.5.3
in Title proper A.2.7.1, 1.1.3.3, Container 5.3.1.1, 5.3.1.3
1.3.3.1, 7.1.1.3 Content form 0.1
see also Abbreviations Content qualification 0.1.1
Alternative title 1.1.3.4 Contents notes 7.7
Audience notes Continuation notes 7.2.4.7.1
see Use/audience notes Contractions A.6.1
Author statement Coordinates statement 3.1.3
see Statement of responsibility Copy notes 7.11
Availability, Terms of Copyright dates 4.3.6, 4.3.7
see Terms of availability Date of printing or manufacture 4.3.7
Bi-directional records Appendix B Date of publication, production and/or
Bibliographic history distribution 4.3
notes on 7.2 Dependent title 1.1.3.7, 1.1.4.6.1, 6
Bibliographic records transcription 1.1.5.3
single or multiple A.2.1 Description
Bibliographies, notes on 7.7.3 basis of A.4.1
Binding notes 7.8.2 changes requiring a new description
Bound with 7.11 A.2.6, 1.1.6, 1.4.6
Capitalization A.7

281
Index ISBD 2011

changes not requiring a new Inserts 1.1.4.6.2

description A.2.7 notes 7.2.4.4, 7.2.4.5
Dimensions of resource 5.3 International Standard Book Number
Direct-access electronic resource 7.0.4 see ISBN
dimensions 5.3.1.1 International Standard Serial Number
Distribution see ISSN
see Publication, production, ISBN 8.1.2
distribution, etc., area ISSN 8.1.2
Distributor 4.2.5 in Series and subseries 6.5
Edition area 2 notes 7
notes 7.2 Issued with 7.2.4.6
Edition statement 2.1 Key title 8.2
additional edition statement 2.4 Language of the description A.5
changes to A.2.6.2.(b), 2.1.5 in bi-directional records Appendix
in Series or subseries 6.3.3 B
notes 7.2 Languages, Multiple A.3.2.9
parallel edition statement 2.2 Letters in titles A.2.7.1., 1.1.3.5
statement of responsibility 2.3, 2.5 Logo
supplied statement 2.1.3 in Title proper 1.1.3.3
transcription 2.1.2 Looseleaf resource 4.3.10.2, 5.1.2
Editions, Different Major changes to title proper
notes on 7.2.4.3 see Title proper—changes
Electronic resources Manufacturer
see Direct-access electronic see Printer or manufacturer
resources Material or type of resource specific
Remote-access electronic area 3
resources notes 7.3
Examples A.11 Mathematical data (Cartographic
Extent of resource 5.1 resources) 3.1
Facsimile notes 7.3.1
publication, production, distribution, Media type 0.2
etc. 4 Merger notes 7.2.4.7.2
notes 7.2.4.2 Microforms 5.2.5
numbering 3.3. Minor changes to title proper
File name 1.1.2 see Title proper—changes
Filmstrips 5.1.3, 5.2.7 Misprints A.8
Fingerprint 8.1.5 Misspelled words A.8
Frequency statement 7.0.3 Mode of access note 7.0.5
Generic title A.2.6.2.(a), 1.1.3.1 Multilevel description 5.4.3, Appendix
Genre notes 7.1.2.1 A
Illustrations 5.2.3 Multiple languages
Imperfections A.10 see Languages, Multiple
Imprint Multiple scripts
see Publication, production, see Scripts, Multiple
distribution, etc., area Music format statement (Notated
Inaccuracies A.8 music) 3.2
in Dates 4.3.5 Name of printer or manufacturer
Initialisms see Printer or manufacturer
see Acronyms and initialisms
282
ISBD 2011 Index

Name of publisher, producer and/or Punctuation A.3.2

distributor Purpose of ISBD A.1.2
see Publisher, producer and/or Qualification
distributor to Resource identifiers 8. 1.3
Note area 7 to Terms of availability 8.3.2
Numbering data 3.3 Relationships to other continuing
notes 7.3.3 resources
in Series and subseries 6.6 notes on 7.2.4
Numbers in titles 1.1.3.5 Remote-access electronic resource
Other physical details 5.2 extent 5.1.3
Other title information 1.3 notes 7.0.5
in Series and subseries 6.3 Reproduction 4
Pagination statement 5.1.4 notes 7.2.4.2
Parallel edition statement Resource identifier and terms of
see Edition statement—parallel availability area 8
edition statement notes 7.8
Parallel other title information 1.3.4.7 Romanisation
Parallel title 1.2 see Transliteration
in Series and subseries 6.2 Scale
notes 7.1.3 see Statement of scale
Material description area 5 Scope of ISBD A.1.1
notes 7.5 Script of the description A.5
Place of printing or manufacture 4.4 in bi-directional records Appendix
Place of publication, production and/or B
distribution 4.1 Scripts, Multiple A.3.2.9
Preferred source of information A.4.2 Section title 1.1.4.6.1, 1.1.5.3
Prescribed punctuation A.3.1 Separation notes 7.2.4.7.3
Prescribed sources of information Series area 6
A.4.3 notes 7.6
Printing or manufacture numbering 6.6
date of other title information 6.3
see Date of printing or manufacture parallel title 6.2
place of statement of responsibility 6.4
see Place of printing or manufacture title 6.1
Printer or manufacturer 4.5 Sound 5.2.6
Privilege dates 4.3.6 Sources of information A.4
Production Specific material designation 5.1
see Publication, production, Split or separation notes 7.2.4.7.3
distribution, etc., area Standard numbers 8
Projection statement 3.1.2 notes on 7.8
Publication, production and/or Statement of scale 3.1.1
distribution date Statement of responsibility 1.4
see Date of publication, production in Additional edition statement 2.5
and/or distribution in Edition statement 2.3
Publication, production, distribution, in Other title information 1.3.2
etc., area 4 in Series or subseries 6.4
notes 7.4 in Title proper 1.1.3.6
Publisher, producer and/or distributor notes 7.1.4
4.2 Subseries 6
283
Index ISBD 2011

designation not described as Title and statement of responsibility

dependent 1.1.5.3 area 1
notes 7.2.4.7.5, 7.2.4.7.6 notes 7.1
Summary note 7.10.2 Title page A.4.2.1.1
Supplements 1.1.4.6 Title proper 1.1
notes 7.2.4.4, 7.2.4.5 changes A.2.6, A.2.7, 1.1.6
Symbols A.9 in series and subseries 6.1
System requirements note 7.0.4 notes 7.1.1
Technical specifications 7.0.4 Translation note 7.2.4.1
Terms of availability 8.3 Transliteration A.5
notes 7.8 notes 7.1.1.2
Title Treatment of resources A.2
see Alternative title Type of resource specific area
Collective title see Material or type of resource
Common title specific area
Dependent title Typographical errors A.8
Generic title Use/audience notes 7.10.3
Key title Variant title 1.3.1
Parallel title notes 7.1.1.2
Section title Versions 2.1.1
Title proper
Variant title

284